Enercalc 6.0 PDF

Structural Engineering Library
Version 6
ENERCALC, INC
Copyright 1983 - 2014
Structural Engineering Library

Version 6.0
by Michael D. Brooks, S.E., P.E.
A product of
ENERCALC, INC.
Structural Engineering Library Version 6

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the
written permission of the publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no
responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this
document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and
the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused
directly or indirectly by this document.
ENERCALC Engineering Software

Publisher
ENERCALC, INC.
Managing Editor
Michael D. Brook s, S.E., P.E.
Post Office Box 188

Corona del Mar, CA 92625
(949) 645-0151
(800) 424-2252
Fax: (949) 645-3881
Sales: info@enercalc.com
Support : support@enercalc.com
Web : www.enercalc.com
Vesion 6 User's Reference

March 2010
Corona del Mar, CA, USA
Table of Contents
Foreword
Part I Introduction
1 Welcome
................................................................................................................................... 3
2 Our History
................................................................................................................................... 4
3 Warning
...................................................................................................................................
& Disclaimer
6
4 License
...................................................................................................................................
& Copyright
7
5 End of ...................................................................................................................................
Service Policy
8
Part II Installation & Activation
10
1 License
...................................................................................................................................
Types
12
2 Installation
...................................................................................................................................
Overview
13
3 Single...................................................................................................................................
Computer Installation
15
4 Activation
...................................................................................................................................
Types
16
5 Network
...................................................................................................................................
Installation
18
6 Network
...................................................................................................................................
License Manager
19
7 Manual
...................................................................................................................................
Activation
20
8 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
& Maintaining License Activation
22
Part III Software Updates
26
1 Web Update
................................................................................................................................... 27
2 Update
...................................................................................................................................
from Website
30
Part IV Support & Maintenance
33
1 Maintenance
...................................................................................................................................
& Support Plan
34
2 Getting
...................................................................................................................................
Assistance
35
3 Viewing
...................................................................................................................................
Enhancements and Changes to the Software
37
Part V Getting Started
39
1 System
...................................................................................................................................
Overview & Design Philosophy
40
2 About...................................................................................................................................
Our Documentation
41
3 Building
...................................................................................................................................
Codes Supported
42
4 Learning
...................................................................................................................................
the Structural Engineering Library
43
5 Introductory
...................................................................................................................................
Videos
44
6 Request
...................................................................................................................................
for Suggestions
45
Part VI Program Overview
47
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 48
Contents
II
2 User Information
................................................................................................................................... 50
3 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Settings
51
4 Files &
...................................................................................................................................
File Locations
58
5 Project
...................................................................................................................................
Assistant
59
6 Databases
................................................................................................................................... 61
7 Screen
...................................................................................................................................
Layout
62
8 Generating
...................................................................................................................................
Reports
65
9 General
...................................................................................................................................
Calculation Screen Usage
66
Part VII Main Menu

1 File
69
................................................................................................................................... 70
2 Settings
................................................................................................................................... 77
Default Values
.......................................................................................................................................................... 78
3 Databases
................................................................................................................................... 79
Steel Section..........................................................................................................................................................
Database
80
Wood Section..........................................................................................................................................................
Database
81
Wood Reference
..........................................................................................................................................................
Design Values Database
82
Masonry Database
.......................................................................................................................................................... 83
Load Combination
..........................................................................................................................................................
Database
84
4 Tools ................................................................................................................................... 88
5 License
................................................................................................................................... 90
6 Help ................................................................................................................................... 91
Part VIII Project Manager
97
1 General
...................................................................................................................................
Division
103
Building Code
..........................................................................................................................................................
Information
104
Project Information
.......................................................................................................................................................... 105
Client Information
.......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Designer Notes
.......................................................................................................................................................... 107
Revision List.......................................................................................................................................................... 108
2 Loads
...................................................................................................................................
& Forces Division
109
3 Calculation
...................................................................................................................................
List
110
Divisions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 114
Adding, Deleting,
..........................................................................................................................................................
Copying
118
Sorting by Division,
..........................................................................................................................................................
Type & Material
120
Changing Calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Order
124
Importing Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 127
4 Project
...................................................................................................................................
Printing
132
Part IX Sample Session
136
1 Getting
...................................................................................................................................
Started
137
2 Starting
...................................................................................................................................
the Program
138
3 Project
...................................................................................................................................
Assistant
139
4 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
a Project File
141
5 Entering
...................................................................................................................................
Project Information
143
II
III

6 Setting
...................................................................................................................................
up your Title Block
145
7 Adding
...................................................................................................................................
a Calculation
147
8 Viewing
...................................................................................................................................
the Calculation Screen
150
9 Changing
...................................................................................................................................
the Default Values/Settings
151
10 Entering
...................................................................................................................................
Data
152
11 Selecting
...................................................................................................................................
Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases
163
12 Displaying
...................................................................................................................................
a Sketch
168
13 Displaying
...................................................................................................................................
Diagrams
169
14 Automatic
...................................................................................................................................
Member Section Selection
171
15 Printing
...................................................................................................................................
a Calculation
174
16 Saving
...................................................................................................................................
a Calculation
177
17 Editing
...................................................................................................................................
a Division Name and Adding a New Division
178
18 Adding
...................................................................................................................................
Another Calculation
182
19 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
a Technical Support Question
185
20 Closing
...................................................................................................................................
a Project File
190
Part X Calculation Modules
192
1 Loads
...................................................................................................................................
& Forces Division
193
ASCE Seismic
..........................................................................................................................................................
Base Shear
194
ASCE Seismic
..........................................................................................................................................................
Demands on Nonstructural Components
207
ASCE Seismic
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wall Anchorage
208
ASCE Wind Enclosure
.......................................................................................................................................................... 210
ASCE 7-10 Wind
..........................................................................................................................................................
Forces, Chapter 27, Part 1
212
ASCE 7-05 Section
..........................................................................................................................................................
6.4, MWFRS:Simplified Forces
227
IBC 2009 Alternate
..........................................................................................................................................................
All-Heights Wind Method
230
ASCE Snow Loads
.......................................................................................................................................................... 236
ASCE Live and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Roof Live Load Reduction
241
Project Load..........................................................................................................................................................
Group Builder
242
2 Beams
................................................................................................................................... 247
Multiple Simple
..........................................................................................................................................................
Beam
260
General Beam
..........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis
271
Wood Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 275
Steel Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 285
Concrete Beam
.......................................................................................................................................................... 290
Beam on Elastic
..........................................................................................................................................................
Foundation
296
Composite Steel
..........................................................................................................................................................
Beam
297
Wood Ledger
.......................................................................................................................................................... 309
Masonry Beam
.......................................................................................................................................................... 315
Steel Beam with
..........................................................................................................................................................
Torsional Loads
322
3 Columns
................................................................................................................................... 327
Column Slenderness
.......................................................................................................................................................... 332
Wood Column
.......................................................................................................................................................... 336
Steel Column
.......................................................................................................................................................... 345
Concrete Column
.......................................................................................................................................................... 351
Masonry Column
.......................................................................................................................................................... 367
4 General
...................................................................................................................................
Walls
373
Concrete Slender
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wall
374
Contents
IV
Masonry Slender
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wall
388
5 Shear
...................................................................................................................................
Walls
401
Concrete Shear
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wall
402
Wood Shear..........................................................................................................................................................
Wall
418
6 Retaining
...................................................................................................................................
Walls
435
Cantilevered..........................................................................................................................................................
Retaining Wall
436
7 Foundations
................................................................................................................................... 467
General Footing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 468
Combined Footing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 480
Wall Footing.......................................................................................................................................................... 489
Pile Group .......................................................................................................................................................... 498
Pole Footing..........................................................................................................................................................
Embedded in Soil
502
Beam on Elastic
..........................................................................................................................................................
Foundation
509
8 2-D Frame
...................................................................................................................................
Analysis
510
Frame Wizard
.......................................................................................................................................................... 515
Joints & Joint
..........................................................................................................................................................
Loads
520
Joint Data......................................................................................................................................................... 523
Joint Loads
.........................................................................................................................................................
& Results
527
Members & Member
..........................................................................................................................................................
Loads
530
Member Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 532
Member Loads
......................................................................................................................................................... 541
Member Forces
......................................................................................................................................................... 546
Sections & Materials
.......................................................................................................................................................... 548
Section Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 548
Material Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 550
Load Combinations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 553
Wood Design.......................................................................................................................................................... 556
Results
.......................................................................................................................................................... 557
Extreme Values
......................................................................................................................................................... 557
Joint Displacements
.........................................................................................................................................................
& Reactions
560
Member End
.........................................................................................................................................................
Forces
561
Member Details
......................................................................................................................................................... 562
Member Check
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results
563
Sign Convention
......................................................................................................................................................... 565
Frame Sketch
.......................................................................................................................................................... 568
Member Diagrams
.......................................................................................................................................................... 569
Reports
.......................................................................................................................................................... 571
Printout
.......................................................................................................................................................... 572
9 Miscellaneous
...................................................................................................................................
Calculation Modules
578
Torsional Analysis
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Rigid Diphragm
579
Point Load on
..........................................................................................................................................................
Slab
593
General Section
..........................................................................................................................................................
Property Calculator
596
Rebar Development
..........................................................................................................................................................
Table
603
Steel Bolt Group
..........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis
605
Steel Base Plate
.......................................................................................................................................................... 609
10 External
...................................................................................................................................
Items
617
EXCEL Spreadsheet
.......................................................................................................................................................... 618
WORD Document
.......................................................................................................................................................... 622
Adobe Acrobat
..........................................................................................................................................................
PDF
626
Scanned Document
.......................................................................................................................................................... 630
IV
Part
Introduction
Last Revised: 11 August 2014
Introduction
1.1
Welcome
Welcome To The Structural Engineering Library
You've chosen one of the most respected Structural Engineering software packages
available today. In continuous development since 1983, Version 6.0 is the culmination of
years of development and refinement from suggestions of engineers worldwide.
The Structural Engineering Library is developed with the practicing engineer in mind.
Although large complex frames are fun projects, structural engineers spend most of their
time designing and analyzing the components of structures. Because most of the buildings
worldwide rely on simple beams, columns, foundations, walls, and other small items, this
software system will quickly become your best friend. The Structural Engineering
Library remembers the mathematics, building code provisions, and standard materials
you need to perform a detailed and economical design.
Because we feel that simple, repetitive engineering problems are far more common than
extensive 3-D frame analysis, this software package is designed specifically for fast,
interactive engineering design of building components. We've combined the typical working
methods of engineers, national building code provisions, and construction material
databases with the principles of structural mechanics into each "calcsheet" module. You
will find that these modules operate very much like an electronic calculation pad.....simply
fill in the data entries and the entire calculation will be instantly updated for your review.
To add even more power and utility to the system, we've added detailed design sketches
and stress diagrams, automatic design and sizing, an online help system, material
databases, and elegant calculation printing to the Structural Engineering Library.
The Structural Engineering Library is designed around a file of calculations called a
"Project". This single file with the extension "EC6" can hold one or thousands of individual
calculations. You add, edit, and delete the calculations in your Project File during the inoffice design stage. Then, when it's time for submittal to a governing agency, you can print
a complete set of calculations.
Because of the ever-expanding number of modules, we invite you to stay in close contact
www.enercalc.com
with our website at

. Maintenance releases, up-to-the-minute technical
advice, revised electronic documentation, and new product information will all be provided
there FIRST.
ENERCALC has put years of work into this package in support of the highly technical and
dedicated service Structural Engineers provide to the people of the world. We continue to
enhance this product weekly and are committed to developing this product well into the
future. We extend our thanks for choosing ENERCALC, and look forward to using your
suggestions to provide you with ever improving tools for your daily work.
1.2
Our History
ENERCALC Engineering Software (now ENERCALC, INC.) originated as one young
engineer playing with his new T.I. programmable calculator in 1980. In 1981, a set of Lotus
1-2-3 spreadsheet templates was developed to automate the repetitive design of
components of tilt-up and small office buildings. The software proved so productive and
time saving that it was decided to market it in the newly founded microcomputer industry.
The entire set of 26 spreadsheet "templates" was named the Structural Engineering
Library and shipped on three 360K 5 1/4" diskettes, running on a 4.77 MHz 8086 IBM PC.
Typical cost of this state of the art engineering hardware and software system was
$6,000!
As years went by, sales of the product increased. For engineers to purchase a technical
software system based as a pre-programmed spreadsheet "template", it was a testament
both to the intelligence of the users and to the easy and simple design of the spreadsheet
based software package.
In 1986, Lotus Development introduced a tool for programmers to link programs written in
"C" to the very guts of 1-2-3. Called the "Add-In Toolkit", it offered a unique opportunity for
ENERCALC software designers. A decision was made to rewrite all of the current
engineering spreadsheet "templates" into the "C" language, and link these powerful
programs to simple 1-2-3 "templates". The Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheets would become data
entry/output screens driving powerful "C" language compiled processing programs. This
solved the major problem with a spreadsheet.....lack of iteration capability that was critical
to engineering tasks.
Our first application of this technology was FastFrame 2-D introduced in 1987. FastFrame
transformed a simple, off-the-shelf spreadsheet program into a powerful finite-element
analysis system with full graphics. Prior to founding RISA Technologies, Bruce Bates
worked on a "lightning fast" 16 MHz PC to develop the FastFrame solver. That solver
would later become the guts of the first version of RISA 2-D. Users were amazed that the
previously complex batch processed frame analysis systems were reduced to entering a
number in a spreadsheet and INSTANTLY the entire frame was recalculated. At the 1987
Lotus Developers Conference in Boston, MA, the actual software authors of Lotus 1-2-3
were stunned to see their "business tool" doing complex analysis for multi story buildings!
With the decline of DOS and Lotus 1-2-3 , ENERCALC rewrote the entire "user interface"
portion that provided the calculation screens and printing. Keeping the same "look and feel"
to ease the change for users, our programmers wrote our own user interface program, as
simple and fast as 1-2-3, complete with support for hundreds of printers. Version 4.4 for
DOS was released in August of 1994, and produced a large increase in ENERCALC's
user base. Version 4.4 for DOS has become known as the "Volkswagen of structural
engineering software"... simple, enduring, yet designed to get you almost anywhere.
The Structural Engineering Library 5.0 for Windows was introduced in 1996 as a
completely new rewrite of the legacy systems of the previous 15 years. Although much of
the proven "C" language engineering calculation processes were retained, the rest of the
system was redesigned and written from scratch for the modern Windows based
computer systems. The days of a spreadsheet based program were now gone, and a new
Introduction
system designed to be as easy as 1-2-3 was introduced.

In 2007 ENERCALC released Version 6 of the Structural Engineering Library. Over the
course of three decades since ENERCALC began we've enjoyed a large, loyal and
consistently growing base of users. This new version is a complete rewrite....the first of
its kind. New solvers, graphics, reporting, user interface, and database designs prepare
this new platform with the future in mind. We look forward to years of enhancements
based on this new release!
Sincerely,
Michael D. Brooks, P.E., S.E.
President & Founder
ENERCALC, INC.
1.3
Warning & Disclaimer

Although it is our intent that the information contained in this manual and associated
software program is accurate and reliable, it is possible that there may be errors, both of
omission and commission, that we are not aware of at any time. ENERCALC, Inc. can
make no warranties, either express or implied, as to the accuracy of the material in this
manual and software nor its suitability for a specific purpose or application for which it is
advertised.
ENERCALC, Inc., its owners, directors, and employees, can offer no guarantee and will
accept no liability for damages of any kind resulting from the use of the information
contained or generated by this document and the accompanying computer software.
If you do not agree to be bound by these conditions and the conditions contained in the
License Agreement 7 contained herein, then you may Internet deactivate the program and
uninstall the software within a sixty (60) day period after the date of your order and request
a full refund of the License Fee.
Introduction
1.4
License & Copyright

The complete License Agreement can be viewed by using the following link:
License Agreement
1.5
End of Service Policy

At some point in the future the current version software will undergo a major overhaul of
capability increase. At this time the prior version reaches its "End of Service" time.
When a version reaches its "End of Service", access to support and maintenance will
cease in about 6 months (the time frame will be set by ENERCALC and is at our
discretion). The software will continue to operate but technical support, updates, and other
support related items will cease to be available.
All software products, Structural Engineering Library included, have a practical commercial
lifetime. In order to provide the highest quality products and support to our customers,
each product is developed utilizing a product life cycle methodology, which includes an
End-of-Service (EOS) phase.
The ENERCALC product EOS policy is to support the current release plus the previous
(one back) release for up to six (6) months by default. After this time, ENERCALC's
product development ceases active development and support of that software release
within the Maintenance and Support Plan. ENERCALC does not create or make available
maintenance releases or patches for software that has reached the EOS milestone.
During the EOS phase, ENERCALC will continue to investigate, troubleshoot, and
characterize issues in an attempt to provide solutions and workarounds using the
production releases. If a solution cannot be found using software that has reached the
EOS milestone, ENERCALC will suggest that the system be upgraded to a more recent
software release.
Once the EOS process starts on a product release, a notice will be posted on all relevant
pages stating that the product release has entered the EOS process.
Note: This policy is subject to revision.
Part
II
10
Installation & Activation

General
The Structural Engineering Library Version 6.0 (SEL) must be installed on each
computer where it will be used. Whether your software is covered by a Flex License or a
Network License the software must reside on the actual computer to be used.
When using our installation program you are offered two choices: Structural Engineering
Library and Network License Manager.
Choose the Structural Engineering Library option to install the software on all
computers where it will be used.
If you have a Network License you will also be installing the Network License Manager
(NLM). (ENERCALC's Network License Manager is used to control the simultaneous
activation of the SEL on many computers in your office.) Before installing the NLM make
sure that you need it and that you have already been given a current Product Control Code
for activation.
Version 6.0 has a new license security system that activates the software.
11
For users who have a Flex License this involves a copy & paste of the Product Control
Code (PCC) into the activation section of the program and then using an [Internet
Activate] button to obtain activation permission from our Internet Activation server.
You can install the SEL on ANY computer that you may wish to use it on, BUT
before you can have it work in "Licensed & Activated Mode" you must Activate it.
This means you can easily move the activation of the software around between all of your
computers. You can just use this Internet based activation and deactivation ability to use
the software wherever you wish.
For network users, the Product Control Code only activates the Network License
Manager (NLM) (see below). You then install the SEL on all computers where you will use
the software. When the NLM is used it is not necessary to enter the PCC on all of the
workstations where the SEL is installed. When the SEL is launched on the workstations, it
simply gets permission to run from the Network License Manager.
Important: Anti-Virus software and Firewalls

Our Internet Activation system and Web Update system use the Internet with typical
"http over port 80" communications. You may have to tell your anti-virus and firewall
software to allow two of our programs the ability to communicate over the Internet. These
program file names are EC6.exe and ec6webupdate.exe, and they are typically installed
in the Program Files\ENERCALC_6 folder.
If you do not perform this task then your activation request may not receive a response.
There are other methods of manually activating the software if you do not have an Internet
Connection. Please see the "For Our Users" page at www.enercalc.com/users.html under
Manual License Activation and also the last section in this guide.
12
2.1
License Types
There are four licensing modes that the Structural Engineering Library can operate in:
Licensed & Activated Mode
When you have purchased a software license you will receive a Product Control Code that
will allow you to activate the software. After you have entered your Product Control Code
and performed an activation, the product will be completely operational. Your user
registration number and licensee name will appear on all printouts and you will see a
Maintenance & Support Plan expiration date on the licensing screen.
Short Term License
This is a limited time license that expires several months after purchase. When you have
purchased a software license you will receive a Product Control Code that will allow you to
activate the software. After you have entered your Product Control Code and performed an
activation the product will be completely operational. Your user registration number and
licensee name will appear on all printouts and you will see a Maintenance & Support Plan
expiration date on the licensing screen. At the end of the term the software stops
operating, but all Project Files remain intact.
Academic Mode
This is a special version/mode for students. Each time an Academic license is granted an
expiration date is set after which time the software stops operating. In addition the printouts
have a watermark stating that it is an educational version and the student's name and
registration number are printed.
Click here
for an application for an Academic License.
Plan Check Mode

This is a special version/mode for public plan review agencies. Each time a Plan Check
license is granted an expiration date is set after which time the software stops operating. In
addition the printouts have a watermark stating that it is a plan check version and the
agency's name and registration number are printed.
Plan Check License.
Click here
for an application for a
2.2
13
Installation Overview
General
For the more current installation information you need to review this document located on
our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_Info.pdf
The Structural Engineering Library Version 6.0 (SEL) must be installed on each
computer where it will be used. But it must be activated to be used in "Licensed" mode.
Click here for a video on installation:
Installation
You have two main options for how you obtain that activation. The preferred option is to
use our Internet Activation system. The other common option is to use the Network
License Manager. The activation method is chosen at the time the software is ordered,
and the Product Control Code that you are issued is coordinated with that activation
method. We'll cover activation shortly, but at this point it is important to understand that
your chosen activation method has some influence over exactly what steps you must take
during the installation process.
When using our installation program you have two choices: Structural Engineering
Library and Network License Manager. You will always install the Structural
Engineering Library on all computers where it will be used. You will only install the Network
License Manager if you have chosen the option of a Network License. Flex Licenses never
require the installation of the Network License Manager.
For users who have chosen the Flex License option, Version 6.0 has a new security
system that activates the software. This involves entering a Product Control Code
(PCC) and then using an [Activate] button to obtain activation permission from our Internet
Activation server. You can easily move the activation of the software around between all of
your computers with the Internet activation and deactivation ability.
For Network License users, the PCC only activates the Network License Manager
(NLM) (see below). You then install the SEL on all computers in your network that might
like to use the software. No Internet activation is needed on those computers. When they
launch they simply get permission to run from the Network License Manager.
Remember: You can always install the SEL on any computer where you might want to use
it. But whether you have chosen a Flex License or a Network License, the SEL must
reside on the actual computer to be used.
Installation for use with a Flex License
15
With a Flex License you will install the SEL, paste in your Product Control Code and then
click a button to perform an Internet Activation. You can then Deactivate and Activate
14
the software to easily move the usage between the computers that you use. Click here for
a video on Internet Activation:
Internet Activation
Installation for use with a Network License
18
Network License installations require that the SEL be installed on each computer where it
will be operated, but you do not enter your Product Control Code into the SEL. Instead,
for this type of installation, the SEL gets permission to run from the Network License
Manager. So in summary, if you have chosen the Network License option:
Install the Network License Manager on one of the computers on the local network
with which all the other computers can communicate. Paste in the Product Control
Code and use [Internet Activate] to activate the NLM.
Install the Structural Engineering Library on all computers where you wish to use the
software. DO NOT enter your Product Control Code on those computers. The
software seeks and obtains permission to run from the NLM.
2.3
15
Single Computer Installation

For the most current installation information, please review this document located on
our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_SingleLicense.pdf
For documentation on the installation of previous versions, please use the following link:
http://www.enercalc.com/users.html
16
2.4
Activation Types
When Internet activating a Flex License, the following activation types will be offered:
The activation types behave as follows:

Indefinite:
This option writes the activation data to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER section of the
registry, so it will result in an installation that will remain activated until it is Internet
deactivated by the user, or until another user forcibly deactivates this computer.
This option is useful in situations where the number of users is equal to the number of
available seats, such that there is no need to share seats among multiple computers. It is
also useful in situations where a laptop will be taken to a remote location where Internet
access is uncertain.
Automatic Activation/Deactivation:
This option automatically activates the program when it is launched (if a seat is available),
and it automatically deactivates when the user exits the program.
This option is useful in situations where the number of users is greater than the number of
available seats, such that there is need to share seats among multiple computers.
17
Deactivate on Exit:
This option automatically deactivates the program when it is closed.
This option can be a useful way to ensure that the activation is returned to the "pool" for
others to use when your session is done, but it requires that the user click to activate the
program each time it is launched. Given the extra step involved with this option, it may be
more efficient to use the "Automatic Activation/Deactivation" option.
Deactivate on this date and time:

This option automatically deactivates the program at a specified date and time.
This option can be a useful way to ensure that the activation is automatically returned to
the "pool" for others to use after the specified date and time.
Note: To change to a different activation type, such as to change from "Automatic" to

"Indefinite", simply Internet Deactivate temporarily. Then Internet Activate once again and
you will be offered the "Select Activation Type" dialog where you can choose the desired
activation type.
18
2.5
Network Installation
Use this section when you install a Network License for the Structural Engineering
Library.
For the most current installation information, please review this document located on
our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_Network.pdf
For documentation on the installation of previous versions, please use the following link:
http://www.enercalc.com/users.html
2.6
19
Network License Manager

Please use this link to get information on installation of the Network License Manager.
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/ENERCALC_Network_License_Help.pdf
Click here for a video on the Network License Manager:
Tour of Network License Manager
20
2.7
Manual Activation
If you cannot activate the software using the simple [Internet Activate] method (because
you have no connection, restricted access to the Internet due to a firewall, or your
company prefers not to activate your installation this way), you can activate your software
using the [Manual Activation] method:
Latest Manual Activation Information on Web
Click the [Manual Activation] button, and the instructions will be provided to you using the
screen shown below:
21
NOTE: When using the Manual Activation method, the Manual Activation Code that you
receive from ENERCALC can only be used to activate the specific machine that was used
to make the Manual Activation Code request, because the request and the code actually
contain the Computer Name and other data that is specific to that particular machine.
However, you can still use the Internet Deactivate function to return a manually activated
seat to your pool. And then you would be able to use that available seat from your pool to
perform a normal Internet Activation on a different computer if desired.
22
2.8
Moving & Maintaining License Activation

Structural Engineering Library "seats" are single-user activations. Each seat can only be
activated on one computer at a time.
This section will assist you in moving your activation from one computer to another.
Latest Moving Your License Information on Web
When you originally activated the software, if you used the [Internet Activate] capability of
the software, then you can use [Internet Deactivate] to return this activation to our
server, so that it can be available to another computer.
Follow these steps:
Start the Structural Engineering Library. You will probably see the Project Assistant
screen as shown below:
23
Click the [Close] button. Click License > Software Activation from the main menu as
shown below:
You will now see the User Info & Licensing Information dialog as shown below:
.
24
Click the [Internet Deactivate] button to return your activation to our server.
Note! You must allow the ENERCALC file EC6.EXE Internet access through your firewall
or anti-virus software.
After a moment, the system will indicate that the installation has been successfully
deactivated by offering an [Internet Activate] button in the User Info & Licensing
Information dialog as shown below:
Your activation has now been returned to our server, and you can go to another computer
where the Structural
Engineering Library is installed, and activate it by clicking License >Software
Activation > [Internet Activate] from the main menu.
For the most current installation information, please review this document located on our
website:
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/EC_V6_Install_Info.pdf
Part
III
26
Software Updates
Software Updates
3.1
27
Web Update
At ENERCALC we are continually improving and enhancing our software. It is fairly simple
to make changes to the software here in our offices, however it can be overwhelming to
ship thousands of CDs to our user base. To distribute the latest software builds to the
entire user base, we depend on a Web Update system. The update is provided in two
ways:
Web Update System: This system is built into your Structural Engineering Library
software package. It will check with our server to see if a newer version of the software is
available and prompt you with an option to install it if available. See What Actually Happens
below for a description of how it works.
The Web Update system uses Internet protocol HTTP on port 80 to check if a newer
version of the software is available and to transfer those files from our server to your
computer as needed. You can configure the program to perform this check automatically
every time you start the software, but it can also be performed on an on-demand basis if
desired.
Select Settings > Web Update Settings from the main menu to display the web update
screen as shown below:
28
What actually happens during an update check: What actually happens during an
update check is that the software runs a program in the ENERCALC program folder
named EC6WebUpdate.exe. This program connects to our Internet servers using the
"HTTP" protocol on port 80. It compares the version number you have installed with the
current build of the software stored on our servers. If there is a newer build available, you
are notified and upon approval, a small update installation program named
EC6_WebUpdate.exe is transferred from our server to your computer. This file then
executes to complete the file download and software updating/installation process.
EC6WebUpdate.exe and EC6_WebUpdate.exe are digitally signed applications that are
secure to run and are virus free.
The actual updating program EC6_WebUpdate.exe that is downloaded from our server will
need "write" access to the program installation folder. (It contains a Windows Vista/
Windows 7 manifest with this information.)
Click here to check for updates: This button will download the updating program from
our server. This program will check your computer for a non-expired Maintenance &
Support Plan and update the software to the latest allowed version.
Software Updates
29
Note: The "WebUpdate" procedure may send information to ENERCALC, Inc. about your
installation and use of the software licensed from ENERCALC, Inc. This may include any
of the following: your ENERCALC assigned User Registration Number, the Installed Build
Number of your ENERCALC software, Internet IP address of the computer that will receive
the updated files, time usage for the various portions of the software, and potentially other
information only related specifically to the use of the software license. Absolutely no files,
configurations, settings, or other information not specifically regarding the usage of the
ENERCALC license will be sent. If you are concerned about this, please contact us for
information on what is being sent. We have an open policy on providing you with
information showing what might be included.
Check For Updates Automatically at Startup: This checkbox allows you to control
whether or not your software will perform the automatic check for updates each time it is
started. Even if an available update is detected, the user will still have the ability to decide
whether or not to install it.
30
3.2
Update from Website

In addition to the Web Update system that is built into the software, it is also possible to
initiate updates by visiting the "For Our Users" page of www.enercalc.com.
Note:
There are times where a more recent build will be available on the website than is offered/
detected by the built-in Web Update system. The reason for this is as follows. The built-in
Web Update system offers those updates that are regarded as "major" or that have a
significant impact on a majority of the users. On the other hand, the website will always
offer an update for the absolute latest available build of the Structural Engineering Library,
Software Updates
regardless of whether it is categorized as a "major" update or not.
31
Part
IV
Support & Maintenance
33
34
4.1
Maintenance & Support Plan

Our Maintenance & Support Plan (MSP) ensures that you will always have full technical
support and the latest build of the software during the term of the plan.
While your MSP is current, you will receive every new build, feature enhancement and
improvement for your licensed software, ensuring you're always using the most current
technology.
You will have access to voice/fax/email technical assistance from our staff.
You will also receive discounts on new software releases and additional software licenses.
This is the easiest and most economical way for you and your company to keep your
software investment current.
Please see this web page for details on the Maintenance & Support Plan:
http://www.enercalc.com/support_maintenance.html
4.2
35
Getting Assistance
There are several ways to get assistance with using the Structural Engineering Library.
Click here for a video:
Getting Assistance
HOWEVER, with the exception of referring to the program documentation and reviewing
the FAQ section on the website, all options require that your Maintenance and Support
Plan is current.
Refer to the program documentation.
Contact ENERCALC Technical Services by email:
From the main menu:
From your email program: support@enercalc.com

Contact ENERCALC Technical Services by fax: 949-645-3881
Contact ENERCALC Technical Services by phone: 949-645-0441, Extension #3
36
Review the "Frequently Asked Questions" (FAQ) page on our website:

http://www.enercalc.com/support_knowledge.html
4.3
37
Viewing Enhancements and Changes to the Software

The program offers a detailed list of revisions that have been made to the software.
Click Help > Enhancement/Change History. The following window will be displayed:
This window is dynamically built by calling all subsystem modules in the software. In this
manner the subsystems themselves contain the information on the changes that have been
made.
This list can be set to display enhancements only, or it can display enhancements and
changes/corrections. When the list is set to display both enhancements and changes/
corrections, it can be sorted by version or by module.
Part
Getting Started
Getting Started
39
40
5.1
System Overview & Design Philosophy

The Structural Engineering Library is a collection of modules that provides analysis and
design functionality for components of buildings.
Walls, columns, beams, footings, diaphragms, frames, and other common elements can
be thoroughly engineered through the use of the modules in this package. If you are a
typical engineer whose work consists of a regular flow of small and medium-sized
projects, this package is designed specifically for you.
As an engineer you will find that each module combines the governing code provisions,
mathematical analysis processes, and commonly available construction materials into a
simple and effective "calcpad" style fill-in-the-blanks program. You can feel partially
relieved that the software will consistently perform all the required checks that may be
skipped over when doing repetitive hand calculations....especially when fatigue sets in and
a deadline is near! You can enjoy the time to do more exhaustive design studies, come up
with safer and more economical designs, and enjoy clearly documented calculations for
review and archiving.
This software is not a "black box" program. Each calculation is designed to be a "visible
calcpad" where you can work with the data and immediately view the resulting
calculations. Automatic design is provided in most modules, and is intended primarily to
automate tedious iterative tasks.
You, as an experienced structural engineer or architect, can quickly enter and change
member sizes and other design parameters and view the results. In this way, the
Structural Engineering Library maximizes the use of your time and design skills by
enabling you to quickly define a concept and then make necessary modifications to refine it
into a final design.
Getting Started
5.2
41
About Our Documentation

Documentation of your software package is essential for your successful and pleasant use
of our products. We try hard to supply you, now and on an ongoing basis, with detailed
information on all aspects of the software. To support this commitment, we provide
documentation of your software in multiple forms:
A Windows Help system file named ENERCALC.CHM is installed with your
software. This help system may be accessed by clicking Help > Dynamic Help
from the main menu.
A User's Manual in Adobe Acrobat PDF file format is available for download at any
time from our website
http://www.enercalc.com/pdf/SEL60_DOCS.PDF
An Online Help system is available at
www.enercalc.com/sel_help
.
.
Printed Documentation
Printed documentation is not provided with ENERCALC products. This is in keeping with
the nearly universal industry move away from printed documentation.
Updating your Documentation
The most up-to-date documentation for our software products is always available in
electronic form. Whenever the software is updated with the built-in Web Update system,
part of the process includes transferring the latest documentation to your computer. This
ensures that the content that you view by clicking Help > Dynamic Help from the main
menu is current and coordinated.
42
5.3
Building Codes Supported

As of October 2012, Version 6.12.9.26 software supports the following codes and design
standards:
Design Standards:
American Concrete Institute publication ACI 318-05/08
American Concrete Institute publication ACI 530-05/08
American Forest & Paper Association publication NDS 2005 Edition
American Society of Civil Engineers publication ASCE/SEI 7-05
American Institute of Steel Construction publication Thirteenth Edition which contains
specification ANSI/AISC 360-05
General Building Codes:
International Code Council publication International Building Code 2006 and 2009
editions. IBC references the above publications in Chapter 35. The modifications to each
referenced design standard have been incorporated if applicable to the functionality
provided by the individual calculation modules.
California Building Standards Commission publication 2007 California Building Code and
2010 California Building Code. Chapter 19 references ACI 318, Chapter 21 references
ACI 530, Chapter 22 references ANSI/AISC 360-05, Chapter 23 references NDS, and
Chapter 16 which defines the forces on buildings is essentially the same as ASCE 7-05.
Getting Started
5.4
Learning the Structural Engineering Library

There are several sources of information that will assist you with learning to use the
Structural Engineering Library Version 6.
A series of tutorial videos is available at our website:
http://www.enercalc.com/training_videos.html
This documentation. An Internet version of the help system is available at:

http://www.enercalc.com/sel_help
Responses to "Frequently Asked Questions" are available at our website:

http://www.enercalc.com/faq_help/
43
44
5.5
Introductory Videos
We continue to add topics to a series of videos that discuss all portions of the software.
To access nearly 40 videos please click here:
http://www.enercalc.com/training_videos.html
Here is a partial view of what you will see....
Getting Started
5.6
45
Request for Suggestions

Although our intentions are to provide you with the best product possible, it is likely that
there may be areas of this User's Guide and the software itself that could be improved to
better suit your needs, be made simpler to operate, easier to understand, or support
engineering technologies that have emerged since this publication.
To call these to our attention and to offer suggestions for improvement, we sincerely
request that you send us your thoughts. Please address your comments to
support@enercalc.com, or:
Michael D. Brooks, P.E., S.E.
President
ENERCALC, Inc.
support@enercalc.com
Post Office Box 188

Corona del Mar, CA 92625
Part
VI
Program Overview
Program Overview
47
48
6.1
Introduction
The Structural Engineering Library is a collection of modules (also referred to as
"calcsheets") that provide functionality for the analysis and design of components of
buildings. Walls, columns, beams, footings, diaphragms, frames, and other common
elements can be thoroughly engineered through the use of the modules in this package. If
you are a typical engineer, whose work consists of a monthly flow of small and mediumsized projects, this package is designed especially for you.
As an engineer, you will find that each module combines the governing code provisions,
mathematical analysis processes, and commonly available construction materials into a
simple and effective "calcpad" style fill-in-the-blanks program. You can feel partially
relieved that the software will consistently perform all the required checks that may be
skipped over when doing repetitive hand calculations. You can enjoy the time to do more
exhaustive design studies, come up with safer and more economical designs, and enjoy
clearly documented calculations for review and archiving.
This software is not a "black box" program. Each calculation is designed to be a "visible
calcpad" where you can work with the data and immediately view the resulting
calculations. Automatic design is provided in most modules, and is intended primarily to
automate tedious iterative tasks.
You, as an experienced structural engineer or architect, can quickly enter and change
member sizes and other design parameters and view the results. In this way, the
Structural Engineering Library maximizes the use of your time and design skills by
enabling you to quickly define a concept and then make necessary modifications to refine it
into a final design.
The "Calcpad" Approach
When the Structural Engineering Library was designed in 1983, our concept was
revolutionary.....design it like an engineer's calculation pad. When an engineer prepares a
calculation, the finished product is a neat and organized sheet of paper that follows the
design flow from load tabulation, force and stress calculation, to the final adequacy check
of the structural component that will satisfy the task.
At the time, all other competing programs were aging versions of mainframe programs that
had been modified to run on microcomputers. Many of those programs executed "batch"
design, where the user entered all the data, told the computer to run the program, and then
opened a crude file to review the results. ENERCALC was unique in that the input and
output was mixed on the same screen....easy to see at a glance. But the most
revolutionary aspect was the tremendous speed it offered to prepare calculations.
This great speed was due to the fact that you could change a number and instantly see all
the updated results on the screen.
Moving forward, the current Version 6 for Windows maintains that same fill-in-the-blanks
approach with instant recalculation of results. When using any of the approximately 30
calculation modules, all input data and output results are presented on the same screen
Program Overview
49
and viewed just by selecting a tab that groups the information. Whenever you change an
input value, the entire module is recalculated and the results are immediately
visible. Thanks to efficient programming and fast modern computers, incredibly complex
structural analysis and design is performed in a split second.
This instant updating also happens when you are viewing graphical sketches of designs or
stress diagrams.....after any change, the graphics are instantly updated.
A Typical Worksession
In order of occurrence, here are the steps in using the software:
1. Start the program.
2. The Project Assistant is displayed where you can choose to use the last calculation,
the last project, a recent project, or create a new project.
3. A project is selected and you view the Project Manager. Here you can add new
calculations, edit existing calculations, insert non-calculation items into the project
(such as Microsoft Word or Excel files, Adobe Acrobat PDF files, or scanned images),
and initiate project printing capabilities.
4. Editing or adding a calculation takes you to the calculation sheet for one of the
modules.
5. Using the calculation sheet, you enter data on the top set of tabs while reviewing
results and graphics on the bottom set.
6. When the structural calculation is complete, you can print it and/or save it to the
project.
7. You can always return to the Project Manager where you can add/edit/delete/print
other items within the current project, or save the current project and open a new one.
50
6.2
User Information
It is important that you enter information about yourself and your company into the
program. You can access the entry dialog by clicking Settings > User Information from
the main menu.
Please note that the "License Owner Name" you see in the above screen was
automatically generated after the Product Control Code was entered.
This information is used in the Technical Support forms and emails to automatically fill in
your identifying information when using those methods for contacting us.
Program Overview
6.3
51
Program Settings
The Settings item in the main menu provides access to several selections that control
how various aspects of the Structural Engineering Library operates. A selection of one
of the first four items will open the Program Settings window and preselect the appropriate
tab for the chosen item.
General Settings & File Locations
52
Default Project File Location: Specifies the default location where the program will point
when using File > Open or File > New from the main menu. This location can be
wherever you desire, however we ask you to remember that Windows XP, Windows Vista,
and Windows 7 have introduced new suggested locations for storing user data.
The path to the Default Project File Location shown on the screen capture above is: C:
\Users\Chris\Documents\ENERCALC Project Files\.
Because modern operating systems allow multiple users per computer, Microsoft
suggests that software manufacturers create their own folder under Documents and set
that as the default location for user-created files. The program conforms to this
recommendation by suggesting an appropriate directory during the installation process.
Database File Location: Specifies where the program should look for the steel database,
wood database, and other files that contain the databases of standard values. This location
needs to be accessible to all users on a specific computer. Microsoft suggests that
software manufacturers set the following as the default location for data files that are
referenced by the software, but not modified by the user: C:\Users\Public\Documents.
Program Overview
53
The path to the Database File Location shown on the screen capture above is: C:\Users
\Public\Documents\ENERCALC Common Data Files\.
Load Database File Location: Specifies where the program should look for the load
combination database file and other files that are potentially edited by the user. Because
this is a file that can be customized by the user, the default location for this file is the same
as the default location offered for storing Project Files.
The path to the Load Database File Location shown on the screen capture above is: C:
\Users\Chris\Documents\ENERCALC Data Files\.
Automatically create backup files: With this box checked the software will automatically
create a backup file with the EC6_BKUP file extension in the same folder as where the
original master file is located. The backup file is created when a file is OPENED.
Automatically create & save calculation reports when saving a calculation: When
this option is selected, the program will produce and store a report for each calculation
when it is saved. This offers the convenience of instant Project Printing, but requires
some additional disc space. The alternative is to deselect this option, in which case the
reports will need to be compiled by issuing a Regenerate All command at the time of
Project Printing. This method will conserve a little disc space, but will require some
additional time to regenerate when a Project Print command is issued.
Use memory mapped Project Files during program operation: This option is
particularly oriented toward users who store Project Files on network drives, USB memory
sticks, or other storage locations that are not on the local hard drive. When storing files in
this way, some users experience slow performance within the Structural Engineering
Library. This is not an issue with the Structural Engineering Library, but rather with the file
handling system of the network or attached storage device. If this applies to you, try
selecting the option to "Use memory mapped Project Files". When this option is selected,
the program reads an entire Project File into RAM (Random Access Memory) on your
computer, and it can greatly improve the performance of your computer when running the
Structural Engineering Library. When this option is deselected, Structural Engineering
Library Project Files continued to be saved only to the source drive and location.
Calculations added at current highlight, highlighted calc moved down: This applies
to the way calculations are inserted when using the Project Manager. When this box is
checked and you use the [+Add] button, it adds a new calculation to the project, and the
calculation is inserted directly above that position. What you see is that the new calculation
takes that spot in the list, and the highlighted item is moved down. If this box is unchecked
and you use the [+Add] button, the new calculation is inserted BELOW the highlighted
item.
54
Display Size
Display Settings: Provides options to set the display resolution.
Disable Sketch Sub-system: Provides a checkbox to disable the sketch sub-system
within the Structural Engineering Library. This is provided for the specific purpose of
addressing a rare problem that occurred only with the Windows Vista operating system.
Printing & Title Block
Title Block: These six entries correspond to the six lines in the upper-left corner of the
printout.
Program Overview
55
Logo File: Provides an option to specify a graphics file to be printed at the LEFT edge of
the title block. If used, the six lines of Title Block information will be printed immediately to
the right of the logo. Logos can be Windows BMP, JPEG, GIF, and WMF formats.
When a logo is specified, the height is adjusted to fit into the title block area and the rightside "floats" according to the width of the image.
What to Print - Title Block: Check this box to print the title block at the top of the report.
With this item unchecked the printout begins with the calculation title bar (shown as
"Masonry Column" in the image above)
What to Print - Date & Time: Check this box to print the computer date and time on the
report as shown below:
Select Printing Color Mode: This sets the default mode for printed reports created from
the Structural Engineering Library.
56
Web Update
Click here to check for updates: This button will download the updating program from
our server. This program will check your computer for a non-expired Maintenance &
Support Plan and update the software to the latest version.
Click Here for web update overview
27
Internal Values
Internal Filenames: Displays folder names and file names for the current configuration.
Program Overview
57
58
6.4
Files & File Locations

Project Files
The Structural Engineering Library uses a single file to store the project information and
all the calculations and items that are created as a part of that "Project". This file uses an
"EC6" extension to identify it as an EnerCalc Version 6 file.
To backup an ENERCALC Project File simply copy the .EC6 file to the desired backup
location.
To have the system automatically create a backup file, activate the checkbox labeled
Automatically create backup files on the Settings > General Settings dialog.
As the Structural Engineering Library advances in capabilities, the file formats used will
change, but we will always provide conversion programs for previously saved Project
Files.
General Comments
Each ENERCALC Project File contains all information on a Project. There are no
other files you will need to keep track of.
Always remember that the Project Manager is showing you the Divisions and
calculations for the current Project. It is NOT showing you a disk directory structure.
There is no Save item on the File menu. After you have edited a calculation, you can
either click [Save Only] or [Save & Exit] within the individual modules. Either one
will save the calculation data to the Project File.
Database Files
A number of database files are supplied with the Structural Engineering Library. These
files contain AISC section properties, NDS stress grades, wood section properties,
seismic acceleration data, USA cities & Zip Codes, and other files. These files are not to
be edited or modified in any way by the user.
User-Created Database Files

The user can create User Defined database files to store their own steel sections, wood
sections and wood stress databases. These files are created and stored in the same
folder as the other database files. User defined database files are differentiated from the
standard database files that are delivered with the software by inserting the word "_USER"
in the filename.
Program Overview
6.5
59
Project Assistant
When you launch the Structural Engineering Library the Project Assistant is displayed
by default, as shown below.
Project Assistant
This single dialog allows you instant access to prior Project Files, the last Project File, the
last-used calculation, or other functions to create or manage Project Files.
Please see the numbered references below the graphic for specific descriptions.
(1) Click to immediately open the last Project File that you worked on.
(2) Click to immediately open the last Project File that you worked on and open the last
calculation you worked on.
60
(3) This list shows the most recent Project Files that you opened on this computer, with
the most recent Project File at the top of the list. Double-click on any item in the list to open
that Project File.
(4) Click to open the highlighted Project File in the list.
(5) Click to remove the highlighted file from the Recent Projects list.
(6) Click to open a Pick List that displays ALL Project Files in the various folders that you
have used in the past. See the section Main Menu > File 70 for a description of the Pick
List.
(7) Click to open a Windows File Open dialog that allows you to navigate through disks and
folders to locate and open a Project File.
(8) Click to open the Windows File Create dialog that allows you to navigate through disks
and folders and create a new ENERCALC Project File.
(9) Click to choose an ENERCALC calculation module and create a single calculation for
quick preparation and printing only. NOTE: Calculations created in this way CANNOT be
saved.
(10) Uncheck this box if you do not wish to automatically display the Project Assistant at
startup. To again have the Project Assistant automatically displayed at startup, click File >
Display Project Assistant and then activate the checkbox to Show Project Assistant at
program startup.
(11) Indicates the Allowed Version and the Installed Build and provides a quick help link to a
dialog that explains these terms.
(12) Link to a help video on the Project Assistant.
Program Overview
6.6
61
Databases
The Structural Engineering Library contains several databases that you can use in the
various modules.
To view the databases click Databases > (database) from the main menu. See below.
Specific information on each of the databases is provided here: Databases item in Main
Menu 79
62
6.7
Screen Layout
The ENERCALC Structural Engineering Library user interface is divided into a Main
Menu and a Working Area. Click here for a video:
General Layout
The Working Area is used to display the calculation module that you are currently editing.
When you choose to view the Project Manager, it is displayed on the left side of the
Working Area. See more to follow.
The Main Menu is described in much more detail here: Main Menu description
69
Working Area - Showing Project Manager

Immediately after a Project File is opened the Project Manager is displayed. As you can
see in the image below, the Project Manager occupies a portion of the left side of the
screen.
The Project Manager provides you with the ability to control the contents of your Project
File. Double-click any calculation to open the associated module and edit the parameters
of that calculation. Please click here 97 to jump to detailed information for the Project
Manager.
Program Overview
63
After a calculation is selected for editing, the Project Manager automatically collapses, and
the window fills with the user interface for that particular calculation module as shown
below:
64
NOTE: It is normal for the Project Manager to hide while a calculation is being edited.
For a review of using a typical calculation screen click here
66
Program Overview
6.8
65
Generating Reports
In the Structural Engineering Library, the term "report" refers to the results documents
created by the program in either printed or PDF format.
For each of the ENERCALC modules, a report can be generated in different ways,
depending on your intent.
The report creation buttons at the top of a module offer options for the common methods
of generating a report from the currently loaded module for immediate review. See below:
In order from left to right, the bubbled icons do the following:

Create a report preview, so you can review the report on-screen prior to printing
Create a report as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file
Create a report and send directly to the printer.
It is important to understand that reports are actually created and saved when you click the
[Save Only] or the [Save & Exit] buttons in the upper-right corner of all modules:
Clicking either of these buttons causes a full report for the current module to be created
and saved into the Project File along with all of the input data for that module. This is how
the printouts are prepared for instant viewing and batch printing in the Project
Printing system.
66
6.9
General Calculation Screen Usage

Please refer to the typical screen below and the numbered items that relate screen areas
to their descriptions:
(1) Indicates the module that you are working in.

(2) Indicates the name of the licensed owner of this installation & activation of the software.
(3) From left to right:
Access to help system: Opens the help system and displays the section specific to
this module.
Report Preview: Displays the report for this module in a new window for your review.
Create PDF Report: Creates a report for this module, prompts for filename, creates
Acrobat PDF, and then displays it for your review.
Print Report: Prints the report for this module directly to your selected printer.
Properties: Offers a selection of items to include in the report.
(4) From left to right:
Cancel all changes: Cancels all changes made to this module since the last save,
closes the module without saving, and returns to the Project Manager. If this calculation
module was just Added to the Project File, and if it was never saved, then this option
will cause the calculation to be removed without saving.
Program Overview
67
Create a new calculation: Uses the current calculation data to create a new
calculation item in the Project Manager.
Save Only: Saves the current Project File (to capture all the data entered into this
module), creates a report (which can be printed at a later time), and keeps the module
open for further editing.
Save & Exit: Saves the current Project File (to capture all the data entered into this
module), creates a report (which can be printed at a later time), closes the module,
and returns to the Project Manager.
(5) Data input tabs: Click these tabs to move to various categories of data input.
(6) Major Result Category Tabs: Select between major categories of result data to view;
numerical values, sketches or diagrams.
(7) Numeric Result Tabs: Click these tabs to view the various components of calculated
results.
Part
VII
Main Menu
69
Main Menu
The main menu of the Structural Engineering Library is always displayed.
The menu offers the following selections. Click an item below to jump to that help section
page, or click here for a video:
File 70
Settings 77 :
Databases 79
Tools 88
:
License 90 :
Help 91
:
Main Menu and Toolbar
:
To create, load, close and print Project Files.
To establish settings, user information and default values
:
To view the various databases supplied with the software
To access utilities provided with the software
To directly access the licensing control window
To access the help system, technical support options, Knowledge
Base with FAQs, Enhancement/Change History and the ENERCALC
website.
70
7.1
File
Last Project: Opens the last used Project File.
Recent Projects: Provides a list of Project Files that were recently opened.
Pick Project: The software remembers all prior folders on your computer (and other
computers) that were accessed to load Project Files. This item opens a window that
shows those folders and the ENERCALC Project Files contained within them to allow you
one-stop selection of a Project File from your commonly used locations.
Main Menu
71
Open Project: Opens a standard Windows File Open dialog allowing you to navigate your
disk drives and open a Project File.
72
New Project: Opens a standard Windows File Create dialog allowing you to navigate your
disk drives and specify the name of a Project File to create.
Quick Calc: Allows you to open a calculation module to perform a calculation that WILL
NOT be saved. After making this selection you will see the typical ENERCALC module
selection window. Simply click on your selection and the module will be loaded. Your
entered data cannot be saved, so it will need to be printed if a permanent copy is needed.
Main Menu
73
(image from Build 6.12.9.16)

Save Project as New: Allows you to save the currently open Project File as a new file
using a different name. Opens a standard Windows File Create dialog allowing you to
navigate your disk drives and specify the name of the Project File to create.
74
Close Project: Closes the currently open Project File (making sure any unsaved data is
purged).
Print Setup: Displays a typical Windows Printer Selection dialog to specify the printer to
be used for this work session.
Print Project: Opens the Project Printing
132
Manager.
Main Menu
75
Regenerate Reports: This selection is used to regenerate printouts so they will be

updated and displayed correctly in the Project Printing Manager. It can be used any time
the following information has changed:
Project Information in the GENERAL Division of the Project Manager for the currently
open Project File
Title block information filled in using Settings > Printing & Title Block from the main
menu
There is also a third situation where this command can come in handy. When running in
Evaluation mode, the software adds a watermark on the background of all printouts. This
watermark says "Evaluation Version" and "Unlicensed Usage", so the report is
inconvenient to use for submittal purposes. When the user later runs the software in
Licensed mode, those reports with the "Evaluation Version" watermark remain in the
Project File until they are reopened and saved. This can be a laborious process if the
Project File contains many calculations. So the easier way to remove the watermarks in
one pass is to use the Regenerate Reports command.
When you click File > Regenerate Reports > All, the program will automatically save
and close any open calculations. Then the program will show a progress window as it
regenerates all the reports in your Project File:
Display Project Assistant: This option displays the Project Assistant which offers a
convenient way of beginning work with a Project File.
76
Exit: Offers the option to save any pending work, then closes the currently open Project
File, and exits the software.
Main Menu
7.2
77
Settings
Most of these items are covered in another section of this help document. Please click on
an item in the list below to jump to that section.
General Settings 51 : Defines file locations, backup file creation and behavior items in the
Project Manager.
Printing & Title Block
block.
54
: Provides the ability for the user to define the look of their title
Engineer's Stamp: Allows the user to upload a graphic image of their Professional
Engineer's stamp for inclusion on printed reports.
Display Settings: Provides options to configure the software for the resolution of the
monitor being used.
Web Update Settings 27 : Allows control over behavior of web update system and direct
access to the update installation program on the web.
Default Values 78 : Provides control over the values that serve as the defaults for each
individual calculation module. Note that a particular calculation module must be open in
order to use the functions provided by this item.
User Information
50
: Provides access to user information.
Utilities: This selection provides items that are mostly used for support and maintenance of
the software. At the time of this documentation writing, the only Utility item available is to
start a process of registering components used by the S.E.L. with the operating system.
78
7.2.1
Default Values
Most of the user input values in the individual calculation modules have a default value or
setting that is stored within the program. Many of these default values can easily be
changed by the user. The procedure is as follows:
1. Open a new calculation of the particular module of interest.
2. Revise all of the initial values and settings as desired so that they represent the desired
default values or settings.
3. Click Settings > Default Values > Save.
The current values will be saved as the new default values for that module, and these initial
values and settings will be used when a new instance of this calculation module is added
to any Project File.
Main Menu
7.3
Databases
This menu allows viewing of various databases supplied with the software.
Please see the specific subtopics in this section for more detailed information on the
databases.
79
80
7.3.1
Steel Section Database

The steel section database is available in all applicable steel modules. It contains typical
AISC rolled sections from many Editions of the AISC Steel Construction Manual. Click
here for a video:
Note that it is also possible to create User Defined entries that can be referenced in
calculations.
Main Menu
7.3.2
81
Wood Section Database

The wood section database contains the section properties for most of the sections listed
in the NDS and for many Engineered Wood Products. Click here for a video:
The wood section database is available in all applicable wood modules. It contains typical
wood sections available in the United States. These sections are also shown in the 2005
NDS. Also included are manufactured sections, however the list of those sections is only
updated occasionally. Note that it is also possible to create User Defined entries that can
be referenced in calculations.
82
7.3.3
Wood Reference Design Values Database

The Wood Reference Design Values database is available in all applicable wood modules.
The Wood Reference Design Values database contains typical wood stress grades as
defined in the 2005 NDS. Also included are manufactured sections, however the list of
those sections is only updated occasionally. Note that it is also possible to create User
Defined entries that can be referenced in calculations.
Main Menu
7.3.4
83
Masonry Database
Masonry Database
This is a reference table only. It consists of data for common hollow concrete masonry
units:
84
7.3.5
Load Combination Database

This is the database of named load combination sets that can be automatically retrieved
into a calculation. Click here for a video:
A named load combination set can be established as a default and will be used whenever
a new calculation is created in the Project File. Note that it is also possible to create new
load combination sets and/or revise the load combinations that are in the existing sets.
The Load Combination Database is used to manage the load combinations that you can
use across all of your Project Files.
The load combinations specified in this section are stored in a
separate file and ARE NOT specific to a particular Project File.
With the Load Combination Database you can create many load combination sets. These
are listed in the Code Reference column.
For each set, you can then specify the individual load combinations for both factored load
and service load cases, which are used for LRFD and ASD respectively (also referred to
as strength design and allowable stress design).
Please see the descriptions for the numbered keynotes on the screen capture below.
Main Menu
85
(1) This area lists the load combination sets that you have specified. We have named the
column Code Reference because typically the load combinations specified to be run for a
particular project or design are specified by the governing building code for the project
location.
(2) Use these buttons to add, delete, copy or edit the name of load combination sets. The
button with the triangle symbol means "Change" or "Edit" and is used to edit the displayed
reference name for the set.
(3) This is the area that displays all the load combinations for the Factored or Service level
load analysis types.
(4) Use these buttons to add or delete individual load combinations. The button with the
triangle symbol means "Change" or "Edit" and is used to edit the numeric factors applied to
each type of load for the load combination that is highlighted.
When clicking the [Add] or [Edit] button, the following dialog is displayed:
86
Use this dialog to specify the reference name and the values for each load factor.
(5) Click the [Factored Combinations] or [Service Level Combinations] buttons to
select the category of load combinations to display.
(6) Use the
button to make the highlighted name in the Code Reference
column the default combination set that will be used in all new ENERCALC calculations.
Using Load Combinations

When creating a NEW calculation in the Project Manager (or when using Quick Calc), the
default load combination set is automatically loaded into the Load Combination tab in the
module.
In the image below you can see that the load combinations have been loaded and are
displayed on Load Combinations tab in the Masonry Column module.
The design method has been set to LRFD, so the software is displaying Factored
Combinations.
We have clicked the [Change Load Combination] button (a triangle) to pop open a list of
the available load combination sets from the Load Combination database. Selecting one of
them from this pop-up list will load those new load combinations into this particular
calculation only.
Main Menu
87
88
7.4
Tools
This menu item provides access to useful tools that are supplied with the Structural
Engineering Library.
Calculator: We supply a Reverse Notation Calculator (RPN) for engineers to use for
intermediate calculations when entering data. RPN calculators are the most commonly
used among engineers because they allow faster mathematics solutions when nested
(parenthetical) calculations are used. It also includes a Copy button, which allows a result
value to be copied to the clipboard and then pasted into an input field in the Structural
Engineering Library.
For more information on Reverse Polish Notation try these links:

Main Menu
89
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Reverse_Polish_notation
http://www.hpmuseum.org/rpn.htm
Reset Calc Defaults: This command resets the default values for the current calculation
to the hard-coded internal default values. It may be a useful tool in some troubleshooting
situations.
Remove Saved Reports from Project File: This command removes any reports that
have been saved in the current Project File. It can be helpful in terms of reducing file size if
a Project File is to be emailed, but it will require that the reports be regenerated before they
can be printed.
Optimize file by removing abandoned records: This command removes lost records in
a Project File which could occur if the program is terminated abnormally (perhaps from a
power outage, lockup, network failure, lockup of another program, etc).
90
7.5
License
The License item displays the licensing and activation menu.
Please use this link to jump to a section with a detailed description: Licensing
15
Main Menu
7.6
91
Help
The Help item displays the Help menu.
Dynamic Help: Displays the help system for the software that is installed on your
computer.
Web Documentation (most up-to-date): Displays the most up-to-date help information
located on our website.
92
Web FAQ Pages: Provides a direct link to the Frequently Asked Questions section at
www.enercalc.com.
Download PDF Docs: Downloads the PDF version of the documentation for the software
currently available at our website. The documentation on our website will always be for the
latest available version.
"For Our Users" Web Page: Provides a link directly to the "For Our Users" page of our
website, which offers information on current builds, Customer Information, Version 6
Software Installation & Update Links, Version 6 Installation Info & FAQ links, info on
Maintenance Plans & Upgrades, Documentation Links, Links to PDF Files of Relevant
Information and Useful Forms, and links for Prior Version Software Reinstallation.
"Training Videos" Web Page: Provides a link directly to the "Training Videos" page of our
website, which offers videos on topics such as Installation, General Operation, Using
Project the Manager, Designing Beams, Columns, Foundations, Slender Walls, working
with some of the Miscellaneous modules, and working with External Files.
Main Menu
93
Create Tech Support Email: Provides you with a Tech Support form to fill out. When
finished, the data is transferred to an email form to send to our Tech Support Group. (Note:
Some computers and email software will not be able to paste the information into your
email program. This is not an ENERCALC issue. In those situations, feel free to compose
an email to support@enercalc.com directly from your email program, and please
remember to indicate your "KW" User Registration number on all correspondence.)
Create Tech Support Fax: Provides you with a form that you can fill out, print and fax
directly to ENERCALC (or transmit electronically).
94
Check for Updates: Immediately runs the update check program named
EC6WebUpdate.exe, which resides in the ENERCALC program installation folder. If a
newer build is found, a window will be displayed prompting you to decide if you want to
continue to update your software. If there is no newer build of the software available, then
you will be informed that your installation is currently up-to-date.
RSS News Feed: Opens the RSS News Feed dialog where users can receive
announcements and other pieces of information that are distributed to all users via the
feed.
Enhancement/Change History: Opens a window that lists revisions and enhancements
that have been performed on the software. Click here 37 to access a specific section with
additional information.
Allowed Version Description: Provides a thorough description of the terms "Installed
Build" and "Allowed Version" now reported by the Structural Engineering Library.
Licensing: Displays the licensing and activation system window. Click here
90
to access
Main Menu
95
a specific section with additional information.

About: Displays a general window giving information about software version, copyright,
licensed user, activation status, and contact information for ENERCALC.
Part
VIII
Project Manager
97
Project Manager
The Project Manager is displayed on the left side of the ENERCALC screen when a
Project File has been opened. Click here for a video:
Project Manager
The Project Manger provides the ability to create and modify a single Project File that can
contain a set of calculations and external items for a specific project. The layout, which will
be ever-improving, is designed to allow an ENERCALC Project File to be a single
collection point for documents relating to the load development and structural design of a
building or other structure.
The behavior of the Project Manager has been enhanced by introducing the ability to
display and hide the Project Manager on-demand. This offers the following advantages:
Larger area is available for use in the Project Manager when it is displayed.
More verbose calculation descriptions can be provided with fewer cryptic
abbreviations.
Greater selection of "project level" operations buttons can be displayed.
More efficient organization of GENERAL Division, LOADS & FORCES Division and
custom Divisions within the Project Manager.
Larger area available for the display of input and results when Project Manager is
hidden.
More verbose descriptions of input variables can now be provided.
Less on-screen congestion and less need for horizontal scroll bars in results tables.
Components that all Project Files AUTOMATICALLY contain are:

GENERAL Division (Only one can exist in a Project File)
A storage location for pieces of information pertaining to areas of the entire project, such
as:
Project Info, Building Department Contact Info, Designer Notes, Revisions, Client,
Designer.
Future additions
LOADS & FORCES Division (Only one can exist in a Project File)
A storage location for pieces of information pertaining to areas of the entire project, such
as:
General forces for the project including Snow Loads, Wind Loads and Seismic Loads.
Live load reductions.
Future additions
Components that any Project File CAN contain are:

Custom Divisions (An unlimited number can exist in a Project File)
98
Storage locations (folders) for organizing user-generated calculations and external items.
Can be created, named, copied, organized, expanded, collapsed, and deleted.
Are typically named in ways that are meaningful to the designer and that suit the
specific project.
Are generally populated with calculations and external items.
Provide a convenient way to selectively control project printing operations for logical
sets of calculations.
Every new Project File is automatically populated with one Division named
"Calculations".
Calculations (An unlimited number can exist in a Project File)
User-generated calculations that are created using the built-in ENERCALC modules and
are stored in the Custom Divisions.
Can be created, moved between Divisions, and deleted.
Can be copied to serve as the basis for a new calculation with similar input data.
Can be imported from one Project File to another.
Can be printed singly or in batch mode using the Project Printing Manager.
External Items (An unlimited number can exist in a Project File)
User-generated external files that are created using external programs and then stored in
the Custom Divisions.
Can consist of MS Word documents, MS Excel spreadsheets, Adobe Acrobat PDFs,
and scanned documents/images.
Can be embedded within the Project File for maximum portability, or can be linked to
the Project File to minimize file size.
Can be created, moved between Divisions, and deleted.
Please see the descriptive keynotes on the following screen capture for information on
various areas of the Project Manager.
Detailed descriptions are contained in the sections of this topic.
Project Manager
99
100
(1) Project Printing: These buttons allow you to print the report for the selected
calculation, or open the Project Printing system, which allows you to review all report
pages for all calculation items in the entire project. Click here 132 to review the specific
section on Project Printing.
(2) Buttons to Add, Copy, Edit & Delete Individual Calculations: These buttons allow
you to add, copy, edit and delete ENERCALC calculations or external source items (such
as Excel sheets) in the selected Division. Click here 118 to review specific section.
(3) Sort Options: These three tabs sort your Project File content by Division grouping,
Type of calculation (Steel Beam, Concrete Column, Excel sheet, etc.) or Material
(Concrete, Steel, Wood, etc.). Click here 120 to review specific section. Note that the [Add],
[Copy], and [Delete] options are not available in the Type view or the Material view.
(4) Expand & Contract Tree: These two buttons fully expand or fully contract the tree
structure to display or hide the full contents of the Project File.
(5) GENERAL Division: The GENERAL Division is automatically created in each new
Project File. There can only be one GENERAL Division, and its purpose is to contain and
organize certain hard-coded pieces of general information that apply to the Project as a
whole. Click here 103 to review the section describing these items. The screen capture
below shows a view of the Project Manager with the GENERAL Division expanded to
display its contents:
(6) LOADS & FORCES Division: The LOADS & FORCES Division is also automatically
created in each new Project File. There can only be one LOADS & FORCES Division, and
its purpose is to contain and organize load related calculations. The screen capture below
shows a view of the Project Manager with the LOADS & FORCES Division expanded to
display its contents:
Project Manager
101
(7) Calculation Division: The Calculations Division is also automatically created in each
new Project File, but it is created merely as a user-convenience. It can be thought of as a
"custom" Division, because its name can be changed and it can be moved or deleted. The
user is free to create as many custom Divisions as the Project warrants, and to name
them as best suits the Project.
(8) Calculation List: This is the main list that displays all the calculation items that you
have added into your project. It allows you to organize your calculations into Divisions. See
image below for another look at two Divisions labeled "Beams" and "Columns". Columns
shows a [+] button to its left, indicating that the tree containing the calculations in that
Division is compressed. Click here 110 to review the section describing these items.
102
(9) Move Item in List: These buttons move the highlighted calculation up and down within
the list. Click here 124 to review specific section.
(10) Import Calculations from other Project Files: Click here
section.
127
to review specific
Project Manager
8.1
103
General Division
This Division contains a list of items that describe the entire project. Click here for a video:
General Division
Building Code Information 104 : Allows entry of information relating to the building code,
jurisdiction and building official's contact information.
Project Information
Client Information
105
106
: Allows entry of general information about the project.
: Allows entry of information specific to the engineer's client.
Designer Notes 107 : Allows entry of up to 18 specific notes assigned by a specific person
on a certain date.
Revisions 108 : Allows entry of up to 18 specific revisions assigned by a specific person on
a certain date.
104
8.1.1
Building Code Information

This form allows you to select the Governing Building Code and Default Load Combination
Set, and to enter various information items pertaining to the jurisdiction where your project
is located. This data is specific to your Project File.
Project Manager
8.1.2
105
Project Information
This form allows you to enter information specific to your project. This data is specific to
your Project File.
106
8.1.3
Client Information
This form allows you to enter information on your client for a specific project. This data is
specific to your Project File.
Project Manager
8.1.4
107
Designer Notes
This form allows you to enter up to 18 distinct notes on the project, each with a specific
author and creation date. This data is specific to your Project File.
108
8.1.5
Revision List
This form allows you to enter up to 18 distinct revision explanations on the project, each
with a specific author and creation date. This data is specific to your Project File.
109
Project Manager
8.2
Loads & Forces Division

The LOADS & FORCES Division contains a growing number of calculations including
Snow Loads, Live Load Reduction, Wind Loads, and Seismic Loads.
See specific descriptions under Calculation Modules > Loads & Forces Division
109
110
8.3
Calculation List
The Calculation List is the main Project Manager view that you will use when building your
calculation sets for projects. Click here for a video:
Calculations Division
Most of a normal work session consists of adding and editing calculations in the list.
Please see the notes below as well as the following sections to learn what each button
provides and how to manage the list of calculations.
Project Manager
111
112
Divisions: Divisions are the main organizational category for calculations. These are the
left-most text item in the calculation list and will display either a [+] or [-] to the left of their
name. Divisions can be created, copied, renamed, moved, and deleted. Calculations must
always exist within a Division, but they can be moved freely between Divisions. Click Here
114 for the specific information section. The screen capture below illustrates an example of
how a Division can be renamed with a title that is meaningful to your project:
Adding, Deleting, Copying: The four buttons shown below allow you to add, copy, edit, or
delete calculations and external items. Click here 118 for the specific information section.
Sorting by Division, Type and Material: Click one of these tabs to change the sorting
view of the calculations in your project. Click here 120 for the specific information section.
Changing Calculation and Division Order: The buttons you see below are used to
move the highlighted calculation or Division up or down in the list. When moving a
calculation downward, if moving a calculation would tend to replace a Division name, then
the calculation item is moved into that Division. When moving a calculation upward, if
moving a calculation would tend to replace a Division name, then the calculation item is
moved into the Division above. Click here 124 for the specific information section.
Importing Calculations: Clicking the [Import] button
displays the
Project Manager
calculation import system. Click here
127
for the specific information section.
113
114
8.3.1
Divisions
Divisions are used to organize calculations. The image below has custom Divisions
named Beams, Columns, Analysis, etc.
Project Manager
115
116
Clicking the [-] icon to the left of the Division name will compress the Division tree. See
image below...note how only the Division names are displayed, but their contents are
currently not visible.
Left-clicking on a Division name will display the following pop-up menu:
Project Manager
Selecting [Change Division Name] will display the following dialog:
117
118
8.3.2
Adding, Deleting, Copying

The four buttons shown below are used to manipulate the calculations and Divisions in
your current Project File:
Add: Clicking [Add] displays the dialog below, where you can select the type of item to add
to your Project File. The window contains two categories of items: Calculations and
External Items.
The available Calculations are listed in the top portion of the dialog (and there will be
more as the product matures). These are ENERCALC-created structural engineering
calculations that you can use. The lower portion of the dialog lists the available External
Items that can be created externally from the ENERCALC software package and then
Project Manager
119
inserted into an ENERCALC Project File. These item types are:

Microsoft WORD Document: You can include a Microsoft Word document as an item
in your Project File. Click here 618 to go to the specific section.
Microsoft EXCEL Spreadsheet: You can include a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as an
item in your Project File. Click here 622 to go to the specific section.
Adobe Acrobat PDF File: You can include a PDF file as an item in your Project File.
Click here 626 to go to the specific section.
Scanned Document: You can set up your scanner and scan documents or images to
include as an item in your Project File. Click here 630 to go to the specific section.
Copy: For the currently highlighted item in the calculation list, clicking [Copy] creates a
new calculation of the same type using all of the information in the current calculation to
make the new calculation. The copy is added to the list and is automatically opened for
editing.
Edit: For the currently highlighted item in the calculation list, clicking [Edit] opens the
calculation for editing.
Delete: Deletes the item that is currently highlighted in the calculation list. You are
prompted to confirm before the deletion is made.
120
8.3.3
Sorting by Division, Type & Material

Select the "Division", "Material", or "Type" tab to sort the calculation list based on these
three primary organizational hierarchies.
Division: Organizes the calculation list by the Divisions you created, and sorts the
calculations within each Division in the order that you established. See below.
Project Manager
121
122
Material: Organizes the calculation list by the materials to which they refer, and sorts the
calculations within each material in the order that you established. See below.
Type: Organizes the calculation list by calculation type, and sorts the calculations within
each type in the order that you established. See below.
Project Manager
123
124
8.3.4
Changing Calculation Order

The two buttons shown at the bottom of the calculation list (see image below) are used to
move the currently highlighted calculation or Division up or down in the list.
In the images below, note the button that is used to move the item upward in the list:
>
>
Project Manager
125
Now we will show that moving the last item in a Division downward will move the item to
the top of the next Division. Notice how the Wood Column calculation moves from the
bottom of Floor Framing to the top of Analysis.
>
>
126
Project Manager
8.3.5
127
Clicking the
button will change the Project Manager screen to appear as
shown in the following image. Click here for a video:
Please see the descriptions following the numbered keynotes. The order of the notes
follows the order of usage.
(1) Specify the source ENERCALC Project File from which you will import calculations
into the current (destination) Project File.
Clicking the [Select Source File] icon will display a standard Windows File Open
dialog:
128
Clicking the [Use File Pick List] icon will open a window that lists all the ENERCALC
Project Files contained in the last few folders you have accessed:
(2) After identifying the source Project File, area (2) will show the calculations in that
source file in a tree-structure list.
(3) Click on the desired calculation in the source file to select it. It will become highlighted.
Project Manager
129
(4) Click in the current (destination) Project File to highlight a line where the calculation
should be imported. (The only restriction is that calculations cannot be imported into the
GENERAL Division or the LOADS & FORCES Division, so be sure to select a location
other than those two Divisions or any of their contents.)
(5) Click the [Copy Calc Into Project at Highlight] button.
Notice in the image below the [Concrete Beam] calculation is now highlighted in green in
the current (destination) file to indicate the location where it will be inserted.
130
Project Manager
131
Note: If you made a mistake and want to cancel the selection, just highlight the calculation
in green on the left and click the [Remove Added Calc] button (6).
(7) To finish the import process click the
(8) To completely cancel the import click the
button.
button.
132
8.4
Project Printing
The Project Printing system allows you to print a complete project full of reports in one
simple process. Click here for a video:
Project Printing
You can review all the reports in your project and then select which reports to print.
To open the Project Printing system, click the button shown bubbled in the screen capture
below:
The screen will change to display the Project Printing Manager window.
On the left will be listed all of the calculations and external items in the Project File. The
items in the GENERAL Division are placed at the top and the items in the other Divisions
are placed on the bottom. When you highlight an item the full report appears on the right
side of the screen.
See the numbered keynotes on the image below as we describe how to use the various
controls on the screen. The information is given in order of typical usage.
Project Manager
133
(1) List of project items for which reports are available : This area is similar to the
item list in the Project Manager. All available report items are listed here. Simply click an
item and the report for that item will be displayed in area (4). Please REMEMBER that the
reports shown were created when you clicked [Save Only] or [Save & Exit] in the specific
calculation.
Note: If your software is licensed and activated, and if you see Evaluation Version
watermarks on any reports, use the [Regenerate] button (6) to have all the reports
regenerated WITHOUT the watermark.
(2) Print / No-print check mark: This column contains a check mark
to denote whether that particular report item is scheduled for printing.
or an X
(3) Clear All / Select All / Invert Selection buttons: These three buttons perform bulk
changes to the print/no-print status of all items in the project.
Clears the print tags on all reports, so none will be printed. A

displayed to the left of all reports after clicking this button.
is
134
Selects the print tags on all reports, so all will be printed. A

displayed to the left of all reports after clicking this button.
is
Inverts the print/no-print tags on all reports.

(4) Report Preview area: The complete preview of the report is shown in this area for the
report item highlighted in the list.
(5) Report page selection: When the highlighted item is a multi-page report, this box
selects the page to view.
(6) Regenerate Reports: Click here
75
to jump to specific explanation.
(7) Print selected reports to printer: Displays the Windows standard Print dialog box
and begins printing all selected project items.
(8) Create single PDF file for selected reports: Displays a Windows Open File dialog
box to request a filename for a PDF file and then creates a PDF of all selected project
items.
Click [Close] to dismiss the Project Printing Manager.
Part
IX
136
Sample Session
Sample Session
9.1
137
Getting Started
Getting Started
This section will guide you through a session of preparing and printing a calculation. We
will use the Wood Beam calculation because it contains all the features available in the
Structural Engineering Library.
This sample session will cover these topics. If you are viewing this in the HTML help
system, just click on an item to jump right to the section.
Starting the Program 138
Project Assistant 139
Creating a Project File 141
Entering Project Information 143
Setting up your Title Block 145
Adding a Calculation 147
Viewing the Calculation Screen 150
Entering Data 152
Selecting Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases 163
Displaying a Sketch 168
Displaying Diagrams 169
Automatic Member Section Selection 171
Printing a Calculation 174
Saving a Calculation 177
Editing a Division Name and Adding a New Division 178
Adding Another Calculation 182
Creating a Technical Support Question 185
Closing a Project File 190
138
9.2
Starting the Program

First....let's start the program
To start the Structural Engineering Library, navigate to the ENERCALC program group
from the Start menu.
Click the Windows [Start] button and move upward to highlight the Programs (or All
Programs) item. Locate the ENERCALC program group and highlight it. You will see
several selections. Move the cursor to highlight Structural Library Version 6 and release the
mouse button.
The Structural Engineering Library will now open, and you will be viewing the Project
Assistant as described below.
Sample Session
9.3
139
Project Assistant
The Project Assistant
This dialog gives you the ability to instantly choose how you wish to begin your work
session. All of these options can also be easily chosen from the main menu, and the
Project Assistant can also be reopened from the main menu after the program has already
started.
For this Sample Session we want to create a new Project File, so the next step will be to
click the [Create Project File] button.
The next window to be displayed (see below) will allow you to define the file name and
select the drive & directory where the file should be placed.
140
We will use the filename Sample Session and place it in a folder named ENERCALC
Project Files that we created specifically to hold Project Files.
Note: You could place the file in other directories, but keep in mind that Microsoft
is now recommending specific locations for saving user-generated files with the
newer operating systems, and the default ENERCALC data folder conforms to
these new best-practice recommendations. The important thing to recognize is
that an ENERCALC Project File can hold thousands of calculations, so it is likely
that there will only need to be a single ENERCALC Project File for each design
project in the office.
Sample Session
9.4
141
Creating a Project File

Creating a Project File
Here's the Create NEW Project File dialog box with the new filename entered. NO FILE
EXTENSION is necessary....the program will append it. When the dialog appears as it
does below, just click [Save] and the file will be created.
When a new Project File is created, the new Project File is immediately opened and
displayed in the Project Manager window. You can see in the screen image below that the
new Project File looks rather plain and simple.
142
Notice that the ONLY items appearing in the calculation list are the words "GENERAL",
"LOADS & FORCES" and "Calculations".
These items are called Divisions. You can create as many Divisions as you like. They
serve as a way to organize your calculations into logical groups for your convenience .
All newly created Project Files will contain these three Divisions by default. The
"GENERAL" Division and the "LOADS & FORCES" Division cannot be renamed or
deleted, and they serve specific purposes, which we will see shortly. But the
"Calculations" Division is just created for convenience. It can be renamed, deleted, copied,
etc.
Before we add any calculations to this Project File, the next step will be to enter some
general information about the project itself.
Sample Session
9.5
143
Entering Project Information

Entering Project Information
Click the [+] icon to the left of the GENERAL Division in the Project Manager to expand its
contents, and then double-click the top item named Project Information.
For this sample session you can fill in anything you like, just to see how the Project
Information fields can be used. Then click the [Save & Exit] button and click [OK] in the
Reminder dialog. The purpose of the Reminder dialog is to alert us to the fact that some
data just changed in the title block. Under normal conditions, the Structural Engineering
Library generates the report for a single calculation at a time, and it does that when the
Save command is issued while a calculation is open. This makes for a very efficient use of
time by generating reports only on an as-needed basis. However, because we just made a
change to title block data, it is likely that we want all reports regenerated and brought up to
date at this time. This Reminder dialog guides us to the command in the main menu that
manually forces all reports to be immediately regenerated.
NOTE: This Project Information is printed in the upper-right corner of your printouts. All
Structural Engineering Library printouts have a Title Block area that contains your
144
company's information in the upper-left corner and the Project Information in the upperright corner. The above project information (and the title block information described in the
next section) will look like this on the printouts:
Sample Session
9.6
145
Setting up your Title Block

Setting up your Title Block
Before continuing on to add some calculations to the project, we'll demonstrate where to
enter company information to be included on ALL calculations produced within the
Click Settings > Printing & Title Block from the main menu.
The Printing & Title Block tab of the Program Settings dialog will be displayed. Here you
can use six lines to customize the printout with your own company information. This
information will be printed in the upper-left corner of ALL printouts (see sample previously).
146
The Logo File area of this dialog also offers the option to identify a graphic file of your
company's logo and specify that it be printed as part of the Title Block. Clicking the
button lets you use a file selection dialog to select a Windows Bitmap (BMP), GIF, JPG, or
WMF file.
At this time, please enter some information in all six lines so you can see it printed later in
this sample session. Click the [Close] button when finished, and then click the [OK] button
in the Reminder dialog.
Sample Session
9.7
147
Adding a Calculation
Adding a Calculation
To add a calculation in the Project Manager, first highlight the location where you would like
the new calculation to be inserted. At present we have no calculations in the Division
named "Calculations", so we will click on "Calculations" to highlight it as shown below:
Next, click the [Add]
button.
The next dialog will allow you to select exactly which calculation type you wish to add:
148
For this sample session we will use the Wood Beam module, so click the [Wood Beam]
button as shown below.
Sample Session
149
A Wood Beam calculation will be added in the Project Manager, and it will automatically be
opened for editing. The screen will reconfigure itself to display the graphical user interface
that is specific to the Wood Beam module.
150
9.8
Viewing the Calculation Screen

Viewing the Calculation Screen
The screen should now appear as shown below. Please observe the following areas of the
screen....they are typical of ALL calculations in the Structural Engineering Library.
The data entry tabs on the top half of the screen are where you enter your input values.
The results and graphics tabs on the bottom half of the screen are where you review the
calculated values, sketches, and graphs that result from calculations based on your input
values.
This screen layout is consistent throughout the majority of the Structural Engineering
Library calculation modules. This enables you to display the tab of interest on the bottom
and see how changes to input data on the top affect it.
Sample Session
9.9
151
Changing the Default Values/Settings

Changing the Default Values/Settings
When you first add any calculation to a Project File, that calculation will come in with
default values/settings for all user input items. If you find that you are almost always
having to change certain items, it may make sense for you to revise those defaults to
better suit your work. Revising the default values for any module is easy. Just follow these
steps:
1. Add a new calculation of the module of interest to a Project File. It will come in with the
existing default values/settings.
2. Revise the values/settings to suit.
3. Click Settings > Default Values > Save.
This will save all of your current settings/values as the new defaults for that particular
module. From that point onward, any time you add a new calculation of that module type, it
will automatically be populated with the default values/settings that you just established.
152
9.10
Entering Data
Entering Data
Below is a diagram for a wood roof beam we wish to design.
The following steps will guide you through the process of setting the span lengths and
entering the loads as shown. (In a subsequent step we will select the member section size
and reference design values from the internal databases.)
The top portion of the screen should currently look like this:
The first thing we will do is add the left cantilever. To do this, click the [+/-] icon at the left
end of the beam as shown bubbled below:
This opens the dialog named Select Add or Delete. It is currently set up to allow us to add
a new beam span, which is exactly what we want to do. There are some additional
settings offered at the bottom of the dialog in the form of checkboxes. We don't need to
worry about these at this point, but it's good to know that they are available, because they
can offer some time-saving conveniences in certain modeling situations. See the image of
the Select Add or Delete dialog shown below:
Sample Session
153
For our purposes, all we need to do is click the [OK] button. This inserts a new beam span
to the left of the original beam as shown below:
At this point, don't be concerned about the fact that the new span is not a cantilever and
that it is not the intended length. We'll correct both of those items in just a moment. For
now, let's repeat a similar process to add a new beam span on the right. First click the
[+/-] icon that appears above the right-most support. The following dialog appears:
154
This is very similar to the Select Add or Delete dialog we saw before, except that it now
has an extra option to delete the span that is to the left of the support. Although we don't
want to do this, it's good to know that this is the way that you would delete a span if
necessary. What we want to do is add a new beam span, and that is the option that is
currently selected (highlighted in yellow), so we can just click the [OK] button. The screen
should now display a 3-span continuous beam as shown below:
Now that we have three spans to work with, let's modify the support conditions to create
the cantilevered spans at the left and the right. To do this, click on the left-most support
icon shown bubbled below:
Sample Session
155
This will open the following pop-up menu that offers many options for defining the support
condition at that location:
Click the Free End option to remove all restraint from the left end, creating a cantilever.
Repeat the same process at the right-most support, but leave the remaining two supports
as they are currently configured. (They represent pinned conditions that prevent
translation in all directions but offer no moment restraint.) The result will be the doublecantilevered beam as shown below:
Now that the support conditions have been established correctly, we can wrap up this
exercise by modifying the span lengths to match the problem definition. Start by clicking
the Beam Span Data tab shown bubbled below:
The screen layout will change to display the Beam Span Data tab as shown below:
Now, we just need to adjust the span lengths for each of the three spans.
First, note that the graphical depiction of the beam helps us to make the association
between the three individual spans and the span numbers. Click any of the three span
156
number buttons in the Select Span area and notice that a corresponding span becomes
highlighted in the large graphic at the top of the view. Using this method, we can confirm
that the spans are logically ordered from number one on the left to number three on the
right. (Note that you can also click the highlighted rectangles shown above each beam
span, and they act in exactly the same way that the numbered buttons do.)
So to finish things off, click the button for span [1] and verify that the left span becomes
highlighted. According to the problem statement, this span is supposed to be 7'-3", so you
can highlight the value that is presently displayed in the Span Length field, manually edit it
to say 7.25, and then press the [Tab] key to enter that value. The display will update to
show the proper span length for the left beam span as shown below:
Repeat the same process to set the Span Length for the middle span to 24'-0" and to set
the Span Length for the right span to 9'-6", at which time the display should appear as
shown below:
The next step will be to enter the loads on the beam. Let's begin by entering the
concentrated load at the free end of the left beam span. Click the Span Loads tab to
display the following screen:
Sample Session
157
This screen contains tools to apply loads to a selected span at a time. (Shortly, we will
see a convenience tool that will allow us to apply loads to ALL spans of a beam at one
time.)
Since we want to start by entering the concentrated load at the free end of the left beam
span, click the [1] button in the Select Span area to put the focus on Span 1.
The blue highlighted band in the table now represents the first load on Span 1. But it
currently indicates Load Type = None, because we have not defined the load yet. Click the
button indicated in the screen capture below to identify the load as being a concentrated
load:
This will reconfigure the screen with the appropriate input fields to fully define the
magnitude, direction, and location of the concentrated load as shown below:
The Load Source input field provides a location where you can add some descriptive text
for your own use to identify this particular load item. The use of this field is optional, so for
this sample session we will leave it blank.
Select the checkbox for the Auto add beam weight option. This will trigger the program to
158
determine the self weight of the beam that we eventually choose, and apply it as dead load
when the analysis is performed.
Select the checkbox for the Auto Unbalanced Live load Placement option. This will initiate
the generation of additional loading conditions to ensure that all possible permutations of
live load placement are properly examined. Note that selecting this option can lead to
longer analysis times because of the number of different conditions that must be analyzed.
However, with the double-cantilevered beam configuration, it would be important for us to
have the module examine all of these potential loading permutations.
When defining the magnitude of the concentrated load, note that the module is set up to
receive this kind of load in units of kips, and notice that it has input fields for the common
load cases, such as Dead, Live, Snow, etc.
Click in the input field for Dead, enter a magnitude of 3.03, and then press the [Tab] key.
This enters the Dead load magnitude and moves the cursor to the next input field.
Note: For convenience this module is configured such that loads with positive magnitudes
are assumed to act downward, since the majority of the load items are typically gravity
loads of some sort.
The cursor is currently in the Lr input field, which represents Roof Live load. We don't
need to enter any magnitude for Roof Live, so press the [Tab] key once again to place the
cursor on the Live load input field. Enter a magnitude of 2.824, and then press the [Tab]
key.
The final step in specifying this concentrated load is to identify its position using the
Location input field. Always specify the distance from the left end of this span to the
position of the concentrated load. In this case, the correct value is zero, which also
happens to be the default value for the Location field, so the Location field can be left as-is.
The screen should now appear as shown below:
The next step will be to define the other concentrated load, which occurs at the free end of
the cantilever on the right end of the beam, by following a very similar process.
Sample Session
159
Click the [3] button in the Select Span area to put the focus on Span 3.
Click the
button to identify the load as being a concentrated load.
The magnitudes of this load are the same as those used at the opposite end of the beam,
so click in the input field for Dead, enter a magnitude of 3.03, and then press the [Tab] key
twice.
In the Live load input field enter a magnitude of 2.824, and then press the [Tab] key.
This concentrated load is to be positioned at the extreme right end of this span, so click in
the Location input field, enter a distance of 9.5 (9'-6" from the support at the left end of
Span 3), and then press the [Tab] key. The screen should now appear as shown below:
The next step in defining loads is to apply the uniformly distributed load across all three
spans. This could be done by using the Uniformly Distributed Loading Type here on the
Span Loads tab. But this would require some repetition, because the Span Loads tab is
specifically set up to facilitate the application of loads to one span at a time.
To apply this load in a more efficient manner, click the Loads All Spans tab shown bubbled
below:
The screen will reconfigure itself to display different tools for applying various types of
loads to all spans of the beam. The one that is most appropriate for our application is the
one shown bubbled below:
160
Click that tool and note that the screen displays input fields for Tributary Width and load
magnitudes for the various Load Cases as shown below:
Note: When using this tool, you can either leave the Tributary Width input field at its default
value of 1.0, and then enter the magnitudes for the various load cases in units of kips per
foot, or you can specify a Tributary Width magnitude other than 1.0 foot, and then enter the
magnitudes for the various load cases in units of kips per square foot, which will be
multiplied by the Tributary Width to determine the magnitude of the effective line load in
units of kips per foot.
For the purposes of our exercise, we will leave the Tributary Width input field at its default
value of 1.0.
Click in the Dead load input field, enter a magnitude of 0.036, and press the [Tab] key
twice.
In the Live load input field, enter a magnitude of 0.24, and press the [Tab] key once more.
The last item to take care of is to observe the load combinations that will be used for
design. Click the Load Combinations tab shown bubbled below:
Sample Session
161
This will display the Load Combinations screen. On this screen, the first step is to make
sure that we are referencing the correct set of load combinations. To do this, click the
"Change Load Combination Set" button shown below bubbled below:
This will open a pop-up menu offering choices of load combination sets that exist on the
current machine, similar to the one shown below:
Choose the option named IBC 2009. This will set up the calculation to use load
combinations based on IBC 2009.
Next, click the
button, and confirm by clicking the [Yes] button. This is a very
162
convenient option for wood designs, because it automatically sets the CD value based on
the shortest duration load case within each load combination. Note the various values of
CD that result.
The final step in this section is to ensure that all of the listed load combinations will be used
in the analysis and design. To do this, click the
button. This will open a pop-up menu
offering options for marking and clearing the Run status of all of the load combinations in
the list, as shown below:
Simply click the [Mark All] option, and all of the load combinations in the list will be marked
for use in the analysis and design.
Sample Session
9.11
163
Selecting Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases

Selecting Sections and Materials from Built-in Databases
In the previous topic you experienced part of the advantage of using the Structural
Engineering Library...simplified data entry. The input screens naturally guide you through
all of the necessary items, and you are simply entering data into a form.
We still have two critical items to specify.....the stress properties of the wood member to
use and the physical size of the beam.
First, let's retrieve the reference design values. For this sample we want to use a Douglas
Fir glued-laminated beam of type 24F-V8.
Click the General Data tab shown bubbled below:
In the Design Values category, click the [Display Wood Material Database] button
. The Wood Stress Database will be displayed as shown below:
164
By default the last selection of stress grade is displayed. We want to display ONLY the
glued-laminated sections for Douglas Fir.
In the Size Classes to Show category, click the [Glulam Table 5A Beams] button:
Click the [Contract Trees]

Common Names.
button to collapse the display of Wood Species
Click the [+] in front of the DF/DF item to expand the Douglas Fir list:
The result of these choices will be a list of stress grades as shown....
Click the 24F-V8 item as shown, and then click the [Select] button. The stress information
area on the General tab will immediately be updated to reflect your selection:
Sample Session
165
Next, let's retrieve the section property data for a 6.75" x 30" glulam beam
Click the Beam Span Data tab

option is selected as shown below:
and make sure that the [All Spans]
Then click the [Section Database] button shown bubbled below:
The Wood Section Database will be displayed as shown below:
166
Now click the

button in the Glued Laminated category so that only
those members are displayed. The result of this choice will be a list of glulam beams.
Scroll down through the database and highlight the 6.75" x 30" beam as shown below:
Sample Session
167
Click the
button. The beam size information area on the Beam Span Data
tab will immediately be updated to reflect your
selection:
168
9.12
Displaying a Sketch
Displaying a Sketch
We now have a calculation with span lengths, loads, allowable stresses, and a beam size.
It's time to review the sketch to confirm that we have entered the critical span and load
information correctly. Click the Sketch tab, and the working area of your screen will be
replaced with a simple diagrammatic representation of the beam.
Sample Session
9.13
169
Displaying Diagrams
Displaying Diagrams
In addition to the Sketch of the beam, we can also display several types of diagrams.
Selecting the Diagrams tab will display the Shear/Moment/Deflection diagram as shown
below.
Of special interest are the checkboxes that control the location of live load for the analysis
shown in the graphic. Because this program automatically moves the live load around on
the beam to obtain the governing values of shear, moment, and deflection on each span
for the final calculation results, there really is no single load case that represents the entire
beam analysis.
By selecting the live load locations here you can view the detailed shear/moment/deflection
variations produced by each load application.
Note: In the previous steps, we turned on the option to have the program automatically
handle unbalanced Live load placement. While this is a helpful feature for design, it tends
to produce an abundance of results. If you'd like to view shear, moment, and deflection
diagrams that are similar to those shown below, click the Span Loads tab and temporarily
turn off the option to have the program automatically perform unbalanced Live load
placement.
170
Sample Session
9.14
171
Automatic Member Section Selection

Automatic Member Section Selection
An additional feature of many of the Structural Engineering Library calculation modules
is automatic selection of sizes that satisfy your specified design criteria.
Note: If you turned off the option to have the program automatically perform unbalanced
Live load placement in the previous topic, please click back to the Span Loads tab now and
make sure the option for Auto Unbalanced Live Load Placement is selected once again.
Click the Calculations tab at the left edge of the screen as shown bubbled below:
When the screen displays the Calculations environment, click the Summary Results tab
as shown bubbled below:
Take a look at the stress and deflection ratios bubbled in the screen capture below:
172
We can see that our 6.75" x 30" size guess may not be an optimum use of the section. It
would be interesting to see if we could find a more efficient section. Rather than manually
trying other sizes from the database, we will use the Automatic Design function to select
an optimum member size for us. Click the [Design] button on the Beam Span Data tab
shown bubbled below:
The Wood Member Design dialog is displayed, and it allows you to set the design criteria:
On the Wood Member Design dialog, click the [Glu-Lam - Western] section type, set the
Maximum Stress Ratio to 1.0, and the Minimum Total Deflection Ratio to 180, then click
the [Start Design] button.
The software will automatically search the built-in Wood Section Database for all sections
that satisfy this criteria using the beam span, stress grade, and loading you have specified.
In a few moments the following dialog will be displayed:
Sample Session
173
Notice how the listed members can be sorted in different orders based on: Weight,
Bending Ratio, Shear Ration, LL Deflection Ratio,Total Deflection Ratio, Depth, etc. This
allows you to review the beam sizes that pass your criteria in different ways.
Click on the 5.125 x 27 beam and then click the [Select] button. The final design (with
Summary Results tab showing) looks like this:
174
9.15
Printing a Calculation
Printing a calculation
Okay...congratulations! You've created a Project File, added a calculation, entered data,
retrieved database information, performed an automatic design, and viewed some
graphics. It's time to print this calculation and take a look at what the software provides for
documentation.
Please remember that you have previously entered project information, title block
information, and of course now you have a valid engineering calculation to print.
You have three printing options in the Structural Engineering Library:
The
icon that looks like a printer sends the report report directly to the printer. The
icon that looks like a printer with a page symbol displays the print preview in a
window and allows you to review it before sending it to the printer. The
Adobe logo creates an Adobe Acrobat PDF file of the report.
icon with the
The Print Preview window looks like this:
Sample Session
175
To continue, simply click the [Print] button and the standard Windows print dialog will be
displayed. Select your printer and you will receive a printout looking very similar to the one
below:
176
Sample Session
9.16
177
Saving a Calculation
Saving a Calculation
With as much as we have accomplished in this short period of time, it is very important to
remember that we have not yet SAVED this calculation. Everything associated with this
calculation is still stored in the computer's RAM. A power outage or severe system lockup
would cause a loss of your current calculation.
So to save this new calculation to the Project File, click the [Save & Exit] button
. The current calculation will be saved and the display will return to the
Project Manager. In the image below, you can see that a Wood Beam calculation has
been added to the Division named "Calculations":
Congratulations! You calculation is now saved and you have a real Project File with an
actual calculation.
178
9.17
Editing a Division Name and Adding a New Division

Editing a Division Name
Let's do a little more work here in the current Project File. We will edit the Division named
"Calculations", and we will add a new Division.
Edit a Division Name
To edit a Division name, simply right-click the name and click Change Division Name in
the pop-up menu.
In the Enter New Division Name dialog, revise the Division name to "2nd Floor Framing" as
shown below:
Click [Save]. You will notice that the Division name has been revised from "Calculations"
to "2nd Floor Framing", but it still contains the Wood Beam calculation.
Sample Session
179
Now we will add a NEW Division named "3rd Floor Framing". To do this, click on the
Division named "2nd Floor Framing" and then click the [Add] button
. In the
Select Item to Insert dialog, click the [Insert Division] button shown bubbled below:
180
Note: There is also an option in the right-click pop-up menu named Add Division.
Then enter the name "3rd Floor Framing" and click [Save]. Your Project calculation list
should look like this:
Sample Session
181
182
9.18
Adding Another Calculation

Adding Another Calculation in the New Division by using [Copy Calc]
Similar to the way we added our first calculation, we will now add another calculation in the
2nd Floor Framing Division by making a copy of the current Wood Beam calculation and
then move it into the 3rd Floor Framing Division.
First, click on the Wood Beam calculation as shown in the screen capture below:
Then, click the

button. This will read all the data from the highlighted calculation,
create an entirely new calculation that is an exact copy of the highlighted one, and open the
new calculation so it can be edited as necessary.
When the Wood Beam calculation module opens, change the Description item to read
"3rd Floor Cantilevered Beam" as shown below:
Sample Session
183
Next click the [Save & Exit] button to save this new calculation to the Project File and
close the calculation. The Project Manager will appear as follows:
The final step is to move this new calculation into the 3rd Floor Framing Division. This is
easily done by using these buttons:
184
While the new calculation is highlighted, click the Move Highlighted Item Down
button to move it down to the 3rd Floor Framing Division. The Project Calculation list will
appear like this:
Sample Session
9.19
185
Creating a Technical Support Question

Creating a Technical Support Question
The occasion may arise that you will have a question about the software system. To best
serve you, there are certain pieces of information that are essential. Among these are your
name, the name of your company, your "KW" user registration number, and the build
number of the software you are using.
To make it easy for you to give us all this AND state your question, the Structural
Engineering Library has a built-in technical support form. It allows you to simply type in
your question and either email it directly to our Technical Support Group or print it out to fax
to us.
By emailing or faxing us your Technical Support questions, we can easily identify you,
determine if you are in need of a maintenance release, and easily read your questions. In
addition, the email method offers the option of attaching the subject ENERCALC file.
To create an email:
Click Help > Create Tech Support EMAIL from the main menu. This opens the form
shown below, in which you can enter your question and attach your Project File if desired.
186
When finished, click the [Send] button to transfer the completed message (with
attachments) to your email program:
Sample Session
187
To create a FAX:
Click Help > Create Tech Support FAX from the main menu to use the form shown
below to enter your question.
188
When finished, the completed message can be printed for faxing (or it can be sent directly
from your computer-based fax software).
Here's the printed form, ready for transmission:
Sample Session
189
190
9.20
Closing a Project File

Closing a Project File
It is now time to close out our work session. The data is saved in the Project File already,
so at this point we can close the current Project File by clicking File > Close Project from
the main menu:
Part
192
10
Calculation Modules
Calculation Modules
10.1
193
Loads & Forces Division

The LOADS & FORCES Division in the Project Manager is automatically created for you
when a new Project File is started. Click here for a video:
LOADS and FORCES Division
There is only one LOADS & FORCES Division for each project, and it is always prepopulated with specific load-related calculation items. Their use is optional, but these
calculation modules cannot be moved out of the LOADS & FORCES Division, nor can
other calculation modules be moved into or added to the LOADS & FORCES Division.
In particular, the LOADS & FORCES Division includes modules that assist with the
development of snow, wind, seismic, and reduced live load calculations.
As the Structural Engineering Library is enhanced, the LOADS & FORCES Division will
contain more and more tools to assist with developing your project load calculations.
194
10.1.1 ASCE Seismic Base Shear

Need more? Ask Us a Question
This module is a presentation of equivalent lateral force procedure seismic provisions in
ASCE 7. Click here for a video:
ASCE Seismic Base Shear
The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10. All of
the references to ASCE 7 are given on the module screens. Above each screen capture
are notes as needed to call attention to entries or explain usage.
The module is designed to allow you to work downwards through the tabs on the left side
of the screen. ASCE 7 skips all around in its definitions of things to check. This module
simplifies the process by properly ordering the items and the necessary decisions to be
made in working toward a final seismic base shear value.
The program includes a complete national zip code database and USGS databases of
seismic ground motion specifically for use with ASCE 7. Using city names or zip codes,
you can look up the latitude and longitude of the representative center of the zip code.
The seismic ground motion databases consist of "gridded" values for small increments of
latitude and longitude. Given the latitude and longitude for the city or zip code of interest,
the surrounding grid data points are located and those seismic ground motion values are
used to interpolate a value for the latitude and longitude specified. For this reason the
values may not match the web-based USGS database values exactly, however the grid
point interpolation is proper.
General
Calculation Modules
195
Ss, S1: Ground Motion

Three options are available to specify the SS and S1 values.
Browse City Database
Use the Select State drop-down list box to select the State. Then click one of the City
First Letter buttons to have all cities (in the database) listed in the scrolling box on the
right. Then simply click on the city to select. Some city names have have multiple zip
codes.
196
Enter SS and S1 Directly

Or, you can enter the SS and S1 values directly.
Enter Latitude & Longitude Directly

Or, you have the option to enter the latitude and longitude for the project location.
(Note that longitude is degrees WEST, so do not enter negative values.)
Calculation Modules
197
Site Class, Site Coefficients and Seismic Design Category

Select the appropriate Site Class based on the geotechnical conditions.
Selection of Seismic Force Resisting System

Click one of the large boxes at the top of the tab to load the table with specific selections
198
for that general category of Seismic Force Resisting System.

Note the checkbox for systems with flexible diaphragms. This may not apply to some
building systems...check ASCE for details on the particular system of interest.
Redundancy Factor
Depending on the Seismic Design Category determined from the prior selections of
Occupancy, Seismic Ground Motion and Building System, the Redundancy Factor per
ASCE will be shown here.
Calculation Modules
Specification of Building Period

All four ASCE 7 options for building period determination are available here.
199
200
Evaluation of Approximate Building Period
Approximate Period for Steel & Concrete Frames

Calculation Modules
Approximate Period for Masonry Structures
Long-Period Transition Period Reference Maps

Maps copyright ASCE.
201
202
Cs: Seismic Response Coefficient

Please check ASCE 7 section references for details.
Calculation Modules
203
Vertical Distribution of Base Shear

This tab calculates the vertical distribution of seismic forces. Use the [Add] button for
each new level. To edit information for a level, highlight the corresponding line and click
[Edit].
204
Diaphragm Forces
Using the information entered above (on the prior tab) the force distribution results are
shown here.
Calculation Modules
205
Wall Anchorage Forces

The calculation of seismic wall anchorage forces has been enhanced and moved to a
separate module.
206
Calculation Modules
207
10.1.2 ASCE Seismic Demands on Nonstructural Components

This module is an implementation of the provisions for seismic demands on nonstructural
components as per ASCE 7. The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE
7-05 and ASCE 7-10. Input parameters are taken directly from the nomenclature
presented in ASCE 7.
The ASCE 7-05 version of this calculation produces component design forces using the
defined parameters.
The ASCE 7-10 version of this calculation produces both component and connection
design forces using the defined parameters.
208
10.1.3 ASCE Seismic Wall Anchorage

This module is an implementation of the provisions for design and anchorage of walls to
resist seismic forces as per ASCE 7. The module currently supports calculations based
on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10. Input parameters are taken directly from the nomenclature
presented in ASCE 7.
The ASCE 7-05 version of this calculation produces:
Out-of-Plane Force for Structural Wall Design
Out-of-Plane Force for Concrete and Masonry Structural Wall Anchorage Design (for all
Seismic Design Categories where structural walls connect to rigid diaphragms, and for
SDC A and B where walls connect to flexible diaphragms)
Out-of-Plane Force for Concrete and Masonry Structural Wall Anchorage Design (for
Seismic Design Categories C through F where walls connect to flexible diaphragms)
The ASCE 7-10 version of this calculation produces:
Out-of-Plane Force for Structural Wall Design
Out-of-Plane Wall Anchorage Force
The module is configured to allow the definition of up to 20 different wall conditions. The
user has the option to decide which (if any) of the calculations will be included in a Project
Print.
Calculation Modules
209
210
10.1.4 ASCE Wind Enclosure

This module is an implementation of the provisions for determining the Enclosure
Classification for the determination of Wind Loads as per ASCE 7. Click here for a video:
ASCE 7 Wind Enclosure Classification
The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10. Input
parameters are taken directly from the nomenclature presented in ASCE 7.
The calculation sheet is set up to permit up to ten different analyses to be documented
within a single Project File. This can be useful when a project includes multiple buildings,
or in situations where multiple scenarios are being evaluated.
The data collection is presented in such a way as to guide the user through the module in
a logical progression.
Values of gross area and area of openings are provided for walls on four sides of the
building (arbitrarily designated "North", "South", "East", and "West"). Once these values
are provided, the module can determine if the structure qualifies as "Open" or not. If the
structure is determined to be "Open", then the module will indicate that result and stop
there. If the structure does not qualify as an "Open" structure, then input fields for Roof
Gross Area and Roof Opening Area will be displayed, and a set of four tabs will appear in
the bottom half of the screen. Once the Roof areas are populated, the four tabs thoroughly
present the calculations to determine whether the structure qualifies as "Enclosed" or
"Partially Enclosed" when each of the four respective walls receives positive external
pressure.
The results of this determination are useful for project documentation requirements, as
well as in guiding the user to read the appropriate results values from other modules within
the Structural Engineering Library.
Note: The provisions of the ASCE Wind Enclosure module are already incorporated into
the ASCE 7-10 Wind Loads module. So it is not necessary to run the standalone version
of this module if the ASCE 7-10 Wind Loads module will be used.
Calculation Modules
211
212
10.1.5 ASCE 7-10 Wind Forces, Chapter 27, Part 1

This module is a presentation of the Wind Forces provisions of Chapter 27, Part 1 of
ASCE 7-10. Click here for a video:
ASCE 7-10 Wind Forces
Limited documentation is provided here, because all of the references to ASCE 7-10 are
given on the module screens.
General
The General tab provides an input field for a general description of the project and/or the
wind calculations that are being performed.
ASCE 7-10 Wind Force Evaluation
Calculation Modules
213
This tab provides access to a series of Calculation tabs that can be used to store up to ten
separate wind calculations. These might be useful for studying different project sites,
different architectural concepts, or even evaluating separate buildings in a project.
The Description field can be used to distinguish from among the different wind load
calculations that might be defined in a single Project File.
The Print checkbox specifies whether or not the particular wind load calculation will or will
not be included when a Print command is clicked or when a Project Print is performed.
General (sub-tab of the ASCE 7-10 Wind Force Evaluation tab)

This tab collects basic data such as Risk Category, Basic Wind Speed, Directionality
Factor, Building Dimensions, Exposure Category, Topographic Factor, and information to
determine how the building frequency will be determined.
The Risk Category is only for reference in documenting the design. It no longer influences
the importance factor, but it does dictate which Wind Speed map to use to determine the
Basic Wind Speed.
214
The Exposure Category is dependent upon the upwind characteristics. Therefore, as

different building elevations become the windward face of the structure, it is possible that
the Exposure Category will change. For this reason, the program allows the Exposure
Category to be defined separately for each building face in turn becoming the windward
face.
The Building Flexibility Selection offers three different options for defining the frequency of
the building.
The first option declares that the building will be assumed to be rigid (having a frequency
greater than or equal to 1 Hz).
The second option applies the prescriptive methods in Sections 26.9.2 and 26.9.3 of
ASCE 7-10 to approximate the frequency of the building based on construction type/
layout and mean roof height.
The third option allows the user to explicitly specify the frequency in the North-South
direction and in the East-West direction.
Note that if the second option is selected, a new tab named "Frequency" will be introduced
between the "Story Data" tab and the "Gust Factor" tab.
Story Data
This tab collects the data required to define the vertical locations of the stories with respect
to finished grade.
Calculation Modules
215
The development of the story data table is controlled by the three buttons: Add Level, Edit
Level, and Delete Level, which perform their respective operations on the table of story
data.
Clicking Add or Edit opens the Story Information pop-up dialog as shown above. Two
items are worthy of note on this dialog. First, the Height to Story is always referenced from
grade, so it is looking to collect the height from grade to the story of interest, not the story
to story height. Second, the values of eRx and eRy are only used if a building is determined
(or defined) to be "Flexible" (< 1 Hz) in a particular direction. So if a building turns out to be
"Rigid" in one or both directions, then the values of eRx and eRy are not required in those
directions, and the values can be left at zero or a value can be entered, but the program
will ignore it.
Frequency (Only displayed if the option is selected on the General tab to "Calculate
Frequency")
This tab displays the story data that was previously collected, and it requests the Building
Construction Type and the values of Li necessary to complete the check to determine if
the approximate methods of frequency determination are applicable.
216
If the approximate methods of frequency determination are found to be applicable, this tab
reports the approximate frequency. Otherwise, a message will be displayed to indicate
that the approximate methods are not applicable, and that the building frequency must be
determined another way.
Gust Factor
This tab displays the results of the Gust Factor determination for each of the four
elevations, in turn, being the face of the building that receives positive external pressure.
Calculation Modules
217
The North, South, East, and West tabs present the calculation and the resulting Gust
Factor that will be used in subsequent calculations when the respective building elevation
receives positive external pressure.
When the building is categorized as "Rigid" in a particular direction, the program offers the
checkbox option to force the value of the Gust Factor to 0.85 when the referenced
elevation receives positive external pressure.
When the building is categorized as "Flexible" in a particular direction, the program
requires one more value, which is the damping ratio. This value is collected in an input box
on the respective direction tab when appropriate, and the value is incorporated into the
Gust Factor to be used when the referenced elevation receives positive external pressure.
It is worth noting that many of the parameters used in the calculation of the Gust Factor are
dependent upon the Exposure category. Since the Exposure category can vary for each of
the four cardinal directions, it is possible that the Gust Factor for use when the North
elevation of the building receives positive external pressure may actually be different than
the Gust Factor for use when the South elevation of the building receives positive external
pressure.
218
Enclosure
This tab displays the results of the Enclosure determination for each of the four elevations,
in turn, being the face of the building that receives positive external pressure.
The upper half of this tab is dedicated to evaluating the building to determine whether or not
it qualifies as an "Open" structure. The module collects the gross areas of each of the four
walls along with the areas of opening in each of the four walls. Based on the data provided
by the user, the module performs the calculations and checks the criteria to see if the
building qualifies as an "Open" structure. If it does, then the module reports that result. If
the building does NOT qualify as an "Open" structure" then additional input fields are
displayed to collect the gross area of the Roof, and the area of openings in the roof, and
the workflow continues to determine whether the building qualifies as "Enclosed" or
"Partially Enclosed". This evaluation takes place four times, considering each of the four
walls to be the windward wall, in turn. The intermediate calculations are performed and the
results are reported on each of the four wall tabs.
It is worth noting that a building could potentially be considered "Partially Enclosed" when
some of its elevations receive positive external pressure, and "Enclosed" when its other
Calculation Modules
219
elevations receive positive external pressure.

It is also worth noting that convenience buttons have been provided on each of the four wall
tabs to allow the user to simply declare the building to be "Enclosed" or "Partially
Enclosed" when the selected elevation receives positive external pressure. These have
been implemented for situations where the evaluation has already been performed and/or
the user is already confident in making a decision by judgment.
The Enclosure classification is used downstream to select appropriate values of GCpi to
use when each of the four elevations becomes the windward wall.
Velocity Pressures
This tab displays the results of the Velocity Pressure determination for the various walls
when each wall is under leeward, sidewall, and windward wall conditions.
The first row of data reports the values of Kh that are applicable when each of the walls
experiences leeward or sidewall pressures.
220
The second row of data reports the resulting values of qh that are applicable when each of
the walls experiences leeward or sidewall pressures.
Next, a table is presented that reports the values of Kz and the resulting values of qz that
are applicable, as a function of height, when each of the walls experiences windward wall
pressures.
Pressure Coefficients
This tab reports the values of GCpi that are applicable when each of the respective
elevations receives positive external pressure. The remainder of this tab is dedicated to
collecting the values of Cp or Cn as appropriate for the various surfaces of the building.
Wall values are collected first, and the input fields collect values of Cp that will be used
when each of the four walls is a windward wall, a sidewall, or a leeward wall.
At the bottom of the tab is a customizable table that is set up to receive many lines of Cp
or Cn values pertinent to the roof. A convenience button is provided to display the figures
that define the Cp or Cn values for various conditions. A glance at the tables reveals that
Calculation Modules
221
the factors for roofs are frequently dependent upon the wind direction with respect to the
ridge, and also dependent upon whether pressures are desired for the windward or
leeward surfaces of the roof. So some planning will be required to set this table up to yield
the desired results. To make the downstream results most applicable and easy to read,
the program has been set up so that a roof pressure value will only be calculated for
situations where nonzero values of Cp or Cn have been specified. To put this another
way, referring to the table above, there are no values of Cp defined for the North or South
elevations for the "Perpendicular: Windward" or "Perpendicular: Leeward" conditions. This
is because the ridge is assumed to run in the North-South direction in the hypothetical
building being considered. As such, it would not make sense to ask the program to report
windward or leeward roof pressures when the wind acts in the north or south directions.
So to avoid overpopulating the output with meaningless results, the blank fields will be
interpreted by the program as an indication that the corresponding calculation is not
required. We will see the benefit of this when we move to the Wind Pressures tab and see
how concisely these results are reported.
On a related note, it is worth mentioning that the Cp and Cn tables occasionally report
values of zero for certain conditions. These are typically provided for interpolation
purposes. But if a situation is ever encountered where a value of zero for Cp or Cn is
actually required for design purposes, the user is advised to enter a small nonzero value.
Wind Pressures
This tab reports the values of wind pressures that occur on the various surfaces of the
building when the named elevation receives positive external pressure.
222
Looking at the screen capture above, we see that the North Wall tab is currently selected.
Let's work through this tab thoroughly as an example. As indicated in the on-screen note,
we interpret all of the results on this tab as being the pressures that occur on the named
surface of the building when the North Wall receives positive external wind pressure.
So when we are focused on the North Wall tab:
The "Windward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the North Wall when the
North Wall receives positive external pressure.
The "Leeward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the South Wall when the
North Wall receives positive external pressure.
The "Sidewall Pressures" are those that would apply to the East and West Walls when
the North Wall receives positive external pressure.
The "Roof Pressures" are those that would apply to the identified areas measured from
the North edge of the roof when the North Wall receives positive external pressure.
Just to drive home the proper interpretation of the values reported on the Wind Pressures
tab, let's work through the East tab, so we can interpret some windward and leeward roof
pressures. Remember that this hypothetical building is assumed to have a North-South
oriented ridge. So when we are focused on the East Wall tab:
Calculation Modules
223
The "Windward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the East Wall when the
East Wall receives positive external pressure.
The "Leeward Wall Pressures" are those that would apply to the West Wall when the
East Wall receives positive external pressure.
The "Sidewall Pressures" are those that would apply to the North and South Walls
when the East Wall receives positive external pressure.
The "Perp: Windward Roof Pressures" are those that would apply to the windward
(East) portion of the roof when the East Wall receives positive external pressure.
The "Perp: Leeward Roof Pressures" are those that would apply to the leeward (West)
portion of the roof when the East Wall receives positive external pressure.
Note that all surfaces report pressures based on both the positive and the negative internal
pressure conditions, and the algebraic sign convention follows that of ASCE 7, which is to
say that positive values are interpreted to act toward the named surface and negative
values act away from the named surface. Work this logic through an example such as a
windward wall and see that it all makes sense. The negative internal pressure condition
produces higher total pressures toward the windward wall, than the positive internal
pressure condition does, because the negative internal pressure works in the same
direction as the external pressure on a windward wall. Similar logic can be applied to all
other surfaces to demonstrate that the mathematics are proper.
Story Forces
This tab reports the values of wind forces tributary to each story in the building.
224
Using the story heights determined on the Story Data tab, the Story Forces tab determines
the tributary heights for each floor by assuming a simply-supported wall construction that
spans between adjacent floor/roof levels. Wind pressures are applied to the tributary
heights and multiplied by the perpendicular dimension of the building to arrive at forces for
each story.
The option is provided to either display or hide the forces tributary to the lower half of the
lowest level. In some construction types, this component of load is delivered to a slab on
grade and is not a design consideration for the Main Wind Force Resisting System.
The program reports results for each of the four "Cases" as presented by Figure 27.4-8 of
ASCE 7-10. Cases 2 and 4 also incorporate a design torsional moment as defined in
Figure 27.4-8. In all situations, the program reports the force magnitude. In situations
where a torsional moment applies, the program reports the moment arm that is being
considered for each component of force, as well as the resulting net moment.
The final item in the results on this tab is based on the minimum required wind loads per
Section 27.4.7 of ASCE 7-10. That section requires that the wind load to be used in the
design of the Main Wind Force Resisting System for an enclosed or partially enclosed
building shall not be less than 16 psf multiplied by the wall area of the building (and 8 psf
Calculation Modules
225
multiplied by the roof area of the building projected onto a vertical plane normal to the
assumed wind direction). So in this last item in the results list, the program reports story
forces assuming 16 psf applied to each wall of the building. As of build 6.12.4.24, the
program does not collect enough information to consider the 8 psf on the projection of the
roof area, so this additional load may need to be considered with supplemental hand
calculations on buildings with other than flat or low-slope roofs.
Base Shears & Torsions

This tab reports the summation of the wind story forces and torsions for all levels in the
building, for all four "Cases" and for the minimum required wind loads per Section 27.4.7.
Although "Base Shears" are not technically a part of the ASCE 7-10 design procedure for
wind loads, the summation of all story forces is often of interest to designers for a variety
of reasons. Some designers like to see how the wind "base shear" compares to the
seismic base shear. For some designers, the summation of the wind forces is useful in
the checking process to get a confidence level that the calculated pressures are
reasonable. Whatever the reason, the values are reported on this tab if they are of
interest.
226
As with the Story Forces tab, the Base Shears & Torsions tab provides the option to either
include or exclude the component of shear and torsion that is tributary to the bottom half of
the lowest level.
Print Properties
Finally, the complexity of this wind method and its requirements to examine multiple cases
and conditions can lead to voluminous output. In recognition of the fact that different
designers have different needs, the Print Properties dialog has been provided for this
module to enable the output to be tailored to suit.
Calculation Modules
227
10.1.6 ASCE 7-05 Section 6.4, MWFRS:Simplified Forces

This module is a presentation of the Simplified Wind Forces provisions of ASCE 7-05.
ASCE 7-05 Wind Forces
Limited documentation is provided here, because all of the references to ASCE 7-05 are
given on the module screens.
General
Applicability Checks
Please see ASCE 7-05 references for descriptions. This module performs wind load
calculations for the "Simplified" method. ALL boxes must be checked for module to give
results on the Analysis Values tab.
228
Analysis Values
See ASCE 7-05 sections noted for description of values and other references.
The lower portion of this tab gives the resulting calculated wind pressures for the main
wind force resisting system and for components & cladding.
Calculation Modules
229
230
10.1.7 IBC 2009 Alternate All-Heights Wind Method

This module is an implementation of the IBC 2009 Alternate All-Heights Wind Method.
General, Checklist, & Analysis Values
This tab offers a checklist of the criteria that must be satisfied in order to apply the IBC
2009 Alternate All-Heights Wind Method. Once all of the checkboxes are checked, the
module will offer input fields for analytical values such as Exposure Category, Mean Roof
Height, Topographic Factor parameters, Basic Wind Speed, Occupancy category, and
options for the selection of Velocity Pressure Coefficients.
MWFRS - Wall
This tab reports design pressures on windward walls, leeward walls, sidewalls and
parapets. Pressure values are distinguished for Enclosed and Partially Enclosed
structures, and values are reported for the positive internal pressure condition and for the
negative internal pressure condition.
Calculation Modules
231
MWFRS - Roof
This tab reports design pressures on roof surfaces. Pressure values are distinguished for
the conditions of wind perpendicular to the ridge and wind parallel to the ridge. In the case
of wind perpendicular to the ridge, pressure values are reported for flat roofs as well as for
various slope angles. In all cases, results are presented for Enclosed and for Partially
Enclosed structures, and values are reported for the positive internal pressure condition
and for the negative internal pressure condition.
232
MWFRS - Non BLDG

This tab reports net design pressures on the projection of surfaces of non-building
structures.
Calculation Modules
233
C&C - Roof & Overhang

This tab reports design pressures on components and cladding within roof surfaces.
Results are presented for Enclosed and for Partially Enclosed structures, and values are
reported for the positive internal pressure condition and for the negative internal pressure
condition.
234
C&C - Wall & Parapet

This tab reports design pressures on components and cladding within wall and parapet
surfaces. Results are presented for Enclosed and for Partially Enclosed structures, and
values are reported for the positive internal pressure condition and for the negative internal
pressure condition.
Calculation Modules
235
236
10.1.8 ASCE Snow Loads

This module is an implementation of the ASCE method of determining Flat Roof Snow
Load, Sloped Roof Snow Load, and Snow Drifts on Lower Roofs, and Snow Drifts at Roof
Obstructions. The module currently supports calculations based on ASCE 7-05 and ASCE
7-10.
General
Provides a place to enter descriptive text.
Flat Roof Snow Loads

Allows up to 10 different flat roof snow loads to be calculated by entering values for all of
the parameters in accordance with ASCE 7.
Calculation Modules
237
Sloped Roof Snow Loads

Allows up to 10 different sloped roof snow loads. The input form provides the option to
refer to a previously defined Flat Roof Snow Load, or to explicitly specify a Flat Roof Snow
Load value along with the remaining values for all of the parameters in accordance with
ASCE 7.
238
Snow Drifts on Lower Roofs

Allows up to 10 different conditions to be evaluated for snow drifts on lower roofs. The
input form collects values for all of the necessary parameters to determine the windward
and leeward drifts and selects the controlling case in accordance with ASCE 7.
Calculation Modules
239
Snow Drifts at Roof Projections

Allows up to 10 different conditions to be evaluated for snow drifts at roof projections. The
input form collects values for all of the necessary parameters to determine the windward
drift in accordance with ASCE 7.
240
Calculation Modules
241
10.1.9 ASCE Live and Roof Live Load Reduction

This section enables the user to calculate reduced live and roof live loads for various parts
of a project.
This section is a direct application of ASCE 7-05 Sections 4.8 and 4.9 and ASCE 7-10
Sections 4.7 & 4.8 concerning live and roof live load reductions. We refer the user to those
sections of the referenced design standards for specific descriptions of the values used in
each column seen below.
242
10.1.10 Project Load Group Builder

The Project Load Group Builder enables the user to store commonly used "Load Items"
and then combine them into various Groups to calculate total loads for the defined Groups.
Load Items are defined and organized on the right-hand side of the screen as indicated in
the screen capture below:
You can type in a Category name (discussed in more detail below), a Load Name, choose
the Load Type, and specify the Load Value, and then click "Add as New Load". The newly
added Load Item will appear in the Load Items List below. To edit an existing Load Item,
click on the item of interest in the Load Items List, edit the values in the individual fields
above, and then click "Save Changes"
Load Items are very flexible in their definition. A Load Item could represent the weight of a
particular building construction material, such as the Dead Load of 3/4" plywood floor
sheathing in units of PSF. A Load Item could also represent an allowance of 5 PSF Dead
Load for ceiling & lights. But Load Items can also take the form of load types other than
Dead Load as well. For instance, you could define a Load Item consisting of 100 PSF Live
Load, or 30 PSF Snow Load. In this way, the Project Load Group Builder is capable of
tracking loads of all types that may be applicable to a particular area of a building.
Calculation Modules
243
One of the powerful features of the Project Load Group Builder is that it takes the Load
Item data that you enter and it saves that data in a file that is separate and distinct from
your Project File. (The file is named LoadDbase.tps, and it is saved in the folder that you
have identified as your default Project File location.) In this way, the system continues to
accumulate more and more of your commonly specified materials and loads as you work
on different projects. And that ever-growing database of your custom Load Items is always
available to you on future projects.
In order to bring some organization to the many load items that you may eventually
accumulate, the Project Load Group Builder introduces the concept of the "Category". A
Category can contain one or more Load Items. Here again, the way you use Categories
can be extremely flexible. Some users may prefer to organize their Load Items into
Categories that represent different types of materials or loads. For example, the
organizational hierarchy might take on a form like this where the bullet items represent
Load Items within the indicated Category:
Category: Roof Sheathing
1/2" sheathing
5/8" sheathing
3/4" sheathing
7/8" sheathing
1" sheathing
Category: Roof Framing
2x6@16" o/c
2x8@16" o/c
2x10@16" o/c
2x12@16" o/c
Category: NW Concrete Slab
4.5" total with 2" deck
Category: LW Concrete Slab
244

Category: Live Load
Classroom
First Floor Corridor
Office
Stack Rooms
Category: Snow Load
30 PSF
32 PSF
34 PSF
36 PSF
And so on...
But remember, this is just one way that Categories could be used. Here is yet another
idea:
Category: Typical classroom on structural floor
DL of flooring
DL of concrete slab on metal deck
DL of composite metal deck
DL allowance for structural steel framing
DL allowance for ceiling & lights
DL allowance for mechanical & misc.
LL for classroom occupancy
LL for partition allowance
Category: Typical corridor on structural floor
DL of flooring
DL of concrete slab on metal deck
DL of composite metal deck
DL allowance for structural steel framing
LL for corridor above first floor occupancy
Category: Typical roof structure
DL of asphalt shingles
DL allowance for second layer of asphalt shingles
DL of metal roof deck
DL structural steel framing
SL for sloped roof
Calculation Modules
245
And so on...
So remember that your Load Items and your Categories are being stored in a separate file,
and they are continuing to accumulate from one project to the next as you enter more data.
Consider this as you decide on a system of organization that will work best for you.
Now that we have covered Load Items and Categories, we can introduce the real purpose
for this module, which is the "Load Group". Very simply, a Load Group is a group of Load
Items that will be summed together.
Load Groups are defined and manipulated on the right-hand side of the screen as indicated
in the screen capture below:
The Load Groups in the current Project File are listed in the "Group Name" list in the upper
left corner of the module. The toolbar buttons above the list perform the following
functions:
Adds a new Load Group
Creates a copy of the selected Load Group
246
Allows the name of the selected Load Group to be edited

Deletes the selected Load Group
When a Load Group is selected in the "Group Name" list, the details of that Load Group are
displayed in the lower left corner of the screen. (A newly created Load Group will display
no detailed information until some Load Items are added to the Loaf Group.) The display
will show the Load Items that have been added to the current Load Group including the
Load Item name, the Load Type (Dead Live, Snow, etc.), the magnitude of the load, and
the units.
So we have now covered Load Items and Load Groups. The final detail is...how do we add
these Load Items to Load Groups? The answer lies in the buttons shown below:
Adds the selected Load Item to the current Load Group
Removes the selected Load Item from the current Load Group
Finally, the Print function will automatically include all defined Load Groups and provide a
nice tabular summary of the Load Items that combine to produce each Load Group.
Calculation Modules
10.2
247
Beams
Overview
There is one main module for designing Steel, Concrete and Wood beams. There are
separate modules for Composite Steel Beams, Steel Beams with Torsional Loads, and
one for Masonry Lintels.
This section deals ONLY with typical single- or multi-span Steel, Concrete & Wood
beams.
The presentation screen is divided into three areas: Beam representation &
modification, Data Entry & Calculation Results as illustrated in the screen capture
below:
248
(1) Beam representation & modification: This area allows you to create and modify the
beam layout.
Click on the support icons

Free.
Click on the [+/-] icon
to select the type of support fixity: Fixed, Pinned, or
to display a window to add or delete beam spans:
Calculation Modules
249
Click on the beam representation to change the beam specific data on the Beam Span
Data and Span Loads tabs.
250
(2) Data Entry: This set of tabs is where you enter all information for the beam. These
tabs will show different information according to material type selected. See the specific
chapters for the items provided for each material. Click one of the following to jump:
Wood
Steel
Concrete
Here is a summary of the purpose of each tab:

General Data
Beam Material
Clicking one of these buttons changes the material type used for the beam.
Compression Edge Lateral Bracing
These selections control how the module will evaluate the lateral compression edge
bracing for the design. When Define Bracing Span-by-Span is selected, the
unbraced length is defined on a span-by-span basis on the Beam Span Data tab.
When any of the other options are selected, the unbraced length is defined here on the
General Data tab, and that definition is applied to all spans of the beam.
Analysis Method
For wood & steel you can select ASD or LRFD design methods. Concrete design is
always ultimate strength (LRFD).
Calculation Modules
251
Beam Span Data

This tab is used to define span length and beam section information:
Select Span
These buttons allow you to select which span the values in the data entry area apply
to.
Span Length
This is where you define the length of the currently selected span.
Deflection Ratios
These are used as the basis for the deflection design check and also as the starting
point for automatic member selection.
Section Name & Buttons
For steel and wood you can enter the standard beam section designation. You can
also type in the section name and the module will search the built-in database for a
match. If a match is found, the section properties will be loaded from the database and
they will appear on the Properties tab.
Click the button indicated below to open the section database for rolled steel shapes:
The database contains an extensive number of standard shapes commonly used in

252
the USA.
Click the button indicated below to display the Steel Member Design dialog:
This provides control over the type of member to be selected and various stress ratio,
deflection ratio and size limits to respect during the automatic member selection
process.
Calculation Modules
253
The Quick-List provides a fast way to select a member section from the database.
Just select the type of member, scroll through the list and click on your selection.
Compression Edge Lateral Bracing

When you have selected Define Bracing Span-by-Span on the General tab you will
see the following bracing options on the Beam Span Data tab:
254
These selections control how the module will evaluate the lateral compression edge
bracing for the beam span selected above.
The top row has common selections for fully-braced conditions as well as options to
divide the selected span into segments of equal braced length.
The Define Spacing option lets you set a starting point and subsequent spacing for the
bracing within the selected span:
The Define Locations option lets you set up to three specific bracing locations
referenced from the left end of the selected span:
Calculation Modules
255
Span Loads
This tab is used to specify loads FOR THE SELECTED SPAN ONLY (except as noted
below) using the tools shown on the following screen capture:
Use the [Add Load], [Copy Load] and [Delete Load] buttons to add, copy, or delete loads
on the selected span.
Use the Load Type selections to specify the type of load that will be added. This selection
affects the currently highlighted item in the table of loads. The data entry areas on the
right will change based on the type of load selected.
The Auto Add Beam Weight option will calculate the weight of the beam and add it to your
applied loads as a uniform dead load on the beam. Note that this option applies to the
FULL LENGTH of the beam...it is NOT a setting that can be set on a span-by-span basis.
The Auto Unbalanced Live Load Placement option is a VERY powerful selection. When
you have two or more beam spans, you can select this item and the module will
automatically generate load combinations for all possible permutations of patterned live
256
load being placed on alternate spans. For instance, on a two-span beam, it would create
conditions that place live load on both spans, live load on the left span only and live load on
the right span only. That is a total of three permutations of live load, and it will do this for
ALL of the load combinations that are selected to run.
NOTE: This can significantly increase recalculation time needed for beams with many
spans.
Load classifications are: D: Dead, Lr: Roof Live, L: Live, S: Snow, W: Wind, E:
Earthquake, H: Earth Pressure
Loads All Spans

This tab offers tools that are used to specify loads with spacings or lengths that might
cause them to overlap multiple spans as shown in the screen capture below:
Click the load type button on the left and the appropriate load entry items will appear to
allow you to define the magnitude, location and extent of the load. With all load items set to
[None], the tab will be almost entirely blank.
Start Dist and End Dist defines the application distance from the FAR LEFT end of the
beam. For a beam with two 20' spans where you want to apply a uniform load 5' in from
each end use Start Dist = 5.00 and End Dist = 35.00.
The third item allows you to define repeating point loads or moments. You define the
position of the first load and the spacing increment thereafter.
The last item allows you to define repeating loads on EACH span. Load specification is for
the load in EACH span. For example, consider a two-span beam where the first span is
25' and the second span is 45'. Selecting [1/3 Points] will place loads at 8.33', 16.66' from
the left support of the first span and at 15' and 30' from the left support of the second span.
The "Specify" option allows you to provide a unique spacing measured from the left end of
each span.
Although this tab is not typically used for single-span beams, the tools are perfectly
applicable to single-span beams.
Calculation Modules
257
Load Combinations
This tab is used to specify the load combinations that will be run for the analysis of this
beam, as shown in the screen capture below:
The [Change Load Combination Set] button is used to retrieve load combinations sets
from the Load Combination 84 database.
The lock symbol is used to enable editing of the load combination values. Click on the lock
symbol, and the multipliers for the load types will change to data entry items. After you
change an item's value and press [Tab], you will see the Load Combination description at
the left end of the line change to reflect your entered values.
[Use Add'l...] button, when clicked, displays a data entry item where you can specify the
magnitude of SDS to use as an additional internal factor in the load combinations.
[Auto Reverse Wind Factors] and [Auto Reverse Seismic Factors] buttons trigger the
module to create additional load combinations with the "W" and "E" factors set to negative
values. This has the effect of reversing the direction of application of the wind and seismic
loads that have been applied to the member.
(3) Calculation Result: This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current
calculation.
258
The vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas
available for review:
Calculations provides several tabs that let you review the numeric detail of the
calculation. The left-most tab is always the Summary where the concise design is
given.
See the individual sections for each material type for specific discussions of these
result sections.
Sketch provides a scale illustration of the item you are designing, including an
indication of support conditions and applied load magnitudes.
Diagram provides a moment, shear, or deflection diagram for the item you are
designing.
Calculation Modules
259
260
10.2.1 Multiple Simple Beam

This module is specifically designed to provide rapid analysis and design of simple beams.
For complex, multi-span beams please use the other beam modules for wood, steel and
concrete beams.
This module has an added section above the beam representation that allows you to add
and select up to 12 beams to design. This can be seen in the screen capture below:
Looking at the screen capture above you can see:

(1) The button in yellow with green lines above and below represents the currently
selected beam for which data is displayed.
(2) The button labeled [Bm 2] represents the second beam that was defined. Clicking on
that button will save all of the data for [Bm 1] and display all the data for [Bm 2].
(3) [Add] is used to add another beam to this calculation. When two beams have already
been defined, clicking [Add] will add a button labeled [Bm 3].
(4) [Delete Bm X] is used to delete the noted beam. It will delete the beam that is
currently selected.
Directly below the band of beam selection buttons is the graphic that shows the basic
layout of the currently selected beam. See below for a more detailed description.
Calculation Modules
261
Note: In this module, the beam span length is always specified on the beam layout
graphic.
Beam Layout Graphic

This area shows a graphic representation of the selected beam. There are several
variations of beams that you can specify using the [Add Cant] buttons and also by clicking
on the end support graphics.
Here is a basic simple span beam:
Clicking on the right [Add Cant] button in the image above adds a single cantilever at the
right support as shown below:
Clicking on the left support icon in the image above displays a selection box so you can
select a fixed end. Doing this sets the left support to fixed as shown below:
Clicking on the left [Add Cant] button in the image above adds a single cantilever at the left
support, resulting in the double cantilever as shown below:
Note that adding the cantilever on the left also had the effect of automatically revising the
left support back to a pinned condition.
General Data Tab

This tab is where you select the beam material, allowable stresses, beam size, and set
the beam bracing layout.
For steel and wood you can select ASD or LRFD design methods. For concrete, only
strength design is available.
262
Steel Specific Tab Items

Design Values: This area enables you to enter the yield strength and elastic modulus
of the steel. The paper-with-hand icon gives you access to the available AISC steel
stress grades.
Quick-List Tab: This tab provides quick access to the built-in 13th Edition AISC steel
section list. Clicking a section name like [W] or [HP] in the Select AISC Type category
will display all the steel sections of that type in the list to the right.
Properties Tab: This tab provides a [View Section Properties] button that when
clicked displays all of the design values for the AISC section you have selected.
Bracing Tab: This tab allows you to select how your beam is braced against lateraltorsional buckling. Defined brace points are automatically assumed to brace both the
Calculation Modules
263
top and the bottom flanges.
The first line offers the most basic options.....fully unbraced or fully braced.
The next line offers uniform brace spacing options.
The last two buttons offer the ability to specify brace spacings from a starting point or
enable you to specify selected brace points, as shown below:
264
Wood Specific Tab Items

Design Values: This area enables you to specify the design values for the wood
species & grade you want to use. Click the
allowable stresses database.
button to access the built-in NDS
Quick-List Tab: This tab provides quick access to the database of wood sections.
Clicking a section type button like [Sawn-General] or [TJ:Microllam] in the Select
Type category will display all the sections of that type in the list to the right.
Properties Tab: This tab provides the values for the wood section you have chosen.
You can enter different numbers here to modify the section.
Calculation Modules
265
Bracing Tab: See information provided above in the Steel section for a summary of
bracing options.
Concrete Specific Tab Items

Design Values: This area enables you to enter concrete and reinforcing strengths for
the beam. In addition you can specify the stirrup size and Phi values.
Span Data
When a concrete beam is chosen, a new tab named Span Data will be added to the
user interface (see below). This tab is where you specify the beam cross section and
reinforcing. This tab will only be shown when the material is set to concrete.
266
Beam Shape: You can select between 4 beam shapes:
Calculation Modules
267
On the right side of the tab you can specify up to 6 bars set (quantity, size, vertical
location and start/stop endpoints).
Each bar set is referenced on the sketch with a color shown as a dot to the left of the
set description.
The column highlighted in light blue titled "Dist of bar center....from...." is how you set
the vertical position of the bars set in the beam.
When you look at the top one you can read it as "The top bar set is 3 inches from the
bottom of the beam". Note that the module will know whether the bars are in tension or
compression and handle the calculations properly.
The item named Bar Position This Span defines the starting and ending location of the
bar's ends with respect to this span's left support.
268
The data in the screen capture below shows that bar set #1 runs from the left end (0.0
ft) to 10.0 ft from the left support.
Using these starting and ending locations you can fine tune the bar layout and end
cutoffs.
Results Tabs
Calculation Modules
And for concrete beams these two additional sub-tabs are also visible:
269
270
Sketch
Diagrams
Calculation Modules
271
10.2.2 General Beam Analysis

The General Beam Analysis module offers beam analysis functionality but does not
incorporate any design processes. In this way, it can be a useful tool for situations where
only analysis results are desired, such as shear, moment, reactions, and deflections.
General Data tab:
The General Data tab allows you to set the span conditions, span lengths, and support
conditions in much the same way that this information is provided in the other beam
Beams
modules. Refer to the

topic for additional explanation. In addition to these pieces of
data, the General Data tab also provides input fields for the elastic modulus for bending,
and the cross sectional area and moment of inertia of each span of the beam, as shown
below:
Span Loads tab:

The Span Loads tab allows you to specify loads on one span at a time. The behavior of the
tools on this tab is identical to the tools described for use in the other beam modules.
Refer to the
Beams
topic for additional explanation.
Loads All Spans tab:

The Loads All Spans tab allows you to specify loads on all spans at the same time. The
behavior of the tools on this tab is identical to the tools described for use in the other beam
modules. Refer to the
Beams
Load Combinations tab:
272
The Load Combinations tab provides a view of the load combinations that will be analyzed.
It also offers the ability to:
Select a different set of load combinations,
Modify the values used as load factors, and
Turn certain combinations on and off.
Refer to the
Beams
The General Beam Analysis module offers output options that are analogous to the output
options provided by the other beam modules, with the exception that no design results are
provided.
The lower half of the screen is dedicated to the display of results. The vertical strip of tabs
on the left side of the display allow you to choose between Calculations, Sketch, and
Diagram as explained below:
Calculations:
The Calculations tab offers four sub-tabs:
Summary Results: Displays extreme moments, maximum shear, extreme deflections and
extreme reactions.
Maximum Combinations: Displays extreme moments and shears, on a span-by-span

basis, for all load combinations.
Calculation Modules
273
M-V-D: Summary: Displays moment, shear, and deflections at small increments along all
spans. Moment and shear are displayed for all load combinations. Deflection is displayed
for service load combinations only.
Support Reactions: Displays support reactions for all supports, for all load combinations.
274
Sketch:
Displays a sketch of the beam, indicating span lengths, support conditions, and applied
loads.
Diagram:
Displays a graphic depiction of the beam with superimposed graphs of Moment, Shear, or
Deflection for a selected load combination, or for an envelope of all load combinations.
Calculation Modules
275
10.2.3 Wood Beam

In this section, for each input tab we will review only the items that are unique to the
WOOD material type. Click here for a video:
Wood Beam
For general information on the typical data input for all beams see the Beams
247
topic.
This module offers complete design of single and multi-span wood members. Among its
capabilities are:
Single or multi-span beams.
End fixity can be pinned, fixed, free or a combination thereof.
Analysis is according to 2005 NDS.
ASD or LRFD design methods can be selected. Values of KF and phi are
automatically determined and applied for the LRFD method.
A complete wood section database is provided. This includes sawn, gluedlaminated and selected manufactured sections.
A complete wood species database is provided. All values are per 2005 NDS.
Unbraced compression edge lengths can be specified in a variety of ways.
Automatic member selection is provided.
You can specify values for CM, Ct and Cr. CF or CV is automatically provided. In the
case of CF , the value is also based on species stress grade.
General Data
Beam Material
Clicking one of these buttons changes the material type used for the beam.
Design Method
For wood & steel you can select ASD or LRFD design methods. Concrete design
always uses ultimate strength design (LRFD).
Design Values
276
This section is used to specify the type of wood that will be used. Use the
button to access the standard wood reference design values database and select a
material.
These values can be edited right on the screen. HOWEVER there are other pieces of
information, such as size factors for certain sizes of members, that are stored
separately.
Beam Span Data

This tab is used to define span length and section information for the beam:
Calculation Modules
The button shown bubbled in the screen capture below is used to display the
Wood Section Database.
The Wood Section Database contains an extensive number of solid-sawn

members, glulam members, and manufactured members commonly used in the
USA.
The button shown bubbled in the screen capture below is used to display the
Wood Member Design dialog.
277
278
The Wood Member Design dialog allows you to choose the type of member to be
selected and to specify limits on the permissible stress ratio, deflection ratio and
selected member size.
Note: The factor named Maximum Stress Ratio does not act as a multiplier on the
specified deflection ratios.
Span Loads
No differences from other materials.
Loads All Spans
Load Combinations
For wood members you will see entries for load duration factors. When ASD is used, the
Calculation Modules
279
Load Duration Factor is referred to as CD. When LRFD is used, the Load Duration Factor
is referred to as .
Note that CD and
actually appear on the button at the top of the column of values. When
that button is clicked, the program will automatically determine the proper value for CD or
according to the NDS based on the shortest duration load type included in each of the load
combinations.
Results Tabs: This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The
vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available
for review: Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram.
The Calculations tab offers the following results options:
280
Summary Results provides details for shear, moment and deflection for the governing
load combinations.
Max. Combinations provides detailed results for each beam segment for each load
combination. The leftmost column lists the load combinations and the unbraced length
being considered.
These results are a consolidation of the highly detailed incremental results presented
on the M-V-D Summary tab.
M-V-D Summary- Stresses shows highly detailed moment and shear information for
each beam and for each load combination. For multi-span beams using Automatic
Unbalanced Live Load Placement there may be thousands of lines of results.
M-V-D Summary - Deflections shows highly detailed deflection results for all load
combinations.
Calculation Modules
281
Support Reactions shows reactions for each support for each load condition.
The Sketch tab provides a graphic representation of the beam currently being designed:
The Diagram tab offers the ability to view shear, moment, and deflection diagrams for
selected load combinations:
REPORTS
282
Below is a typical Wood Beam printed report:
Calculation Modules
283
284
Calculation Modules
285
10.2.4 Steel Beam

STEEL material type. Click here for a video:
Steel Beam
For general information on the typical data input for all beams see the Beams
247
topic.
This module offers complete design of single and multi-span steel members. Among its
capabilities are:
Single or multi-span beams.
End fixity can be pinned, fixed, free or a combination.
Steel member analysis and design are according to AISC 360-05.
ASD or LRFD design methods can be selected.
A complete steel section database is provided.
Unbraced compression edge lengths can be specified in a variety of ways.
Automatic member selection is provided.
General Data
When steel is used, this tab includes input fields to set the values for yield stress and
elastic modulus, as well as an option to set the Cb factor equal to 1, as shown in the
screen capture below:
If Cb is not forced to 1, the program automatically calculates Cb based on the moment and
direction of curvature at various locations along the beam.
For convenience the module includes a built-in steel database. Click the
button to
the right of the Fy entry and you will see the following table, which offers a number of
commonly used steel grades:
286
Beam Span Data

When steel is selected, the beam size selection is specifically for steel. You can select a
section in 4 ways:
1 - Simply type the AISC name into the Steel Section Name field and press [Tab].
2 - Click the database access button
and select from the built-in AISC section
database.
3 - Click the [Design] button to have the module evaluate steel sections from the database
according to your criteria.
4 - Select a steel section from the Quick-List tab as shown below:
Calculation Modules
287
Span Loads
Loads All Spans
Load Combinations
Results Tab
This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on
the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available for review:
Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram.
load combinations.
combination. The leftmost column lists the load combinations and the unbraced length
being considered.
These results are a consolidation of the highly detailed incremental results on the M-VD Summary tab.
288
M-V-D Summary- Stresses shows highly detailed moment and shear information for
each beam and for each load combination. For multi-span beams using Automatic
Unbalanced Live Load Placement there may be thousands of lines of results.
M-V-D Summary - Deflections shows highly detailed deflection results for all load
combinations.
Calculation Modules
289
290
10.2.5 Concrete Beam

CONCRETE material type. Click here for a video:
Concrete Beam
General Data
The concrete beam module handles single- and multiple-span beams using ONE cross
section shape. That shape can have up to six groups of reinforcing per span, and the
reinforcing can vary on a span-by-span basis.
This module also has a beam on elastic foundation option for single-span beams. In the
screen capture below you can see the two large selection boxes. Selecting Single Span
Beam on Elastic Foundation will remove the ability to select end support conditions, and it
will provide an entry for the Modulus of Subgrade Reaction of the supporting soil.
On the right side of this tab are all the required rebar, concrete strength and elastic
modulus entries, shear stirrup data, strength reduction factors and deflection criteria to
check.
NOTE: It is important to know how this module operates with regard to beam stiffness
along the span, and how this affects multi-span beams. This module divides each span
into a series of segments. The effective moment of inertia for each segment (for each load
combination) is calculated using the actual unfactored moment on that segment. Thus the
module creates a very accurate variable stiffness model of the beam based on actual
moments. For multiple-span beams, this will affect the relative stiffness of each beam
span. Thus the moment distribution across multiple spans will be properly performed. This
will affect factored load moments and shears and service load level deflections and
reactions.
Beam Span Data

This tab has some pieces of input that are constant for all spans and some that can vary
on a span-by-span basis.
Calculation Modules
291
The cross section shape and dimensions are the same for all spans.
When you click on a span (for multi-span beams) in the topmost section of the window,
the span length and rebar layout will update to display the arrangement that is specific to
that span.
On the right side of this tab you can specify up to 6 bar sets (quantity, size, vertical location
and start/stop endpoints). Each bar set is referenced on the sketch with a color shown as
a dot to the left of the set description.
The column highlighted in light blue titled "Dist of bar center....from...." is how you set the
vertical position of the bar sets in the beam. When you look at the top one, you can read it
as "The top bar set is 3 inches from the bottom of the beam". Note that the module will
know whether the bars are in tension or compression and will handle the calculations
properly.
The item labeled Bar Position This Span defines the starting and ending location of the bar
ends with respect to the left end of each respective span. The data in the screen capture
below shows that bar set #1 and #2 run from the left end (0.0 ft) to 25.0 ft from the left end
of Span 1. Using these starting and ending locations you can fine tune the bar layout and
end cutoffs.
Note: The module will report an error message if any beam segments are found to be
completely unreinforced. Therefore, it is imperative that the rebar be defined in such a way
as to prevent completely unreinforced segments. This includes the short segments at the
extreme ends of a beam, where rebar is typically terminated. Remember that this module
is an analysis tool, not a detailing tool, so don't be tempted to define rebar as starting or
ending short of the physical end of the beam. The button labeled "FL" adjacent to each
rebar definition has been provided as a convenient way to indicate to the program that the
selected rebar runs the Full Length of the span.
Span Loads
All Span Loads
292
Load Combinations
Results Tabs
This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on
the left edge of the screen allow you to select the three major areas available for review:
Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram.
load combinations. Shear results are not shown here...they are summarized on a
separate tab that gives the required stirrup layout.
combination.
These results are a consolidation to the highly detailed incremental results on the M-VD Summary tab.
M-V-D Summary - LRFD/Strength Stress Combinations shows highly detailed

moment and shear results for each beam and for each load combination. For multispan beams using Automatic Unbalanced Live Load Placement there may be
thousands of lines of results.
Calculation Modules
293
M-V-D Summary - Service Load Deflections shows highly detailed deflection

results for all load combinations. When each load combination is expanded by clicking
the [+] icon, you will see the deflections along the entire beam. You will also see the
effective moment of inertia used in that region. (Remember that the effective moment
of inertia is calculated based on service-level moments at many locations along the
length of each span.)
M-V-D Summary - Cross Section Values shows the moment capacities and
moment of inertia for all of the identified cross sections. The module has examined all
of the spans you defined and looked for identical reinforcing layouts. It has eliminated
the duplicates, and for simplicity, it only lists the unique reinforced cross sections
here.
M-V-D Summary - Design Shear shows the shear stirrup requirements along the
span(s) as required by the governing load combinations that generate the highest
shear at each section.
The column labeled Comment indicates the ACI code condition that governs the
294
requirement for shear reinforcing at each design location.
Calculation Modules
295
296
10.2.6 Beam on Elastic Foundation

The Beam on Elastic Foundation module is a single-span version of the Concrete Beam
module that provides special support conditions to represent an idealized, continuous
elastic support.
The significant variation between the Beam on Elastic Foundation module and the
Concrete Beam module is the fact that the Beam on Elastic Foundation module collects a
Soil Subgrade Modulus for use in modeling the spring support.
Refer to the Concrete Beam module information in this document for other details.
Calculation Modules
297
10.2.7 Composite Steel Beam

This module provides analysis and design of AISC steel sections acting compositely with a
concrete slab that is continuously connected to the compression flange of the beam with
suitable shear connectors. Click here for a video:
Composite Steel Beam
Features of the module include:

The concrete slab can be either full depth or cast over formed steel decking, with rib
orientation perpendicular or parallel to the beam.
Stud capacity can be calculated by the module using standard AISC procedure.
Normal or lightweight concrete may be used for both strength and deflection
calculations.
Both shored and unshored construction techniques can be analyzed by the module.
ASD or LRFD design methods can be chosen.
Flexible specification of shear studs is available.
Very flexible loading specification, including the ability to specify construction loads
(applied to pre-composite checks only), loads that apply to both the pre-composite
and post-composite checks (always applied), and loads that are only applicable to the
post-composite checks (applied after curing).
Extensive load combination capability.
Can use many sections from the AISC databases.
298
General Data Tab

This tab gathers all input except for the beam section size and loads.
The Analysis Method category offers an option of ASD or LRFD methods.
The Stress Method category offers an option of AISC 360-05 or Prior Method. The "Prior
Method" is being offered for a period of time for the purpose of comparing existing designs
that were created prior to build 6.12.6.25.
The Composite Data category offers all of the necessary input fields to completely specify
the slab, its effective width, stud information and metal deck specification (if applicable).
For Qn you can enter the value directly or click the

calculation dialog:
button to display the stud capacity
Calculation Modules
299
When you click the checkbox for Slab on Metal Deck, the associated input fields appear to
allow the selection of a manufactured deck product, or the manual specification of the
required deck properties.
Click the
button to display the metal deck selection window as shown below, or
simply enter the deck cross section data in the dimension input fields:
300
Partial Composite Action

This category provides three ways to have the module calculate stud requirements.
Full Composite tells the module to use the number of studs necessary to provide full
Vh shear resistance for the slab to beam connection.
Specify % Composite allows the user to enter a percentage of maximum composite
action. The module will then determine the number of studs needed for that Vh' and
complete the bending capacity calculations.
Calc Min Studs tells the module to calculate the minimum number of studs (greater
than 25% composite per code) that will adequately supply the required moment
capacity based on the applied moment.
Beam Span Data Tab

This is basically the same tab used for a normal steel beam except that there is no ability
to specify unbraced compression flange lengths. For regions of positive moment, the top
flange is considered to be continuously braced by its composite connection to the concrete
slab.
Note: Use caution in situations where the applied loading may result in regions of negative
moment, because this module considers the bottom flange to be continuously braced.
Calculation Modules
301
Span Loads Tab

This tab is basically the same as the normal load entry for other beam design modules
except for two differences:
1- There are two checkboxes that allow the user to indicate whether the module should
automatically calculate and apply the beam self weight and slab self weight.
2- There are three "Load Application" options that allow the user to specify the sequencing
of the specified loads as follows:
Non-Composite Only (Construction): Dead Load and/or Live Load that will be
considered in the pre-composite checks, but not in the post-composite checks.
Use this load application type to specify temporary Construction Live Load or
Construction Dead Load that will be removed before the concrete cures. Do NOT use
this load application type to specify permanent loads like the weight of the concrete fill
on the metal deck. That type of load should be specified using the next option.
Pre & Post Composite (Always applied): Dead Load that will be considered in the
pre-composite AND the post-composite checks.
Use this option for loads that will be in place while the section is non-composite and will
REMAIN in place after composite action is achieved. Examples might include the
weight of the concrete fill on the metal deck or the self-weight of the steel beam.
Post Composite Only (Applied after curing): Any type of load that will be
superimposed on the cured composite section. These will only be considered in the
post-composite checks.
Use this option for loads that will be placed on the structure only after composite action
has developed. Some examples might include the weight of architectural floor finishes
or the weight of permanent mechanical equipment.
302
Load Combinations Tab

The function of the Load Combinations tab in the Composite Steel Beam module is the
same as in other beam modules.
Results Tabs: This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The
vertical tabs on the left edge of the screen allow the user to select the three major areas
available for review: Calculations, Sketch, and Diagram.
Summary Results tab presents the maximum/governing ratio values from all of the results
presented on the Max. Combinations tab. The module looks for the maximum bending
stress ratio and presents the components that are calculated to create that ratio.
For the bending stress item the module reports the Construction bending ratio which
considers all loads specified to be applied to the beam before curing. The resulting
moment is compared to the capacity of the steel section acting alone (non-compositely).
For the item reported as Governing Values, the module considers all loads specified to be
applied to the composite section. That moment is then compared to the full composite
section moment capacity for the percentage of shear connection specified.
The results indicate the load combination that creates the governing values along with the
span id and location at which the governing ratio was found to occur.
The module calculates the maximum total deflection as the sum of the deflection of the
non-composite steel section resisting all of the loads that are specified as Pre & Post
Composite (Always applied) plus the deflection of the composite section resisting all of the
loads that are specified as Post Composite Only (Applied after curing).
Note! The screen shown below which gives information for Construction loads is only for
unshored beams. For shored beams the Construction portion of moments is not
applicable, so it is not shown.
Calculation Modules
303
Max Combinations tab presents in more concise detail the bending and shear values for
all load combinations. The display varies depending upon which Stress Method is selected.
Here is a view of the summary of unshored result values when "AISC 360-05" is selected
in the Stress Method category:
Ma Applied is the moment demand on the section due to the referenced load combination.
Mn/Omega is the moment capacity of the section at the stage of loading indicated by the
referenced load combination (either pre-composite or post-composite condition).
(When LRFD is used, the allowable nomenclature will change to the Mn value times Phi.)
Here is a view of the summary of shored result values when "AISC 360-05" is selected in
the Stress Method category:
Studs tab presents the shear connector requirements for all span sections. When point
304
loads are present, this chart may list more detailed spacing requirements because of the
shear change between applied point loads.
M-V-D Summary presents moment, shear, and deflection results. Four screen captures of
this tab are shown below. Depending upon the Analysis Method selection (ASD or LRFD)
and the shoring selection (shored or unshored), these lists will present different values and
headings.
Note: There will also be subtle differences in these displays depending on which option the
user has selected for the Stress Method ("AISC 360-05" or "Prior Method"). Since the
"Prior Method" is being offered as a transition aid for a limited time, the screen captures
below are all based on the AISC 360-05 Stress Method:
ASD/Service Stress Combinations - SHORED:
ASD/Service Stress Combinations - UNSHORED:
Calculation Modules
305
LRFD/Strength Stress Combinations - SHORED:
LRFD/Strength Stress Combinations - UNSHORED:
Deflections tab has two versions, one for shored and one for unshored construction. The
only differences are the load combinations and the explanations of load applications listed.
Service Deflections - SHORED:
306
Service Deflections - UNSHORED:
In the Unshored Service Deflections table, the columns warrant some detailed
explanation:
The column labeled "Pre-Composite"shows the deflection of the bare steel beam
subjected to all loads that are specified to act on the bare steel beam. This would include
all loads defined using the "Non-Composite (Construction)" option and all loads defined
using the "Pre & Post Composite (Always Applied)" option on the Span Loads tab.
The column labeled "Construction Loads Removed" shows the deflection of the bare steel
beam due all loads defined using the "Non-Composite (Construction)" option on the Span
Loads tab. Since these loads are removed before the beam reaches its service condition,
these construction load deflections are removed from the total deflection, so that the Total
deflection represents a correct net total deflection in the service condition.
The column labeled "Added Post Composite" shows the deflection of the composite
section due to the loads that are superimposed on the section after it has achieved
composite action. This would include all loads defined using the "Post Composite Only
(Applied after curing)" option on the Span Loads tab.
The column labeled "Total" is calculated by adding the value in the "Pre-Composite"
column to the value in the "Added Post Composite" column and then netting out the value
in the "Construction Loads Removed" column. This way, the "Total" deflection represents
the full anticipated in-service deflection considering all permanent loads and properly
Calculation Modules
307
accounting for their sequence of application.
Reactions tab has two versions, one for shored and one for unshored construction. The
only differences are the load combinations and the explanations of load applications listed.
Properties tab shows the calculations for transformed section properties calculated in
increments of 1% shear connection, from 100% down to the code minimum 25%. "I Lower
Bound" and "I Constant Stiffness" are terms described in AISC 360-05.
The Sketch tab provides two ways to view a graphic representation of the beam currently
being designed:
Span & Loads tab:
308
Cross Section tab:
Calculation Modules
309
10.2.8 Wood Ledger

The wood ledger module provides the ability to calculate moments and shears in the
ledger, as well as actual and allowable bearing loads on the attaching bolts.
The module allows the ledger to be attached to concrete or another wood member, and it
automatically calculates the proper allowable bolt values.
All calculations are according to 2005 NDS and either 2006 IBC or 2009 IBC. Allowable bolt
capacity at an angle to the grain is calculated using Hankinson's formula.
General Tab
This tab collects information on the ledger size and stress grade, and bolt information. If
the ledger in
Ledger Data: Enter the actual dimensions (not nominal) and the wood species of the
ledger. The specific gravity will be retrieved from the internal databases (you can also
revise the specific gravity).
Wood Stress Grade: Use the [Browse] button to access the built-in NDS reference
design values database and retrieve the Fb and Fv values. You can also edit these values
separately.
310
Bolting Data: Enter the bolt diameter and spacing. The yield strength of the bolt is fixed at
45 ksi in this module to remain consistent with the assumptions in the NDS.
ASD or LRFD: Select the design method to be used. Load factoring and allowable stress
calculations will applied accordingly. Values of KF and phi are automatically determined
and applied for the LRFD method.
When "Attached to Concrete" is set to [No]

When the user specifies that the ledger is not attached to concrete, this implies that
the ledger is attached to a supporting wood member. The display will
change to allow the width and species of the supporting member to be entered.
The following sketch clarifies the width dimension required for a wood supporting
member:
Calculation Modules
311
Loads Tab
This tab allows you to apply vertical and horizontal loads to the ledger. All loads are
assumed to act in the plane of the wall. Vertical loads might come from gravity loading on
supported members. Horizontal loading might come from diaphragm action, such as the
floor system dragging lateral wind or seismic load into the ledger. When both vertical and
horizontal loads are applied, the resulting load will be at an angle to the bolt that is
somewhere between 0 degrees (for purely horizontal loading) and 90 degrees (for purely
vertical loading).
One set of uniform load values can be specified, and it will be considered to act
consistently along all areas of the ledger. For calculations purposes, this module considers
the ledger a continuous beam over multiple supports.
One set of repeating point loads can be specified, where the input collects the magnitude,
the starting location, and the spacing between subsequent loads. The module will consider
all locations of the point loads over enough ledger spans between bolts to determine the
governing case. For example, say your ledger bolting is set to 36" and the point load is set
to 15". There will be multiple point loads between bolts, and on the NEXT span, the point
loads will be in different relative positions with respect to the bolts. The module analyzes all
conditions of that bolt pattern over enough ledger spans to determine the governing point
load offset.
One set of horizontal (lateral) shear loads is allowed, in order to simulate wind or seismic
load applied to the ledger and acting in the plane of the supporting wall.
312

This is the typical load combination tab with entries for load duration factors CD (ASD) and
(LRFD).
Selecting the [Auto Reverse Wind Factors] and/or [Auto Reverse Seismic Factors]
buttons creates additional load combinations that insert "-W" and "-E" whenever W and E
are used.
Results Tabs
This set of tabs provides detailed results for the current calculation. The vertical tabs on the
left edge of the screen allow you to select the two major areas available for review:
Calculation Modules
313
Calculations and Sketch.

Results tab presents a summary of the design for the current member by reporting the
following:
Maximum Ledger Bending shows the load combination, applied moment and actual and
allowable bending stresses. Note that no slenderness is considered for the flexural design
of the ledger.
Maximum Ledger Shear shows the load combination, applied shear and actual and
allowable shear stresses for vertical loads only. These stresses are taken at the point of
bolt support of the ledger and no subtraction of uniform loads within a distance "ledger
depth" from that support is considered.
Maximum Bolt Bearing Summary Shows the vertical and horizontal components of
force acting on the bolt for the governing condition. "Allow Diagonal Bolt Force" is the result
of allowable parallel to grain and perpendicular to grain bolt capacities used for the "Angle
of Resultant" in a Hankinson formula calculation.
Dowel Bearing Strengths give the allowable stress and resulting allowable bolt bearing
stress considering NDS procedures and strengths and bolt size the user has entered.
M & V Details tab summarizes the design values according to load combination for
moment, shear and bolt forces.
314
Allowable Bolt Capacity tab provides the details of the bolt capacities according to the
chosen NDS calculation method.
The Sketch tab provides a graphic representation of the ledger currently being designed:
Calculation Modules
315
10.2.9 Masonry Beam

This module provides design analysis for concrete masonry beams and lintels subject to
vertical and lateral loads. Beams can have fixed or pinned ends for most typical conditions,
and the user can specify rebar sets within the depth of the beam.
Vertical loads can be dead and live uniform and concentrated loads. You can have up to
four loads of each type, and the uniform loads can be full or partial length.
The module provides analysis for both seismic and wind loads for each recalculation. You
can specify seismic factors that apply to the beam's weight and a wind load.
To allow the module to model different concrete block types, you can specify either
lightweight or medium weight block, and additionally enter a self-weight multiplication factor.
For both the vertical and lateral bending and shear directions, the module calculates
allowable bending moments and shear stresses. Also, for both directions, actual moments
and shears due to all entered loads are calculated. Final results consist of combined stress
ratio calculations for all combinations or dead, live, seismic, and wind vertical and lateral
moments and shears.
Unique Features
This module calculates all vertical and lateral moments and shears and combines
316
them for all possible stress ratios. This provides a thorough evaluation of combined
stresses for seismic and wind design.
The module also provides the ability to modify the material weight, automatically
reverse seismic and/or wind loadings, and model both fix-fix and pin-pin end fixity
conditions.
Assumptions & Limitations
When the beam's fixity is set to Fixed, both vertical and lateral bending are considered
fixed.
General Tab
This tab provides data entry for the lintel dimensions, material properties and lateral loads.
Clear Span and Lintel Depth are used to calculate the beam bending and shears.
Thickness is the nominal masonry thickness. The true thickness is determined from
internal tables.
End Fixity controls whether the analysis will consider the lintel to be pinned or fixed.
Calculate & Include Vertical Lintel Weight tells the module to calculate the lintel
self-weight and add it as a uniform vertical load across the full span.
Material Data defines the allowable stresses for masonry and reinforcing steel.
Wall Weight Multiplier allows the user to factor the lintel self-weight that is pulled
from internal tables.
Block Type selects the density of the CMU used for self-weight.
Lateral Loads allows you to specify wind and seismic loads that are applied
horizontally, perpendicular to the span of the lintel. Seismic Weight factor is a
multiplier applied to the lintel self-weight to create a laterally applied uniform load.
Calculation Modules
317
Reinforcing Tab
This tab allows you to specify the longitudinal reinforcing in the lintel.
Rebar Size
Enter the rebar size used for all longitudinal bar sets to be used in the lintel.
Bars Each Face
Selected implies that the lintel is reinforced with two layers of reinforcing separated by
the value specified in the "Bar Spacing" input.
Deselected implies that the lintel is reinforced with one layer of reinforcing located at
the middle of the width of the lintel.
The lintel below DOES have bars each face:
does NOT have bars each face:
The lintel below
# Bars Each Location

Enter the number of individual rebars to consider at each reinforced location.
The lintel below has one bar at each reinforced location:
bars at each reinforced location:
The lintel below has three
318
Rebar Distance from Top & Bottom of Lintel to Centerline of rebar group
Distance from the top and bottom of the lintel to the center of area of the respective
bar set. These distances will be used as "d" for vertical bending strength calculations.
# Bar Sets
Enter the number of bar sets in the lintel. A value of one indicates that the lintel has
bottom reinforcing only.
The lintel below has one bar set:
below has three bar sets:
The lintel below has two bar sets:
The lintel
Calculation Modules
319
Bar Spacing
This is the clear distance between the bars on each face in a bar set. It is assumed
that the bar set is centered within the width of the lintel. The value of "d" used for
lateral bending strength calculations is calculated as: Spacing Between Bars + (Actual
Thickness - Spacing Between Bars) / 2
Shear Reinforcement
When you click [Yes] you can specify the vertical shear reinforcement used in the
lintel. The results will then reflect the allowable & actual shear stress ratios.
Vertical Load Tab
This tab allows you to specify point loads and distributed loads applied to the lintel.

This is the typical load combination tab used throughout the SEL. "LDF" is a Load
Duration Factor that will be applied to allowable stresses and is only available for the
ASD design method.
320
Output & Graphics Tabs

Results Tab
This tab summarizes the calculated moments, shears and combined stress ratios for the
lintel.
Ratios for bending and shear are provided for both vertical and lateral load applications.
There are no calculations for combined vertical & lateral stresses.
M & V Results Tab

This tab provides full details for all actual and allowable stresses for all load combinations.
Calculation Modules
321
Design Values Tab

This tab summarizes allowable stress calculations. When ASD is used, the tab looks like
this:
And when LRFD is used, the tab looks like this:
Sketch Tab
322
10.2.10 Steel Beam with Torsional Loads

The Steel Beam with Torsional Loads module offers the ability to analyze and design a
single-span steel beam for applied loads that create shear, bending, and torsion. It can be a
useful tool for situations where beams have concentrated or distributed loads that are
applied eccentrically, or where beams are subjected to torsional moments.
General Data tab:
The General Data tab allows you to set the span length, and support conditions in much the
Beams
same way that this information is provided in the other beam modules. Refer to the
topic for additional explanation, but remember that this particular module is limited to singlespan conditions. In addition to these pieces of data, the General Data tab also provides input
fields for the compression edge lateral bracing condition, the design method, material
properties, and an option to force the Cb value to 1.0, as shown below:
Beam Span Data tab:

The Beam Span Data tab is used to specify the span length, the allowable deflection ratios,
and to select the steel section under consideration.
Calculation Modules
323
Span Loads tab:

The Span Loads tab allows you to specify loads on one span at a time. The behavior of the
tools on this tab is very similar to the tools described for use in the other beam modules,
except that it introduces the ability to specify load eccentricities and the ability to indicate
that concentrated moments should be considered as torsional moments. Refer to the
Beams
Load Combinations tab:

The Load Combinations tab provides a view of the load combinations that will be analyzed.
It also offers the ability to:
Select a different set of load combinations,
Modify the values used as load factors, and
Turn certain combinations on and off.
324
Refer to the
Beams
The Steel Beam with Torsional Loads module offers output options that are analogous to
the output options provided by the other beam modules, with the exception that the results
include torsional design considerations.
The lower half of the screen is dedicated to the display of results. The vertical strip of tabs
on the left side of the display allow you to choose between Calculations, Sketch, and
Diagram as explained below:
Calculations:
The Calculations tab offers four sub-tabs:
Summary Results: Displays extreme flange normal stress, extreme flange and web shear
stress, extreme deflections, extreme rotations, and extreme reactions.
Maximum Combinations: Displays maximum stress ratio, extreme moments and shears,
flange normal stresses due to bending and due to torsion, flange shear stress due to
torsion, web shear stress due to bending and due to torsion, for all load combinations.
M-V-D: Summary: Displays moment, shear, unbraced length, flange normal stress, flange
shear stress, web shear stress, and deflections at small increments along all spans.
Moment, shear, and stresses are displayed for all load combinations. Deflection is
displayed for service load combinations only.
Calculation Modules
325
Support Reactions: Displays support reactions for all supports, for all load combinations.
Sketch:
Displays a sketch of the beam, indicating span lengths, support conditions, and applied
loads.
Diagram:
Displays a graphic depiction of the beam with superimposed graphs of Moment, Shear,
Deflection or Rotation for a selected load combination, or for an envelope of all load
combinations.
326
Calculation Modules
10.3
327
Columns
The Structural Engineering Library has a single basic column design module that
supports Wood, Steel, Concrete and Masonry material types.
There are some portions of the graphical user interface that remain consistent for all
materials, and this topic will focus on those items. For detailed information about each of
the material-specific calculation modules, please review the respective topics below.
Note: The Column modules are not intended for the design of tension members. Column
modules should not be applied in situations where the member experiences net tension.
General Information
The screen capture below shows the portions of the General tab that remain constant for
all four material types.
You can easily select a different column material by clicking one of the four material
buttons. When you do, the program will load the user interface that is specific to the
chosen material.
Overall Column Height is the total height of the column and does not have anything to do
with slenderness lengths. This length is used for three things:
to describe the overall height of the column for the purpose of calculating self weight
(if specified),
to locate the topmost point of load application, and
to perform the bending analysis when lateral loads are applied.
Rotational End Fixities let you specify how the ends of the columns are or are not
attached to boundary conditions. Each condition explicitly describes the translational and
rotational boundary conditions at both the top and bottom of the column.
Vertical Loads
Vertical loads can be applied to any location along the height of the column. You use this
328
tab to build a table of applied loads with the [Add], [Copy] and [Delete] buttons.
Include Self Weight option tells the module to automatically calculate the weight of
the column and add it as an additional dead load (which will be factored per "D" load
combination factor and applied at the top of the column).
Description lets you describe each load you are applying.
Load Eccentricity has "X" and "Y" eccentricity locations so the loads can create Y-Y
and X-X axis moments respectively.
Location from Base is where you specify the vertical location of the axial load with
respect to the bottom of the column.
Lateral Loads
On this tab you can specify loads that will be applied along the X or Y axes of the column
(non-axial loads).
Applied Load Type & Values has a drop-down list box where you can choose Full
Uniform, Partial Uniform, Point Load and Moment load types.
Description lets you describe each load you are applying.
Moment Axis is where you specify about which column axis the load creates its
applied moment.
Location from Base is where you specify the vertical location of the lateral load with
respect to the bottom of the column.
Calculation Modules
329
Load Combination Tab

This tab allows you to specify the load combinations to use for the analysis. The tabs
change appearance slightly between ASD and LRFD selections. There are also optional
load duration factor entries for wood and masonry design.
Please see the screen captures below for variations based on the selected material.
Steel ASD
Steel LRFD
330
Concrete LRFD
Wood ASD
Wood LRFD
Masonry ASD
Calculation Modules
Masonry LRFD
331
332
10.3.1 Column Slenderness

The Slenderness tab allows you to specify the column bracing, which will be considered in
axial capacity calculations. Click here for a video:
Column Slenderness
It is important to understand that the settings on the Slenderness tab serve double-duty.
When the column has applied bending forces, these slenderness settings also define the
unbraced compression edge lengths, and therefore they affect the calculation of allowable
bending stresses.
In most of the column modules there are two tabs: "X-X" and "Y-Y Axis Column
Slenderness". Let's start with the all-important definition of the axis reference for
slenderness.
Buckling failure of a column can be thought of as an uncontrolled and excessive deflection
in the direction of a particular axis. When defining slenderness, one of the important
values is the distance between points that brace the column against movement (or failure)
along a particular axis.
The column modules ask you to specify the distance between points of bracing that
prevent buckling along the column's local X-X or Y-Y axis.
The X-X axis is always parallel to the "width" dimension of the column. The Y-Y axis is
always parallel to the "depth" dimension of the column.
For example, the "X-X" axis of a steel W14 section is parallel to the flanges. The "X-X Axis
Column Slenderness" defines the distance between points that prevent the column from
buckling along its "X-X" axis.
In the Structural Engineering Library, slenderness is entered as the distance
between points bracing a member against buckling in the direction of the specified
axis.
In the screen capture immediately below, we have selected [Fully braced "X" Axis]. This
means that the column is fully braced against buckling along its X-X axis, which is parallel
to the width dimension. If this was a steel "W" section, then the column is fully braced
against buckling parallel to the flanges.
All materials, column fully braced
This selection sets the column as fully braced, and no slenderness effects will be
evaluated.
Calculation Modules
333
All materials, typical simple slenderness specification

This selection allows you to enter the unbraced height to use for the column
slenderness calculation. Also available are selections for the typical slenderness
multipliers ("K" factors) for various end conditions.
Note! End fixity is specified on a different tab in the column modules. These
slenderness factors do not alter the end fixity you specified for the column, nor do they
get determined automatically by the end fixities that you specified.
All materials, typical slenderness with user-defined slenderness factor "K"

This selection allows you to enter the unbraced height and the slenderness "K" factor
to use for the column slenderness calculation.
Note! End fixity is specified on a different tab in the column modules. These
slenderness factors do not alter the end fixity you specified for the column, nor do they
get determined automatically by the end fixities that you specified.
334
Concrete & Steel Only

For concrete and steel you will see an option to Compute K using adjacent members.
This advanced selection lets you select the framing condition above and below the
column, and using the entered lengths and EI values, it will use standard equations for
Non-Sway columns to calculate the effective "K" factor.
Keep in mind that this option is used to define the relative stiffnesses of the framing in
the plane of buckling that is being considered. For example, when using the X-X Axis
Column Slenderness tab, the plane under consideration is the plane in which the
column's X-X axis lies.
Wood & Steel Only.....

For wood and steel columns only, there is an option to [Enter Bracing Location],
which allows you to divide the column up into several segments with different
unbraced lengths.
Calculation Modules
335
336
10.3.2 Wood Column

This module designs wood columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending
loads about both axes. Click here for a video:
Wood Column
The user can select ASD or LRFD design methods and has access to a large built-in
database of wood sizes and NDS species stress grades. Values of KF and phi are
automatically determined and applied for the LRFD method.
All calculations are according to the 2005 NDS code.
The screen capture below shows the full screen for wood column design. See items below
for descriptions of items that are specific to the Wood Column module.
For general description of the module, end fixity, loads, and load combinations click here
327 . For slenderness description click here 332 .
Calculation Modules
337
General Tab
The Design Stresses area bubbled in the screen capture below is unique to the wood
column selection. This area enables you to specify the base design values for the wood
species and grade of interest.
You can either enter these values manually, or you can click the
Wood Stress Database.
button to display the
Column Size Tab

All of the information on this tab is unique to a wood column.
The area bubbled in red is where you specify the column cross section. Use the
button to display the built-in database of wood sections (solid-sawn, glulam, and
manufactured sections are available). You can also enter the values manually.
The area bubbled in blue provides allowable stress modification factors that you can
specify. Please note that CF or CV values are automatically filled in. CF values are
determined from the size and stress grade of the member (No. 1 and Utility grades have
different values). CV values are calculated when a glu-lam section is specified.
The area in green provides quick access to the built-in wood section database. Simply
click the button of the section type and the list on the right will be populated automatically
from the appropriate database. Then just click on a section to have its data loaded into the
entries in the red area.
338
Results Tab
This tab provides a summary of the stress ratios, reactions and deflections for the column.
Max Axial + Bending Stress Ratio is the governing load combination for the column.
Listed is the governing load load combination, the NDS formulas that is used and the
location of the maximum stress ratio above the base of the column. Please note maximum
stress ratio is what is being reported because it governs the design.....not necessarily the
highest axial or bending stress.
Max Shear Stress Ratio will probably never govern for a column design but is presented
here with the governing load combination, location and allowable/actual stress values.
Lateral Load Reactions and Deflections are the result of applied lateral loads.
Design Maximum Combinations Tab

This tab lists the resulting maximum stress ratios for each load combination. This list is
created by examining the detailed list (on the next tab) and determing the governing stress
ratios for each load combination.
Calculation Modules
339
Detailed Results Tab - Stress

This tab lists the detailed results at small increments along the height of the column for
each load combination. For consistency, all of the column headings use labels directly
from the NDS code.
Note! This list scrolls to the right to display more information. See the successive screen
captures below:
Scroll a little to the right....
340
And a little more....
And more still....
Calculation Modules
341
And then the final data column.....
Detailed Results Tab - Deflections

This tab reports the deflections at incremental locations along the height of the column, for
each service load condition (i.e. for individual load cases and for a set of built-in service
load combinations), along each axis. It is important to understand that the deflection values
indicated on this tab represent RELATIVE deflections. That is, they represent the distance
from the deflected shape of the column to a straight-line chord drawn between the
deflected locations of the top and bottom nodes of the column. This has significance when
viewing the deflection data for a column that is fixed at the bottom and free to deflect at the
top. If lateral loads are applied to this type of cantilevered column, it is reasonable to expect
that the free top will deflect laterally. However, when viewing the results on the Service
Load Deflections tab, the deflection at both the bottom AND the top will always be reported
as zero, because this tab is reporting RELATIVE deflections, and by definition, the relative
deflection of either endpoint of a member is zero. Do not interpret the results on the
Service Load Deflections tab as ABSOLUTE deflections.
342
End Reactions Tab

This tab provides the sideways (non-axial) reactions for individual load cases and for a set
of built-in service load combinations, along each axis.
Sketch Tab
Calculation Modules
343
Axial-Shear-Moment Diagrams
This tab provides comprehensive charting capability to view graphs of Axial load, Shear,
Moment, and Deflection along the length of the member. Note that the graphs are oriented
such that the right end of the graph represents the column base, and the left end of the
graph represents the column top. This was done to maximize the scale of the graph based
on the screen area available.
Pn-Pnx-Mny Diagrams
This tab allows you to see the moment capacities about each axis given a certain
allowable axial load.
This is mostly for reference and can be considered a reverse application of the load
capacity calculations.
In the screen capture below we have selected a 30 degree angle. For a 1.1 kip axial load
you can see the moment capacity values, Mnx and Mny.
344
Calculation Modules
345
10.3.3 Steel Column

This module designs steel columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending
Steel Column
The user can select ASD or LRFD methods and has access to a complete database of
steel section sizes.
All calculations are according to AISC 360-05.
The screen capture below shows the full screen for steel column design. See items below
for descriptions of items that are specific to the steel column design module.
346
General Tab
The area shown bubbled in the screen capture below is specific to the steel column
selection. Here you can specify ASD or LRFD design procedure and specify the yield
strength and elastic modulus of the steel member to be used.
Click the
button to display the Steel Fy Selections dialog to select a standard grade.
Column Size Tab

All items on this tab are specific to a steel column.
The item circled in red is where you can type in the typical section name, press [Tab], and
the section will be searched and retrieved from our built-in database. Or you can click the
button, and you can select a section from the built-in AISC database.
The items circled in blue are the section properties for the section you have chosen.
The item circled in green is the Quick-List". Click on one of the many buttons with a
section letter and the full list of those sections will be displayed to the right. Simply click on
a section and it will be assigned to the red and blue areas.
Calculation Modules
347
The button circled in pink will display the Steel Member Design dialog (see below).
This tool checks all of the steel sections for the selected type (W is selected in this case).
A section will be judged to pass if the maximum stress ratio entered is not exceeded
and the depth measurements and depth class are not exceeded.
We use the term "Depth Class" to refer to the nominal dimension of the family to which the
section belongs (ex: W14). It does refer to the actual depth of the section. All sections
starting with "W14" are of the "14" depth class.
Results Tab
This tab provides a summary of the stress ratios, reactions and deflections for the column.
348
Max Axial + Bending Stress Ratio is the governing load combination for the column.
Listed is the governing load load combination, the AISC formulas that are used, and the
location of the maximum stress ratio above the base of the column. Please note that the
maximum stress ratio is being reported (along with its location) because it governs the
overall design, even though it may not necessarily be the highest axial stress or the highest
bending stress experienced anywhere in the column.
Max Shear Stress Ratio will probably never govern for a normally loaded column design.
But it is presented here with the governing load combination, location and allowable/actual
stress values.
Lateral Load Reactions and Deflections are the result of applied lateral loads.
Design Maximum Combinations Tab

This tab lists the resulting maximum stress ratios for each load combination. This list is
created by examining the detailed list (on the next tab) and determining the governing
stress ratios for each load combination.
Detailed A-M-V-D Results Tab - Stresses

This tab lists the detailed results at small increments along the height of the column, for
each load combination.
Calculation Modules
349
For consistency, all of the column headings are taken directly from AISC.
Note! This list scrolls to the right to display more information.
Detailed A-M-V-D Results Tab - Service Load Deflections

This tab reports the deflections at incremental locations along the height of the column, for
each service load condition (i.e. for individual load cases and for a set of built-in service
load combinations), along each axis.
Reactions Tab
This tab provides the sideways (non-axial) reactions for individual load cases and for a set
of built-in service load combinations, along each axis.
350
Sketch Tab
Axial-Shear-Moment Diagrams
This tab provides comprehensive charting capability to view graphs of Axial load, Shear,
Moment, and Deflection along the length of the member. Note that the graphs are oriented
such that the right end of the graph represents the column base, and the left end of the
graph represents the column top. This was done to maximize the scale of the graph based
on the screen area available.
Calculation Modules
351
10.3.4 Concrete Column

This module designs concrete columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending
Concrete Column
The module only uses strength design for concrete.

All calculations are according to the ACI 318-05, -08, or -11 code, depending upon whether
IBC 2006, 2009, or 2012 has been selected as the governing building code.
The screen capture below shows the full screen for concrete column design. See items
below for descriptions of items that are specific to the concrete column design module.
352
General Tab
The area circled in red in the screen capture below is specific to the concrete column
selection.
The two buttons

and
immediately set
the value for elastic modulus "E" to the values as described on the button.
Concrete Shape
This tab is specific to the concrete column selection. It allows you to select from 12
different column shapes. Simply click the button surrounding the column shape icon and
the screen below will change to allow specific data input for measurements and reinforcing
layout.
Following the screen capture below we will show ALL the data input areas for ALL the
column shapes with descriptions as needed.
Note that this module does a very detailed biaxial analysis of the column cross section
using exact numerical methods.
Circular Column
Calculation Modules
Square Column
353
354
Rectangular Column
Calculation Modules
Trapezoidal Column
355
356
"L" Shaped Column
Calculation Modules
"Z" Shaped Column
357
358
Six Sided Column
Calculation Modules
"T" Shaped Column
"I" Shaped Column
359
360
Cross Shaped Column
Calculation Modules
Octagon Column
361
362
Rectangular Tube Column
Results Tab
Calculation Modules
363
Design Results Tab - Load Combination Summary
Design Results Tab - Load Combination Detailed Results
Note: The value of Euler Buckling load (Pc) is calculated using the following formula from
ACI 318-11 Section R10.10.6.2: EI = 0.25Ec Ig.
A-M-V-D Results - Strength Design Results
364
A-M-V-D Results - Service Load Deflections
P-Mx-My Capacities
Section Properties
Reactions
Calculation Modules
Sketch
P-M Diagrams
A-V-M-D Diagrams
365
366
Theoretical Basis
Click here to view Concrete Column Module Theoretical Basis
Calculation Modules
367
10.3.5 Masonry Column

This module designs masonry columns that are subject to axial loads and lateral bending
loads about one axis. Click here for a video:
Masonry Column
The user can select ASD or LRFD methods.

All calculations are according to the ACI 530-05 or ACI 530-08 code, depending upon
whether IBC 06 or IBC 09 has been selected as the governing building code.
The screen capture below shows the full screen for masonry column design. See items
below for descriptions of items that are specific to the masonry column design module.
368
General Tab
The area circled in red below is specific to the masonry column selection. You have the
choice of using Working Stress or Strength Design methods.
The column capacity is determined by creating a P-M interaction diagram, so that the
effect of compressive force is included in the calculation of allowable moment capacity.
For working stress this will result in significantly higher capacities than the older methods
that calculated an actual stress ratio using (fa/Fa + fb/Fb).
Here is the description when the Strength Design method is selected...
Calculation Modules
369
Masonry Tab
All of the information on this tab is specific to masonry column design.
The input items in the red bubble define the material properties of the column and
reinforcing used.
The input items in the blue bubble let you define the cross section size, reinforcing, and
orientation of the column.
Under Specify Column Dimensions we've made it easy by providing buttons for the
common nominal dimensions of a masonry column. Click the Width and Depth buttons
and you will see the actual dimension appear in the bottom of the area. Note that "Width" is
parallel to the "x-x" axis and "Depth" is parallel to the "y-y" axis.
In the lower right you can specify the bar size and bar count to be used on each face of the
column.
The graphic will change accordingly as your input changes.
Results Tab
370
Design Maximum Combinations

This tab summarizes the maximum stress ratios for each load combination.
A-M-V-D Results: Strength Combinations

This tab presents the very detailed allowable and actual values for each load combination.
A-M-V-D Results: Service Load Deflections

This tab summarizes the lateral deflections of the column at increments along its height.
These values will be nonzero only if lateral loads are applied or the axial load is applied with
an eccentricity.
Calculation Modules
371
P-M Surface Data

This tab lists the full analysis results for the column.
Reactions
This tab reports axial reactions and lateral reactions due to lateral loads or due to axial
loads that have an eccentricity.
Sketch
372
A-V-M Diagrams
Pn-Mnx-Mny Diagrams
Calculation Modules
10.4
General Walls
General Introductory Video:
Click Here for Video
373
374
10.4.1 Concrete Slender Wall

This program provides analysis of concrete wall panels that stand vertically and have
applied vertical and out-of-plane lateral loads. Click here for a video:
Concrete Slender Wall
The wall panel is analyzed using strength design procedures. Out-of-plane moments
within the wall are created by eccentric axial loads, applied lateral loads, lateral self weight
loads and moments induced due to the wall weight acting at an eccentricity when it
deflects (P-Delta moments).
The ACI slender wall procedure, introduced in ACI 318-99, was first adopted by the IBC
2000 and subsequent code editions. As quoted in ACI 318R-05 Commentary, Section 14.8
is based on the corresponding requirements in 1997 UBC and experimental research
presented in the 1982 "Test Report by SCCACI-SEAOSC". Analytical study of the current
IBC/ACI provisions for concrete wall panels showed the ACI procedure does not
correspond to a bilinear load-deflection characteristic observed in the SEAOSC tests and
significantly underestimates the service load deflection.
The ENERCALC Concrete Slender Wall program uses basic principles of structural
mechanics to model the wall as a series of beam segments. For each segment the actual
moment is used to calculate member stiffness using the Ief f ectiv e equations developed by
Peter H. Bischoff. Since these changes to wall stiffness affect the wall deflection profile,
the program performs an iterative analysis of calculating moments (including P-Delta
effects). The results are deflection curves almost exactly matching the SCCACI-SEAOSC
test results. This makes this program far more accurate at calculating wall deflections and
P-Delta effects than the simple equations in the ACI code.
Capabilities
This module provides these capabilities:
One or two story slender tilt-up concrete walls
Optional parapet
Axial loads with optional eccentricities
Wind, seismic and user defined lateral loads creating bending on the wall panel
Variable strip width to model the wall panel
Rebar location at center of wall or two layers of reinforcing at each side
Temperature differential can be specified across thickness of wall to add curvature
Bottom of wall can be fixed or pinned for moment resistance
Top of wall can be pinned or free
A reveal can be defined and cross section properties modified for reduced thickness and
optionally add rebar
The effects of wall openings can be addressed by modeling the solid panel between or
adjacent to openings and then using superposition to apply the loads above and below
openings.
Calculation Modules
375
General Tab
Material Properties
f'c
28-day compressive strength of the concrete.
Fy
Yield point stress of reinforcing
Fr: Rupture Modulus
Multiplier used in the expression to define the modulus of rupture for the concrete. 5.0
376
is the original recommended multiplier that was developed as a result of the SEAOSC
slender wall tests of the early 1980s. 7.5 is the multiplier provided by ACI 318-05, -08,
and -11.
Lambda
Factor to account for lightweight concrete.
Ec
Modulus of elasticity of concrete. You can enter the value or click the
["57"] button to set Ec = 57000 * sqrt(f'c), or click the
["33"] button to set Ec = 33 * sqrt(f'c) * ConcWeight1.5.
Concrete Wt
Weight of concrete in pounds per cubic foot.
Max Pu/Ag = f'c * <entry>
Enter a multiplier less than 1.0 which will be applied to f'c to determine the maximum
allowable factored axial stress.
Thickness & Rebar

Wall Thickness
Total wall thickness
Bar Location
You can select bar placement at the center of the wall thickness or at each face.
When selecting "Bar Each Face" the module performs calculations considering both
bars.
Rebar "d" Distance
Enter the distance between the outside surface of the wall to the centerline of the
rebar. For bars each face this measurement can be from either face.
Wall Weight
The internally calculated wall weight considering the concrete weight and wall
thickness entered.
Rebar [Spacing] / [# in Width]
These two options indicate how you will specify the rebar quantity in your design strip.
[Spacing] will change the entry so that you can enter a spacing in inches for the rebar.
[# in Width] changes the entry so you can enter the number of bars in your design
strip, where the width of the design strip is entered on the Dimensions tab.
Note: When using the "Bars Each Face" option, the "# Bars in Width" specifies the
number of bars on each face within the design strip width.
Calculation Modules
377
Bar Size
Enter the US customary rebar size number.
Analysis Settings
Ieff used for Deflection
The module offers the option to use Ief f ectiv e based on the moment in the individual wall
elements or to use Icracked for the full height of the wall.
Temperature Differential across Thickness
This input is used to describe the temperature change between each face of the wall.
A temperature change induces a slight curvature into the wall because the hotter side
expands, resulting in a slightly higher out-of-plane deflection.
Enter temperature differentials as positive values. The effects of a specified
temperature differential are always additive with the bending and deflection resulting
from other applied loads.
Minimum Vertical Steel: %/100
Minimum steel as a percentage of the gross wall area.
Minimum Allowed (Span/Deflection) Ratio
This setting establishes the minimum allowable ratio of span length to service load
deflection. If a lower actual Span/Deflection ratio occurs (meaning greater deflection),
a warning message will be displayed.
Apply 0.75 Factor used in ACI Eq. 14-5 & 14-6
Please see the code reference for an explanation of this factor. It is typically not used
in this module because it is a calibration factor used to curve fit deflection calculations
with ACI approximate formulas.
Number of wall elements for FE solver to use
This module divides the wall design strip into segments from the base to the top for
analysis purposes. Use this entry to define the number of segments to use.
Experience demonstrates that approximately 30 segments gives a good balance
between the iterative P-Delta analysis reaching convergence and excessive
calculation time.
Dimensions Tab
378
Fixity Conditions
Controls how the top and bottom of the wall are restrained for moments and lateral
movement.
[Top & Bottom Pinned]
Base of wall is restrained against movement out of plane and vertically, rotates freely.
Top of wall restrained against out of plane movement and can move vertically and
rotate freely.
[Top Pinned, Bottom Fixed]
Base of wall is restrained against movement about all three axes. Any lateral loading
will create a moment at the bottom of the wall, which is not designed in this module.
rotate freely.
[Top Free, Bottom Fixed]
will create a moment at the bottom of the wall, which is not designed in this module.
Top of wall is completely free making this a cantilevered wall.
Clear Height
Span of the wall between the base and the first lateral support. For one story walls this
is the top support. For 2 story walls this prompt will change to be "1st story height".
Parapet Height
Distance the wall extends (without a topmost lateral support) above the topmost
lateral support (i.e. extension above the clear height for one story wall, extension
above the 2nd story height for 2 story walls).
Initial Lateral Displacement @ Roof Attachment
You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the top support laterally with
respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value affects the PDelta moments because of the additional offset of the wall.
Reveal Data
Calculation Modules
379
A reveal is a portion of the wall that is recessed from the rest of the surface. It is
formed by placing thin blockout material (typically styrofoam) in the forms prior to
concrete placement. It is used to create architectural effects. The reveal reduces the
structural thickness of the wall. This module calculates section properties for this
reduced section in the portion of the wall where the reveal has been formed.
Reveal Depth
Depth of reveal measured from outside face of wall. A 1" reveal in a 6" wall gives a net
structural thickness of 5".
Reveal Start Location, Reveal End Location
Distances measured upwards from bottom of wall that define the start and end points
of the reveal.
Reveal Rebar
This selection defines how the module should consider the reveal area to be
reinforced.
No Change means that the reinforcing stays where it is as defined by the "Rebar 'd'
Distance" entered on the General tab. This option results in an offset rebar location
within the remaining structural thickness, because the reveal takes away part of the
concrete.
Drape Bars tells the module to move the rebar inward to give the same dimension
between the rebar and face of wall. For walls with bars at "Center" this moves the bar
to the center of the remaining structural thickness. When bars are specified on each
face, this option moves only one of the bars inwards.
Add Bars enables you to add additional reinforcing in the area of the reveal. The
location of the main rebar is as described in the "No Change" option above.
Strip Width: Width of wall portion for analysis
This module performs its analysis for this width. Results are for either this width or a
12" width as noted where the results are provided.
Note that applied loads either are applied to the entire strip width (as for concentrated
vertical and lateral loads) or are entered on a per-foot basis when they are uniform
loads.
Two Story...
When a two story wall is selected, this tab changes slightly to provide the 2nd story
height and remove the Fixed-Free support option.
380
1st Story Height

Distance from the bottom of the wall to the first lateral support.
2nd Story Height
Distance from the first lateral support to the top lateral support.
Initial Lateral Displacement @ 2nd Floor Attachment
You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the 2nd story support laterally
with respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value effects the
P-Delta moments because of the additional offset of the wall.
Loads Tab - Vertical Loads

A variety of vertical loads are available. Note the hint in green describing whether the load
is per foot or on the entire strip width.
Enter all loads as service level loads, meaning the load intensity is calculated using all
code provisions EXCEPT load factors used for LRFD or ASD.
Ledger Load
This is a per-foot vertical load applied to the wall at an optional eccentricity. So if you
have a 48" strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4
Calculation Modules
381
kip applied due to the 1 k/ft entry.

Eccentricity
Describes an offset from the mid-thickness of the wall panel, which is the default
location of application of a vertical load. Enter this value as a positive number when
the load is shifted toward the inside of the wall.
Concentric Load
This is a per-foot vertical load applied concentrically to the wall. So if you have a 48"
strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4 kip applied
due to the 1 k/ft entry.
Mid-Height Vertical Uniform Load
This load entry is only shown for 2-story walls. It allows you to specify two uniform
loads applied at the "1st Story" height, one of which can have an eccentricity from the
wall center.
Concentrated Loads
This is a single concentrated vertical load applied to the wall "strip width" with an
optional eccentricity.
Distance from Base is the height at which the load is applied.
Loads Tab - Lateral Loads

Lateral loads are applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall and are almost always
seismic or wind. These loads create out of plane deflection of the wall, which the module
will use to develop P-Delta effects to calculate secondary moments in the wall. Recall that
this module divides the wall into small segments and calculates the allowable and actual
forces and deflections for each small segment. In this way the lateral loads are properly
modeled on what is effectively a beam with variable stiffness due to the state of cracking in
each segment.
382
Full area WIND Load

Enter the wind load that will be applied to the wall in the out-of-plane direction. This
load will only be applied to one surface of the wall, and as such, the magnitude must
take into consideration both the internal and external pressures.
For the purpose of defining the direction of applied wind pressures, consider that
pressure will only be applied to the exterior surface of the wall. A net pressure that
acts TOWARD the exterior surface of the wall should be entered as a positive value. A
net pressure that acts AWAY FROM the exterior surface of the wall should be entered
as a negative value.
Wall Weight SEISMIC Load
This section offers three options to specify the seismic load that will be applied to the
wall in the out-of-plane direction:
Enter Lateral Load: This entry is a simple net load applied to the wall (but will still be
factored by the load combination factors for "E").
Enter Wall Weight Factor: Enter a number that will be multiplied by the self-weight of
the wall. For example, if you enter 0.25 and the wall weighs 80 psf, then a 20.00 psf
out-of-plane load will be calculated and applied to the wall using the load combination
factors for "E".
Enter SDS per ASCE-05: Enter the (SDS * I) value as prescribed by the ASCE code for
the building location. The minimum calculated load value of 10 psf or (0.4 * Value
Entered * Wall Weight) will be applied to the wall using the load combination factors
for "E".
Fp
This is the actual seismic load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall, which
represents the wall's seismic self weight load.
Concentrated Lateral Loads
This is an added lateral load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall. It acts on
the full "Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors corresponding to
the type of load.
Calculation Modules
383
Distributed Lateral Loads

This is an added lateral uniform load applied out-of-plane to the wall. It acts on the full
"Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors corresponding to the type
of load. You also enter the start and end distance of the load extent above the base of
the wall.

Typical load combination information as used throughout the Structural Engineering
Library.
Summary Tab
This tab presents the critical results as calculated by the module.
Maximum Bending Stress Ratio

The module looks at the detailed results for ALL strength design load combinations at
all "segments" in the wall and pulls out the maximum factored load bending stress
ratio to present here as the governing condition.
384
Minimum Deflection Ratio

The module looks at the detailed results for ALL service load combinations at all
"segments" in the wall and pulls out the minimum service load deflection ratio
(meaning maximum deflection) to present here as the governing condition.
Moment Capacity Check
For the condition of maximum bending stress ratio, the actual applied and allowable
bending moments are given along with the governing load combination.
Service Deflection Check
For the condition of minimum deflection ratio (meaning maximum deflection) the ratio,
deflection, allowable minimum ratio, allowable deflection (based on allowable ratio)
and governing load combination are reported.
Axial Load Check
The module checks the actual axial stress in all segments for all load combinations
and gives the maximum actual stress Pu/Ag. The allowable value is the result of the
user's entry for maximum percentage of f'c to use.
Reinforcing Limit Check
The module checks all portions of the wall for reinforcing (including differently
reinforced first and second stories and reveal areas). It reports the maximum
reinforcing ratio and compares it with the maximum percentage of balanced section
analysis As allowed.
Minimum Moment Check
ACI specifies that a wall section in bending shall have a minimum strength Mn that is
greater than the cracking strength Mcr = Sgross * Fr.
Maximum Reactions
This gives a summary of the maximum reactions (both out-of-plane and vertical) along
with the load combination that creates them.
Maximum Combinations Tab

This tab provides a summary of the governing values for each load combination for both
factored load axial & bending and service load deflections.
Factored Load Maximum Moments for Load Combinations: The module looks
through the result set for each load combination and identifies the location above the
base of the wall at which the maximum condition is found. Note that "Aseff" is the
effective area of steel and is influenced by the axial compression in that segment.
Service Load Maximum Deflections for Load Combinations: The module looks
base of the wall at which the maximum out-of-plane deflection is found. The value for
"Ieff" is specific to the segment at that location and is based on the actual moment and
Bischoff's equation for calculating effective moment of inertia.
Calculation Modules
385
Strength Design Results Tab

This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the factored axial load, moments,
effective steel area and moment of inertia at each wall analysis segment for each load
combination.
Service Load Deflections Tab

This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the service axial load, moments,
effective moment of inertia and calculated deflection at each wall analysis segment for
Reactions Tab
386
This tab gives a summary of out-of-plane and vertical base reactions for each service load
combination.
Notes Tab
Included are some excerpts from ACI regarding slender concrete wall design.
Sketch Tab
Diagram Tab
Calculation Modules
387
388
10.4.2 Masonry Slender Wall

This module provides design and analysis according to the new provisions for design of
masonry walls, using the P-Delta deflection considerations now included in the IBC. Click
here for a video:
Masonry Slender Wall
This method lifts the restriction on H/t ratios, and performs wall analysis using the
principles of ultimate strength design. The design method is very similar to that of the
Concrete Slender Wall module.
This module uses a variable width strip of wall section to represent a typical section of
wall. The module has the ability to apply a lateral wind load, seismic load, partial length
uniform lateral load, and a lateral point load to the clear span of the wall section. This
variety of loadings should take care of almost every lateral loading case possible.
The user may specify masonry and reinforcing strengths, seismic factor, wind load,
vertical and lateral loads, vertical load eccentricities, and wall construction. The module
determines the wall capacity, actual deflections considering P-Delta effects, and solves for
the final moments obtained through iteration of the P-Delta effects. Deflection analysis is
provided for both service and factored load cases.
The user reaches a final design by modifying wall thickness, rebar size, and rebar spacing
until no overstress condition exists and the deflection limits prescribed in the code are
satisfied.
This module uses basic principles of structural mechanics to model the wall as a series of
beam segments. For each segment the actual moment is used to calculate member
stiffness using the Ief f ectiv e equations developed by Peter H. Bischoff. Since these changes
to wall stiffness affect the wall deflection profile, the program performs an iterative analysis
of calculating moments (including P-Delta effects). The results are deflection curves
almost exactly matching the SCCACI-SEAOSC test results. This makes this module far
more accurate at calculating wall deflections and P-Delta effects than the simple equations
in the ACI code.
Capabilities
This module provides these capabilities:
One or two story slender masonry walls
Optional parapet
Axial loads with optional eccentricities
Wind, seismic and user defined lateral loads creating bending on the wall panel
Variable strip width to model the wall panel
Temperature differential can be specified across thickness of wall to add curvature
Calculation Modules
General Tab
Material Properties
f'm
Enter the allowable masonry strength to be used in the analysis. The allowable
bending and axial stresses calculated from f'm are outlined in a later section.
fy
Yield point stress of reinforcing.
fr - Rupture & Fr-Table
389
390
Modulus of rupture for the masonry wall system.

Em = f'm * [value]
The modulus of elasticity of the masonry wall system is specified by this value acting
as a multiplier to f'm.
Max % of Rho Balanced
This value sets the maximum percentage of reinforcing the module will allow without
giving a warning message. Enter this as a value less than 1.0 which will be applied to
the reinforcing area calculated for a balanced section to determine the maximum
allowable reinforcing ratio.
Grout Density
Choose from two different options for the density of the grout.
Block Weight
Select light, medium and normal weight block. The weight of a completed wall is
determined from the masonry database, depending on the block weight, grout density,
and grouted cell spacing. To view the database values click Databases > Concrete
Masonry Unit Data from the main menu. Here is what you will see:
Thickness & Rebar

Nominal Thickness
Select the nominal thickness for the concrete masonry units used in the wall
construction. This selection will pull the values for wall weight, equivalent solid
thickness and Igross from the masonry database (see above).
Actual Thickness
The actual wall thickness for the nominal selection.
Rebar Size & Spacing
Enter the rebar size and spacing.
Calculation Modules
391
Rebar "d" Distance

Enter the distance from the extreme compression fiber to the center of the rebar.
Solid Grouted
Select this checkbox if the wall is to be grouted solid . If unchecked the module will
calculate the wall weight considering that grouted cells only occur at the spacing of the
reinforcing.
Wall Weight
Weight of wall as retrieved from the masonry database. Value is based on specified
wall thickness, grout density, block type, and grouting frequency.
Analysis Settings
P-Delta Deflection Method
The module always performs an iterative analysis for moments and deflections using
progressively greater wall deflections due to increasing P-Delta effects.
Temperature Differential across thickness
This input is used to describe the temperature change between each face of the wall.
A temperature change induces a slight curvature into the wall because the hotter side
expands, resulting in a slightly higher out-of-plane deflection.
Enter temperature differentials as positive values. The effects of a specified
temperature differential are always additive with the bending and deflection resulting
from other applied loads.
Minimum Vertical Steel: %/100
Minimum steel percentage as a portion of the gross wall area.
Minimum Out-of-Plane Deflection Ratio
This setting establishes the minimum allowable ratio of span length to service load
deflection. If a lower actual Span/Deflection ratio occurs (meaning greater deflection),
a warning message will be displayed.
Number of wall elements for FE solver to use
This module divides the wall design strip into segments from the base to the top for
analysis purposes. Use this entry to define the number of segments to use.
Experience demonstrates that approximately 30 segments gives a good balance
between the iterative P-Delta analysis reaching convergence and excessive
calculation time.
Dimensions Tab
392
Fixity Conditions
Controls how the top and bottom of the wall are restrained for moments and lateral
movement.
[Top & Bottom Pinned]
Base of wall is restrained against movement out of plane and vertically, rotates freely.
rotate freely.
[Top Pinned, Bottom Fixed]
will create a moment at the bottom of the wall which is not designed in this module.
rotate freely.
[Top Free, Bottom Fixed]
will create a moment at the bottom of the wall which is not designed in this module.
Top of wall is completely free making this a cantilevered wall.
Clear Height
Span of the wall between the base and the first lateral support. For one story walls this
is the top support. For 2 story walls this is this prompt will change to be "1st story
height".
Parapet Height
Distance the wall extends (without a topmost lateral support) above the topmost
lateral support (clear height for one story wall, 2nd story height for 2 story walls)
Initial Lateral Displacement @ Roof Attachment
You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the top support laterally with
respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value effects the PDelta moments because of the additional offset of the wall.
Strip Width: Width of wall portion for analysis
Calculation Modules
393
This module performs its analysis for this width. Results are for either for this width or
a 12" width as noted where the results are provided.
Note that applied loads either are applied to the entire strip width (as for concentrated
vertical and lateral loads) or are entered on a per-foot basis when they are uniform
loads.
Two Story...
When a two story wall is selected this tab changes slightly to provide the 2nd story
height and remove the Fixed-Free support option.
1st Story Height

Distance from the bottom of the wall to the first lateral support.
2nd Story Height
Distance from the first lateral support to the top lateral support.
Initial Lateral Displacement @ 2nd Floor Attachment
You may use this entry to specify an initial movement of the 2nd story support laterally
with respect to the bottom support. Limit this values to 4 inches. This value effects the
P-Delta moments because of the additional offset of the wall.
Loads Tab - Vertical Loads

A variety of vertical loads are available. Note the hint in green describing whether the load
is per foot or on the entire strip width.
394
Ledger Load
This is a per-foot vertical load applied to the wall at an optional eccentricity. So if you
have a 48" strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4
kip applied due to the 1 k/ft entry.
Concentric Load
This is a per-foot vertical load applied concentrically to the wall. So if you have a 48"
strip width and specify a 1 k/ft dead load then the strip will have a total of 4 kip applied
due to the 1 k/ft entry.
Mid-Height Vertical Uniform Load
This load entry is only shown for 2-story walls. It allows you to specify two uniform
loads applied at the "1st Story" height, one of which can have an eccentricity from the
wall center.
Concentrated Loads
These are single concentrated vertical loads applied to the wall "strip width" with an
optional eccentricity.
Distance from Base is the height at which the load is applied.
Eccentricity
Describes an offset from the mid-thickness of the wall panel, which is the default
location of application of a vertical load. Enter this value as a positive number when
the load is shifted toward the inside of the wall.
Loads Tab - Lateral Loads
Lateral loads are applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall and are almost always
seismic or wind. These loads create out-of-plane deflection of the wall, which the module
will use to develop P-Delta effects to calculate secondary moments in the wall. Recall from
other explanations that the module divides the wall into small segments and calculates the
allowable and actual forces and deflections for each small segment. In this way the lateral
loads are properly modeled on what is a beam with variable stiffness due to the state of
cracking in each segment.
Calculation Modules
395
Full area WIND Load

Enter the wind load that will be applied to the wall in the out-of-plane direction. This
load will only be applied to one surface of the wall, and as such, the magnitude must
take into consideration both the internal and external pressures.
For the purpose of defining the direction of applied wind pressures, consider that
pressure will only be applied to the exterior surface of the wall. A net pressure that
acts TOWARD the exterior surface of the wall should be entered as a positive value. A
net pressure that acts AWAY FROM the exterior surface of the wall should be entered
as a negative value.
Wall weight seismic load
This section offers three options to specify the seismic load that will be internally
applied to the wall in the out-of-plane direction:
Enter Lateral Load: This entry is a simple net load applied to the wall (but will still be
factored by the load combination factors for "E").
Enter Wall Weight Factor: Enter a number that will be multiplied by the self-weight of
the wall. For example, if you enter 0.25 and the wall weighs 80 psf, then a 20.00 psf
out-of-plane load will be calculated and applied to the wall using the load combination
factors for "E".
396
Enter SDS per ASCE-05: Enter the (SDS * I) value as prescribed by the ASCE code for
the building location. The minimum calculated load value of 10 psf or (0.4 * Value
Entered * Wall Weight) will be applied to the wall using the load combination factors
for "E".
Fp
This is the actual seismic load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall, which
represents the wall's seismic self weight load.
Concentrated Lateral Loads
This is an added lateral load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall. It acts on
the full "Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors corresponding to
the type of load.
Distributed Lateral Loads
This is an added lateral uniform load applied perpendicular to the plane of the wall. It
acts on the full "Strip Width" and is factored by the load combination factors
corresponding to the type of load.
You also enter the start and end distance of the load extent above the base of the wall.

Typical load combination information as used throughout the Structural Engineering
Library.
Results Summary Tab

This tab presents the critical results as calculated by the module.
Calculation Modules
397
Maximum Bending Stress Ratio

The module looks at the detailed results for ALL strength design load combinations at
all "segments" in the wall and pulls out the maximum factored load bending stress
ratio to present here as the governing condition.
Minimum Deflection Ratio
The module looks at the detailed results for ALL service load combinations at all
"segments" in the wall and pulls out the minimum service load deflection ratio
(meaning maximum deflection) to present here as the governing condition.
Moment Capacity Check
For the condition of maximum bending stress ratio, the actual applied and allowable
bending moments are given along with the governing load combination.
Service Deflection Check
For the condition of minimum deflection ratio (meaning maximum deflection) the ratio,
deflection, allowable minimum ratio, allowable deflection (based on allowable ratio)
and governing load combination are reported.
Axial Load Check
The module checks the actual axial stress in all segments for all load combinations
and gives the maximum actual stress Pu/Ag. The allowable value is the result of the
user's entry for maximum percentage of f'm to use.
Reinforcing Limit Check
The module checks all portions of the wall for reinforcing (including differently
reinforced first and second stories) and reports the maximum reinforcing ratio and
compares it with the maximum percentage of balanced section analysis As allowed.
Minimum Moment Check
ACI specifies that a wall section in bending shall have a minimum strength Mn that is
greater than the cracking strength Mcr = Sgross * fr.
Maximum Reactions
This gives a summary of the maximum reactions (both out-of-plane and vertical) along
with the load combination that creates them.
398
Maximum Combinations
This tab provides a summary of the governing values for each load combination for both
factored load axial & bending and service load deflections.
Factored Load Maximum Moments for Load Combinations: The module looks
base of the wall at which the maximum condition is found. Note that "Aseff" is the
effective area of steel and is influenced by the axial compression in that segment.
Service Load Maximum Deflections for Load Combinations: The module looks
base of the wall at which the maximum out-of-plane deflection is found. The value for
"Ieff" is specific to the segment at that location and is based on the actual moment and
Bischoff's equation for calculating effective moment of inertia.
Strength Design Results

This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the factored axial load, moments,
effective steel area and moment of inertia at each wall analysis segment for each load
combination.
Service Load Deflections

This tab provides an extremely detailed summary of the service axial load, moments,
effective moment of inertia and calculated deflection at each wall analysis segment for
Calculation Modules
399
Reactions
This tab gives a summary of out-of-plane and vertical base reactions for each service load
combination.
Notes
Included are some excerpts from ACI regarding slender masonry wall design.
Sketch
400
Diagram
Calculation Modules
10.5
Shear Walls
Please select a material chapter.
401
402
10.5.1 Concrete Shear Wall

This module allows you to design concrete shear walls of several physical layouts:
1- Multi-Story wall with no openings but with up to five levels of differing length, height and
thickness.
2- Single story wall with openings.
Soon to be added will be a concrete solid wall with cast in end columns and also "special
boundary elements" per ACI.
Also to be added will be masonry shear walls with similar capabilities.
Walls with Openings

The ability to specify openings in a rectangular wall is allowed for the Wall with Openings
wall type. You have the ability to specify opening locations anywhere you like. The module
analyzes the wall and creates piers that divide the wall into rectangular elements. The
Sketch tab provides a drawing of the piers that the module has determined from the input
data. See below:
Calculation Modules
403
The analysis starts at the top of the wall and moves downwards. Applied loads and wall
self weight (if selected) are determined in each pier and the forces and moments are
calculated.
The module can distribute loads from a single pier above to multiple piers below (or
multiple piers at the same level to a single connecting pier) either by proportional rigidity of
the piers or by tributary length. The Results tab provides you with a good view of how the
load distribution progresses. In the screen capture below note that for the load combination
each pier is listed, the proportional shear value for a pier and the applied, self weight and
loads from above to that pier are shown.
In the two screen captures above take a look at P4. It will transfer load to piers P6 and P7.
Note that the table shows that P6 will take 10.1% of the shear load and P7 will take 89.9%
of the shear load. Those values were arrived at from the relative rigidities of P6 and P7.
When considering the distribution of vertical loads to piers P6 and P7 in the image above,
the load is distributed in proportion to the tributary width from the pier above. For vertical
loads, the program arrives at a distribution of 30% to P6 and 70% to P7.
General Tab - Multi Story Solid
If you wish to design a wall up to five levels high but without openings, click the [MultiStory Solid] button. The tab will change to display the entries shown below:
404
Height specifies the total height of the wall. On the next tab you can divide that total
height into up to five different wall portions.
Ec is the bending modulus of elasticity and Ev is the shear modulus of elasticity.
General Tab - Wall with Openings

When you want to design a solid wall with openings click the [Wall w/ Openings] button:
Length, Height & Thickness define the overall wall dimensions. The length you
enter is used for the length of the bottom-most portion of the wall. Within those
dimensions you will specify the openings on the next tab labeled Openings.
SDS is used to calculate the in-plane portion of the wall weight to be applied as a
seismic load.
Ec is the bending modulus of elasticity, and Ev is the shear modulus of elasticity.
The Default Rebar Size & Spacing are used in the calculated bar requirements
when the reinforcing due to shear is less than code minimums.
Calculation Modules
405
Multi-Story Wall Tab

This tab is where you specify the distinct wall levels for the multi-story wall.
Analysis Height locates the bottom edge of the wall section and is where the
maximum shear and bending stress will be calculated.
Wall Offset is the distance that this wall section is offset from the left-most edge of
the bottom-most wall section.
Wall Length is the length of the wall section. Maximum length is the overall wall length
- offset.
Wall thickness is the thickness of this wall section.
Effective Depth locates the tension rebar in the panel, and is used to calculate
"shear depth" for calculation of actual shear stresses
Checkboxes
Analysis Height
This is the user-defined height at which the analysis of a particular wall section will be
performed. All moments, shears, and vertical loads at this height will be calculated
using all applied lateral and vertical loads and the wall self weight above this point. The
other wall data items specified in the same column will be used between this analysis
height and the next higher level indicated in the column to the right.
ALWAYS WORK WITH THE HIGHER ANALYSIS HEIGHT IN THE COLUMN TO THE
RIGHT OF A LOWER HEIGHT. This is needed due to the manner in which the module
calculates the heights by comparing heights of adjacent sections.
406
Total Wall Height

Enter the total height of the wall. This height is used by the module to determine the
total height that the topmost Analysis Height wall section should extend to for
determining the weight of that uppermost section.
Wall Offset
Please refer to the diagram to further understand this item. Because this module can
be used with a walls that have their length changes with height, you must enter the
offset from the bottom wall section to the LEFT EDGE of the wall section. This
enables the module to calculate the actual X-Distance to the center of gravity of the
wall.
Wall Length
Enter the length to be used in the analysis of the particular wall section. Please note
that if the Wall length + Offset is greater than the Wall Length + Offset for the level
below, this indicates that the section OVERHANGS the section below it. This is not
allowed.
Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness to be used in the analysis of a particular wall section. This
thickness will be used only between the Analysis Height for that section up to the
analysis of the next higher section (or Total Wall Height if it is the highest section).
d:Effective Depth
The module considers the effective shear length of the wall to be 0.8 * wall length. If
you leave this entry blank, it will be filled in for you automatically.
Openings Tab - Perforated Wall

This tab allows you to enter the wall openings.
Openings are defined by the distance of the lower-left corner of the opening from the
lower-left corner of the wall.
Opening width and height are measured upwards and to the right.
Calculation Modules
407
Use the [Add] and [Edit] buttons to specify the dimensions of the opening. Clicking either
button displays this window:
Loads Tab - Multi-Story Wall

This main tab has four sub-tabs that allow you to enter four types of loads.
Vertical loads can be of dead, live, roof live and snow types.
Lateral loads can be of seismic and wind types.
Add wall weight to dead loads will tell the module to calculate the weight of the wall
above each analysis height and include it in the vertical dead loads to calculate applied
axial stress. It also is used for footing design when that option is selected.
Add wall weight as SEISMIC load will calculate the wall self weight, apply the lateral
weight seismic factor and "E" load combination factor. The resulting load will be applied at
the wall center to calculate shear and overturning due to that portion of the wall. This is
408
used for values at the analysis height, for the effect of that level's seismic weight on the
levels below, and for footing overturning and sliding calculations.
Vertical Point Loads
Use this tab to apply point loads to the wall. You can specify an "X" and "Y" distance
from the lower-left corner of the lower wall so that the load can be located anywhere
on the defined walls.
Use the [Add] and [Edit] buttons to change the values of applied loads. Clicking either
Vertical Uniform Loads

Use this tab to apply uniform loads to the wall. You can specify a "Y" distance from the
bottom of the lower wall so that the load can be located at any height.
Calculation Modules
409
Lateral Point Loads

Use this tab to apply point lateral loads to the wall. You can specify a "Y" distance from
the bottom of the lower wall so that the load can be located at any height.
410
Lateral Uniform Loads

Use this tab to apply uniform lateral loads to the wall. You can specify a Start and End
location to define the extent of the lateral load.
Calculation Modules
411
Loads Tab - Perforated Wall

This main tab has four sub-tabs that allow you to enter four types of loads. The module will
correctly apply the loads you specify to the portions of wall to which they are applied. Any
loads that exist within an opening will be ignored.
Vertical loads can be of dead, live, roof live and snow types.
Lateral loads can be of seismic and wind types.
Add wall weight to dead loads will tell the module to calculate the weight of the wall
above each analysis height and include it in the vertical dead loads to calculate applied
axial stress. It also is used for footing design then that option is selected.
Add wall weight as SEISMIC load will calculate the wall self weight, apply the lateral
weight seismic factor and "E" load combination factor. The resulting load will be applied at
412
the wall center to calculate shear and overturning due to that portion of the wall. This is
used for values at the analysis height, for the effect for that levels seismic weight on the
levels below, and for footing overturning and sliding calculations.
Vertical Point Loads
Vertical Uniform Loads
Lateral Point Loads
Lateral Uniform Loads

Calculation Modules
413
Footing Tab
You also have the option to specify a footing under a shear wall by selecting the Specify a
Footing
checkbox.
The dimensions of the footing are specified using Distance @ Left and Distance @ Right.
Distance @ Left is the distance that the footing projects past the left edge of the wall
(meaning the lower wall level for a multi-story type wall).
Distance @ Right is the distance that the footing projects past the right edge of the wall
(meaning the lower wall level for a multi-story type wall).
Rebar is assumed to exist only at the bottom of the footing to resist tensile forces from the
vertical loads and increased pressure due to overturning forces. Tension in the top of the
footing in cases where no upward soil pressure exists and the footing weight creates a
downward net force IS IGNORED.

The typical load combination tab for strength design of concrete is provided.
414
Multi-Story Wall Summary - Stresses Tab

For multi-story walls the module provides a summary of each level.
In the top portion you will see the calculated shear, moment and axial loads at the analysis
height you have specified. These values are due to wall self weight and applied vertical and
lateral loads from that analysis height and above.
In the bottom portion of the screen, the unit shear stresses, shear steel required and end
reinforcing for bending tension in that wall section are reported. All calculations are per ACI.
Multi-Story Wall Summary - Forces Tab

This tab provides the detailed force values for each wall level and for each load
combination.
Calculation Modules
415
Pier Summary Tab - Wall with Openings

When a wall with openings is selected a list of resulting information for each rectangular
analysis portion is provided.
This table is the condensed results of the Pier Forces tab and shows only the governing
load combination values for shear load and reinforcing for each pier.
Pier Forces Tab - Wall with Openings

This tab shows the detailed analysis information for each pier. Because piers are numbers
from top to bottom of the wall you can roughly see how the loads are transferred
downwards.
Shear % values are the calculated portion of shear that each pier will receive from the
level above based on the stiffness of that pier and others acting in parallel with it.
Applied values are the loads that the user has entered that are found to be applicable
to that pier given their dimensioned locations.
Self Weight values are the calculated self weight of the pier if the user has selected
to have the module auto calculate them.
From Above values are what is applied to that pier from the pier connected to the top
of that pier.
Vertical % values are the calculated portion of vertical load that each pier will receive
from the pier attached above. This % is based on tributary lengths.
416
Pier Details Tab - Wall with Openings

This tab is a simple summary of the module-generated piers and a small sketch of each.
Footing & Stability Tab

This tab provides the calculated service and factored load soil pressure, one-way shear
and bending at the end of the wall.
Sketch Tab - Multi-Story Solid
Calculation Modules
Sketch Tab - Wall with Openings
417
418
10.5.2 Wood Shear Wall

Basis
The NDS Special Design Provisions for Wind & Seismic allows for three approaches to
wood shear wall design:
1.
2.
3.
Force Transfer Shear Walls

Perforated Shear Walls
Individual Full-Height Wall Segment Shear Walls.
Force Transfer Shear Walls and Perforated Shear Walls allow the designer to use more
favorable analysis assumptions, and offers some benefits in terms of construction details.
But it comes at a cost of the designer having to perform more calculations and designs to
follow the load path through all of the headers, jambs, sills, etc., and their connections.
At present, the Wood Shear Wall module implements the Individual Full-Height Wall
Segment Shear Walls method. This is the most straightforward method from the design
standpoint. This method still requires the evaluation of h/b ratios to decide whether to
eliminate slender segments or suffer the imposed reduction on the nominal shear capacity
based on the slenderness of each panel in the wall. (Section 4.3.5.1 refers back to
Section 4.3.4, which includes this reduction.) But this method does not require
consideration of the reduction factor (Co) that applies to Perforated Shear Walls.
The implementation within Structural Engineering Library goes a little further by allowing
the user to specify openings. The module then takes the defined openings and considers
only the solid stacked portions of remaining wall as being effective at resisting lateral loads.
Section 4.3.3.4 provides the justification for summing the resistance of multiple Individual
Full-Height Wall Segments because, by our definition within the module, all segments will
be sheathed with the same materials and construction.
Calculation Modules
419
Overview
The Wood Shear Wall module allows the user to define overall geometry, openings (if
any), sheathing type, chord member species, grade, and size, applied loads, and a
footing (if desired). The module then evaluates the resulting shear panels, chords, and
footing (if defined).
Sheathing is evaluated for aspect ratio and unit shear due to load combinations that
include either wind or seismic. The module considers the selected sheathing type,
sheathing thickness, fastener size, blocking condition, and the species of the supporting
framing. It then automatically incorporates any necessary adjustments to the nominal
unit shear values from the 2008 Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic on the
basis of sheathing type, aspect ratio, and the species of the supporting framing. The
result is a required fastener spacing for each panel in the wall.
Chords are evaluated for tension and compression due to load combinations that include
either wind or seismic. The moment in a given shear panel is assumed to be coupled out
at the location of the chords, resulting in tension and compression forces. Any applied
vertical loads that may be present are combined with the wind or seismic chord forces,
and the resulting loads on the chords are evaluated as per the requirements of the NDS.
Footings (if defined) are evaluated for soil bearing pressure, overturning, and one-way
shear and flexure of the cantilevered end projection.
420
There are certain items that are not explicitly evaluated by this module, and the user
should be aware of the following exclusions: bending or shear in the top plate, bearing on
the top plate, out of plane design of the wall sheathing or framing, gravity-only loading on
the common studs or chords, bearing on the bottom plate, design of anchorage
hardware or connections.
Workflow Process
The general workflow proceeds as follows:
1. The overall height and length of the shear wall are defined on the General tab, along
with selections such as the Seismic Design Category, the Design Method, and the
Framing and Chord Species and Grade.
2. The sheathing type, thickness, fastener size and blocking conditions is selected on the
Sheathing tab. This tab also allows for the specification of sheathing on the second
side of the framing when necessary.
3. The chord size is specified on a level-by-level basis on the Chords tab. This tab also
allows for the specification of the bracing assumption to be applied in the compression
design of the chords.
4. If openings are present in the wall, they can be defined on the Openings tab.
5. Loads of many types can be defined and applied on the Loads tab.
6. If a continuous footing design is desired, the footing geometry and material properties
can be entered on the Footing tab.
7. The Load Combinations tab allows for the definition of the load combinations that will be
used for the design.
8. The results for the shear panels, chords, and footing (if designed) can be reviewed in
the Results panel in the lower portion of the screen.
General tab
Description: Enter a freeform description of the current wall design for reference.
Total Wall Length: Enter the overall length of the shear wall in units of feet.
Story Heights: Enter the heights of up to five stories in units of feet. Whenever a value
is entered, the input field for the next story height is displayed in case it is needed. The
total accumulated height is automatically reported.
Seismic Design Category: Enter the appropriate Seismic Design Category for the wall
being designed. This is used to check the selected sheathing type to be sure it is
permissible for use in that SDS according to the Special Design Provisions for Wind and
Seismic.
Design Method: Select ASD or LRFD to dictate which method will be applied when
designing shear panels and chords. Footing design (when requested) is always by LRFD
Calculation Modules
421
methods.
Framing & Chord Material: Use the icon to access the Wood Reference Design Values
database in order to select the species and grade of wood used for the chords and
common framing in the wall.
Sheathing tab
Select SDPWS Construction Table: Choose the table from which the sheathing will be
selected.
Select Main Sheathing: Select a tabular entry to represent the sheathing type, sheathing
thickness, fastener size/penetration, and in some cases the blocking condition.
Nominal Shear Capacities: The program displays the nominal shear capacities for seismic
design and for wind design directly from the selected table. These are nominal values
which still need to be modified for use in design, such as with a phi factor or factor of
safety and with any applicable adjustments such as for aspect ratio or specific gravity of
the supporting framing.
Sheathing is Blocked: (Only visible for some tabular selections) Use this checkbox to
indicate if the sheathing is blocked or not. This setting has an effect on some of the
allowable aspect ratios.
Table 4.3A Footnote 2 is applicable: (Only visible for some tabular selections) Use this
checkbox to indicate if a specific condition exists as described in detail in the referenced
footnote in Table 4.3A of the 2008 Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic.
Sheathing on 2nd Side: Use this checkbox to indicate that there is a sheathing of some
sort on the other side of the framing.
Use Same as Main Sheathing: A convenience option that automatically sets the
Sheathing on 2nd Side to be identical to the sheathing on the Main side.
Note: If sheathing is specified on the second side, and if the sheathing comes from the
same Construction Table as the Main Sheathing, then the blocking setting for the 2nd
side will automatically be assumed to be the same as the blocking setting for the Main
side.
Chords tab
The Chords tab will automatically display one row of chord definition data for each story
that was defined on the General tab.
Chord Size: Use the drop-down list box to select the size of the sawn lumber member(s)
that will be used at the chord locations for the given level. Note that the program will
422
automatically determine the num ber of chord members required at each location. So for
example, if the wall was generally going to be constructed of 2x4 framing, then this input
should be set to "2x4". Once the analysis and design has been completed, the program
will report how many 2x4s should be ganged together to safely resist the imposed chord
forces at each location.
CF: Size Factor: Enter the appropriate Size Factor for the chord member size, species,
and grade being entered.
Area per Chord: The program reports that cross sectional area of one member of the
selected size for reference.
Maximum Chord Stress Ratio: Enter the maximum permissible chord stress ratio.
Typically 1.0 using current design methods and load combinations.
Chord Strength Calculation: This setting offers two options for defining the bracing of
chord members when the allowable compression stress is calculated.
The option named " T reat all chords as fully braced about both ax es" implies that all
chords are braced against column buckling. The physical model for this option might be
a situation where chord members always occur at "L" or "T" shaped intersections, such
that the sheathing prevents buckling in the plane of the shear wall, and the intersecting
wall prevents buckling out of the plane of the shear wall. (These conditions are
probably not common.)
The option named " Assum e all chords unbraced out of plane of wall for story height"
implies that the sheathing prevents buckling in the plane of the shear wall, but nothing
prohibits column buckling of the chord member out of the plane of the wall. This is
Openings tab
The Openings tab allows openings to be defined in the shear wall.
Add: The Add button opens the Add Opening dialog. The dialog automatically numbers
the openings that are added, and it collects the geometric information necessary to locate
and size the opening. The Add Opening dialog also checks the alignment of defined
openings to ensure that all jambs are aligned.
Edit: By selecting an existing opening in the list, the Edit button allows the selected
opening to be revised.
Delete: By selecting an existing opening in the list, the Delete button allows the selected
opening to be removed.
Renumber: The Renumber button allows existing openings to be renumbered in a logical
order by working from left to right and then from bottom to top.
The graphic display offers checkboxes to independently display or hide:
Calculation Modules
423
Openings
Shear Panel callouts
Chord graphics and callouts
Panel and opening dimensions
All loads
Note: This module is predicated on the design assumptions of the Individual Full-Height
Wall Segment Shear Walls method. This method disregards the shear resistance of
portions of shear walls above and below openings. This leads to two important
considerations regarding the use of openings:
1. In multi-story models, any opening in one story must not partially overlap an opening in
a different story. Envision vertical lines at the jambs of an opening, and project them
to the top and bottom of the entire wall. Those jamb reference lines must not cross
any other opening. The Add Opening dialog will warn if this condition is being violated
by having partially-overlapping openings in any story. This may require enlarging some
openings so that they respect the jamb locations of adjacent openings, or it may
require applying the module only to the solid portions of the wall that remain after the
openings have been omitted.
2. The presence of an opening within a given story, creates a panel that is ineffective at
resisting shear. The ineffective panel is defined by the width of the opening and it
extends for the full height of that story. This means that it is not necessary to model
stacked openings within a given story. In fact, doings so will cause an error.
See the following diagrams for some acceptable and unacceptable opening geometries:
424
it -->
NG - Jambs of openings do NOT align --> Here is how to fix

OK - Jambs of openings align properly
Calculation Modules
it -->
425
NG - Opening crosses top of story

--> Here is how to fix
OK - Large opening modeled as 2 separate openings
426
it -->
NG - Stacked openings within a story --> Here is how to fix

OK - One opening accomplishes the task
Note: When using the self-weight functions for Dead Load and for seismic load, the
program does not deduct any weight for openings. In other words, the program
assumes that the unit weight of the window, door, louver, etc. in the opening, is
approximately the same as the unit weight of the wood-framed construction it is
replacing.
Footing tab
Specify a Footing: If this checkbox is selected, then the input fields for defining a footing
are displayed. Note: This checkbox also causes some footing-related input to be shown
or hidden as appropriate on the Loads tab.
Allowable Soil Pressure: Specify the allowable soil bearing pressure in units of ksf.
f'c: Specify the compressive stress of concrete in units of ksi.
Fy: Specify the yield stress of rebar in units of ksi.
Rebar Cover: Specify the cover over rebar in units of inches. The program will use this
value and an allowance for the rebar size to calculate the effective depth of the concrete
section.
Minimum Steel Reinforcing Percentage Based on Thickness: Specify the minimum
permissible ratio of rebar area to gross area of concrete.
Concrete Density: Specify the density of concrete in units of pcf.
Calculation Modules
427
Footing Width: Specify the width of the footing in units of ft. This is the dimension
perpendicular to the wall length.
Footing Thickness: Enter the thickness of the footing in units of inches.
Projection @ Left: Enter the projection of the footing beyond the left end of the wall in
units of ft.
Wall Length: The program reports the shear wall length in units of ft for reference.
Projection @ Right: Enter the projection of the footing beyond the right end of the wall in
units of ft.
Footing Length: The program reports the footing length in units of ft for reference.
Loads tab
The Loads tab provides several sub-tabs for the convenient definition of many different
types of loads that could potentially act on a shear wall system.
General sub-tab
The Wall Self Weight category offers inputs for the following:
Consider Wall Weight: This category provides options to automatically consider the wall
self-weight:
As vertical Dead load - a way to request that the program use the unit weight described
above to calculate a dead load
As Seismic load - a way to request that the program use the unit weight described
above to calculate a lateral seismic load using the value of Cs described below
Weight: (Only displayed when one of the options above has been selected.) Enter the
unit weight of shear wall construction in psf.
Cs: Seismic Response Coefficient: (Only displayed when the "As Seismic load" option
above has been selected.) Collects the value of Cs by which the unit weight would be
multiplied to determine the seismic load due to the self-weight of the wall if that option is
selected.
The Soil over Footing category is only displayed if the "Specify a Footing" option is
selected on the Footing tab. This category offers inputs for the following:
Soil depth over footing: Enter the depth of soil above the top of the footing in units of
inches. This value is used to determine loading on concrete footings when one is
designed. This value will affect the reinforced concrete design, the soil bearing pressure,
and the overturning ratio.
428
Soil density: Enter the density of soil above the top of the footing in units of pcf. This
value is used to determine loading on concrete footings when one is designed. This value
will affect the reinforced concrete design, the soil bearing pressure, and the overturning
ratio. If no footing design is requested, this value has no influence on the remaining
calculations.
The Added Overburden Load over Footing category is only displayed if the "Specify a
Footing" option is selected on the Footing tab. This category allows the user to specify
superimposed load on the top of the footing for all of the common load cases. This
value will affect the reinforced concrete design, the soil bearing pressure, and the
overturning ratio.
Vertical Point sub-tab
Add: The Add button opens the Add Point Load dialog. The dialog allows vertical point
loads of all load cases to be defined and located with respect to the lower left corner of
the wall. Note: Positive magnitudes are assumed to act downward.
Edit: By selecting an existing load in the list, the Edit button allows the selected load to be
revised.
Delete: By selecting an existing load in the list, the Delete button allows the load opening
to be removed.
Vertical Uniform sub-tab
Add: The Add button opens the Add Uniform Load dialog. The dialog allows vertical
uniform loads of all load cases to be defined and located with respect to the lower left
corner of the wall. Note: Uniform loads can be specified as partial-length loads by
specifying the start and end locations of the load with respect to the left edge of the wall.
Positive magnitudes are assumed to act downward.
revised.
to be removed.
Lateral Point sub-tab
Add: The Add button opens the Add Point Load dialog. The dialog allows lateral point
loads of all load cases to be defined and located with respect to the lower edge of the
wall. Note: Positive magnitudes are assumed to act to the right.
revised.
Calculation Modules
429
to be removed.
Lateral Uniform sub-tab
Add: The Add button opens the Add Uniform Load dialog. The dialog allows lateral
uniform loads of all load cases to be defined and located with respect to the lower edge of
the wall. Note: Uniform loads can be specified as partial-height loads by specifying the
start and end locations of the load with respect to the bottom edge of the wall. Positive
magnitudes are assumed to act to the right.
revised.
to be removed.
The graphic display offers checkboxes to independently display or hide:

Openings
All loads - otherwise only the loads associated with the selected tab are displayed
Load Combinations tab

The Load Combinations tab indicates the currently selected load combination set.
The load combination set can be changed by clicking the Change Load Combination Set
button.
The padlock icon can be used to unlock the individual load factors so they can be edited.
Note: Editing load factors in this way will not alter the load factors that are stored in the
selected load combination set. The edits will only affect the currently active calculation.
The Load Combinations tab has two sub-tabs: Service Combinations and Factored
Combinations.
Service Combinations sub-tab
The Service Combinations tab offers the service-level combinations from the selected load
combination set. These load combinations will be used for wood design when the ASD
Design Method is selected. They will also be used to determine soil bearing pressures
when the option is selected to design a footing.
A selected checkbox in the "Run" column indicates that the associated load combination
will be considered. The "Run" button offers quick convenience options for changing the
430
selection status of many load combinations at one time.

The CD column is only visible when the ASD Design Method is selected. It indicates the
value of the Load Duration Factor for each load combination. Click the CD button to
quickly set the values of CD for all load combinations based on the load case with the
shortest duration.
Use additional factors per ASCE 12.4.2.3: Select this button to instruct the module to
consider the additional contribution to the Dead Load due to the vertical component of
seismic load prescribed in ASCE 12.4.2.3.
Auto Reverse Wind: Select this button to instruct the module to also consider the
algebraic negative of the defined Wind loads. (This may be useful for quickly creating a
load combinations that reverse the direction of application of applied wind loads by
creating a "sister" load combination that uses the negative version of the wind component
for each load combo that normally incorporates +W.)
Auto Reverse Seismic: Select this button to instruct the module to also consider the
algebraic negative of the defined Seismic loads. (This may be useful for quickly creating
a load combinations that reverse the direction of application of applied seismic loads by
creating a "sister" load combination that uses the negative version of the seismic
component for each load combo that normally incorporates +E.)
Factored Combinations sub-tab
The Factored Combinations tab offers the factored- or ultimate-level combinations from
the selected load combination set. These load combinations will be used for wood design
when the LRFD Design Method is selected. They will also be used for reinforced concrete
design when the option is selected to design a footing.
A selected checkbox in the "Run" column indicates that the associated load combination
will be considered. The "Run" button offers quick convenience options for changing the
selection status of many load combinations at one time.
The Lambda column is only visible when the LRFD Design Method is selected. It indicates
the value of the Time Effect Factor for each load combination. Click the Lambda button
to quickly set the values of Lambda for all load combinations based on Table N3.
L <= 100, f1=0.5: Select this option to set appropriate load factors on Live Load when
the specified Live Load is less than or equal to 100 psf.
L > 100, f1=1.0: Select this option to set appropriate load factors on Live Load when the
specified Live Load is greater than 100 psf.
Use additional factors per ASCE 12.4.2.3: Select this button to instruct the module to
consider the additional contribution to the Dead Load due to the vertical component of
seismic load prescribed in ASCE 12.4.2.3.
Calculation Modules
431
Auto Reverse Wind: Select this button to instruct the module to also consider the
algebraic negative of the defined Wind loads. (This may be useful for quickly creating a
load combinations that reverse the direction of application of applied wind loads by
creating a "sister" load combination that uses the negative version of the wind component
for each load combo that normally incorporates +W.)
Auto Reverse Seismic: Select this button to instruct the module to also consider the
algebraic negative of the defined Seismic loads. (This may be useful for quickly creating
a load combinations that reverse the direction of application of applied seismic loads by
creating a "sister" load combination that uses the negative version of the seismic
component for each load combo that normally incorporates +E.)
The lower portion of the screen offers the following options for reviewing results:
Shear Panel Design
Summary
On a panel-by-panel, level-by-level basis, the Summary tab presents the following
information:
Max Shear: Reports the maximum shear force and the load combination associated with
that maximum shear force.
# of Sides: Indicates the number of sides to which sheathing has been applied. Will
either be 1 or 2.
Shear Summary & Attachment: Reports the actual unit shear, the allowable unit shear,
the design status, and the required attachment pattern.
Height/Width Ratio: Reports the actual height-to-width ratio, the allowable height-to-width
ratio for Side 1 (Main Sheathing), the allowable height-to-width ratio for Side 2 (2nd Side
Sheathing), and notes regarding the status of the height-to-width ratio and any necessary
adjustments.
Detail by Panel ID
On a panel-by-panel, load combination-by-load combination basis, the Detail by Panel ID
tab presents the following information:
Panel Data: Reports the story in which the panel exists, the distance from the left edge
of the overall wall to the left edge of the panel, the width of the panel, the distance from
the bottom edge of the overall wall to the bottom edge of the panel, the height of the
panel, and the height-to-width ratio of the panel.
432
width, and the maximum unit shear.

Capacity Factors: Reports phi for LRFD designs or the reciprocal of the Factor of Safety
for ASD designs, a capacity adjustment factor due to aspect ratio of the sheathing on
the Main Sheathing side of the wall, a capacity adjustment factor due to aspect ratio of
the sheathing on the 2nd Side of the wall, and a capacity adjustment factor due to the
specific gravity of the framing.
Adjusted Allowable Shear: Reports the allowable unit shears for all relevant fastener
spacings incorporating any applicable capacity adjustment factors. In situations where
two sides of sheathing are being considered, this table will correctly determine the
capacity considering both sides of sheathing by applying the rules of 4.3.3.3 and
4.3.3.3.2.
Panel Moment: Reports the moment in the panel.
Chord ID: Reports the identifying labels for the chords at the left and at the right end of
each panel.
Detail by Load Combination
On a load combination-by-load combination, panel-by-panel basis, the Detail by Load
Combination tab presents the following information:
Shear Force = shear tributary to each panel

A convenient nomenclature key is presented on this tab as well.
Chord Design
Chord Data
For each chord in the wall, the Chord Data tab presents the following information:
Location: Reports the Level in which the chord occurs and the distance from the left
edge of the overall wall to the chord.
Chord Design: Reports the chord force associated with the controlling design ratio, the
load combination responsible for producing the controlling design ratio, then number of
chord members required to resist the applied load, the size of the chord member
indicated by the user, the governing design ratio, the governing design consideration
(tension or compression), and the design status.
Chord Compression Stress: Reports the maximum chord compression force, the load
Calculation Modules
433
combination responsible for producing the maximum chord compression force, the
maximum compressive stress, and the allowable compressive stress.
Chord Tension Stress: Reports the maximum chord tension force, the load combination
responsible for producing the maximum chord tension force, the maximum tensile stress,
and the allowable tensile stress.
Chord Forces by Chord ID
For each chord in the wall, on a load combination-by-load combination basis the Chord
Forces by Chord ID tab presents the following information:
Story: The story in which the chord occurs.
ID: The identification label assigned to the chord.
Axial: Reports the load in the chord due to the sum of applied vertical loads, the load in
the chord that can be added or subtracted due to the overturning moment in the panel,
the force with the largest (tendency for) tension, and the force with the largest
(tendency for) compression.
Chord Location: Reports the distance from the left edge of the overall shear wall to the
chord location, the distance from the bottom edge of the overall shear wall to the bottom
of the chord, and the distance from the bottom edge of the overall shear wall to the top
of the chord.
Footing & Stability

Max Factored Pressures: Reports the maximum factored soil pressures at the left and
right sides of the footing, along with the load combination responsible for producing each
of those pressures. Note: Factored soil pressures are reported for reference, as they
are used in the reinforced concrete design calculation for the footing.
Footing One-Way Shear Check: Reports the results of the one-way shear calculation for
both ends of the footing.
Footing Bending Design: Reports the results of the flexural analysis and design including
recommended reinforcing options to satisfy the required area of steel.
Max Unfactored Soil Pressures: Reports the maximum unfactored soil pressures at the
left and right sides of the footing, along with the load combination responsible for
producing each of those pressures. Unfactored soil pressures are compared to the
allowable soil bearing pressure provided by the user.
Overturning Stability: Reports the overturning analysis performed about each end of the
footing including the overturning moment, the resisting moment, the stability ratio, and
the governing load combination.
434
Sketch
The sketch tab provides a convenient graphical view of the shear wall with options to
selectively view or hide the following:
Openings
All loads
Calculation Modules
10.6
Retaining Walls
Please select a subtopic.
435
436
10.6.1 Cantilevered Retaining Wall

Here is a listing of design capabilities contained in this Cantilevered Retaining Wall module:
Cantilevered stem wall can have up to five different stem sections, of either masonry
or concrete, each with a different thickness and/or reinforcing size and spacing. You
may also include a weightless fence on top of the wall for the purpose of collecting
additional wind load.
Surcharges on either side of the wall.
Sloped backfill.
Axial dead and live load applied to the top of the wall, with eccentricity.
Wind acting on a wall projection above grade.
Add lateral loads against the stem -- uniform or concentrated (impact) loads.
Effect of an adjacent footing behind the wall, line or point loading.
Option to use user-defined active and passive pressure or input angle of internal
friction and module will compute pressures using the Rankine or Coulomb formulas.
Specify percent passive and frictional resistance to be used to prevent sliding.
Option to specify sliding resistance using cohesion, in lieu of friction.
Window Layout
The retaining wall module divides the screen into a left and right portion. The left portion
contains all of the input data (and in some cases intermediate calculated values). The right
portion contains the calculated results and sketches.
Calculation Modules
437
GENERAL WALL INFORMATION

This tab allows you to enter the general information affecting the retaining wall. More
specific data will be entered on other tabs dedicated specifically to the stem, footing and
loads.
438
Retained Height
This is the height of retained earth measured from top of footing to the top of soil
behind the stem (over the heel). When the backfill is sloped, the soil will slope away
and upwards from this height. The actual retained height used for overturning and soil
pressure calculations will be the retained height projected at the vertical plane of the
back of the heel, but for stem moments, no such increase will be made.
Using the spin-buttons you can vary the retained height in 3-inch increments. You can
also type in any number. After each entry, you can press [Tab] to advance to the next
entry, or use your mouse to reposition the cursor.
Wall Height above Retained Soil
Use this entry to specify if the wall extends above the retained height. This entry is
typically used to define a "screen wall" projection above the retained soil. This
Calculation Modules
439
extension can be used as a weightless "Fence", or it can be defined as a concrete or

masonry stem section without any soil retained behind it. You can enter wind load on
this projection using the entry labeled "Load @ stem above soil" on the Loads tab.
We'll handle the fence when we get to the Stem design screen. The total height of the
wall (above the footing) will be equal to the Retained Height plus the Wall Height Above
Retained Soil.
Height of Soil over Toe
Measured from top of footing to top of soil on the toe side, this may vary from a few
inches to a few feet depending upon site conditions. (Note that it is specified in
inches.) It is used to calculate passive soil resistance (but its effective depth can be
modified by the "Soil over toe to Neglect" entry in the Sliding Resistance category on
the Footing tab). This depth of soil is also used to calculate the resisting moment, and
to reduce the net lateral sliding force. You can negate the latter effects on the Options
screen if desired.
Water table height over heel
If a portion of the retained height is below a water table, the active pressure of the
saturated soil will increase below that level. This additional pressure for the saturated
soil is equal to the pressure of water, plus the submerged weight of the soil (its
saturated weight - 62.4), plus the surcharge of the soil above the water table. The
submerged weight of a soil can be approximated as 62% of its dry unit weight.
If you want to design for a water table condition, enter the maximum height from top of
footing to water table level. The module will then compute the added pressures for
saturated soil on the heel side of the footing, including buoyancy effect. It will also
calculate increased moments and shears on the stem, and an increased overturning
moment. Dont enter a height more than the retained height, nor a liquid other than
water. If the water table is near the top of the retained height, it may be advisable to
enter the saturated soil density and specify the resulting active pressure for the full
retained height.
Soil Slope
You may enter any backfill slope behind the wall. Use the drop-down list box or type
the slope ratio as Horiz/Vert. The soil must be level or slope upward. Negative backfill
slopes (grade sloping downward, away from the wall) are not allowed.
The module will use this slope to:
1. include the weight of a triangular wedge of soil over the heel as vertical load, and
2. compute overturning based upon an assumed vertical plane at the back face of the
footing extending from the bottom of the footing to the ground surface a steeper
slope will result in a higher overturning moment.
When the Rankine or Coulomb method is used, the final calculated pressures do
include the effect of the slope on those Rankine or Coulomb equations.
The module will not accept a backfill slope steeper than the angle of internal friction.
Allow Soil Bearing
The maximum allowable soil bearing pressure for static conditions. Using the spin
440
buttons you can increment in 50 psf steps. Typical values vary from 1,000 psf to 4,000
psf or more.
Soil Density (heel side)
Enter the soil density for all earth (or water if applicable) above the heel of the footing.
This weight is used to calculate overturning resistance forces and soil pressures
using the weight of the soil block over the projecting heel of the footing. When
surcharges are applied over the soil, the surcharges are transformed to equivalent
uniform lateral loads acting on the wall by the ratio force = (Surcharge/ Density)
*Lateral Load. Input this value in lbs. per cubic foot. Usual values are 110 pcf to 120
pcf. More if saturated soil. Water is usually assumed to be 64 pcf.
Soil Density (toe side)
Enter the soil density on the toe side, which may be different than the heel side. When
surcharges are applied over the soil on the toe side, the surcharge is transformed to
equivalent uniform lateral loads acting on the wall by the ratio force = (Surcharge/
Density)*Lateral Load. Input this value in lbs. per cubic foot. Typical values are 110 pcf
to 120 pcf.
Lateral Pressure Method
Here you can choose between E.F.P. (Equivalent Fluid Pressure), Rankine formula or
Coulomb formula. Based on your choice for Lateral Pressure Method, you will be
offered the following input fields to fully define the lateral forces acting on the wall and
footing.
When the EFP Method is selected:
Active Soil Pressure - Heel Side
Enter the equivalent fluid pressure (EFP) for the soil being retained that acts to
overturn and slide the wall toward the toe side. This pressure acts on the stem for
stem section calculations, and on the total footing+wall+slope height for overturning,
sliding, and soil pressure calculations.
Commonly used values, assuming an angle of internal friction of 34, are 30 pcf for a
level backfill; 35 pcf for a 4:1 slope; 38 pcf for a 3:1 slope; 43 pcf for a 2:1 slope; and
55 pcf for a 1.5:1 slope. These values are usually provided by the geotechnical
engineer.
When the retained soil is sloped, a vertical component of the lateral earth pressure
over the heel can be applied vertically downward in the plane of the back of the footing.
You can choose to apply this force for overturning resistance, sliding resistance, and/
or for soil pressure calculations, by checking the boxes on the Options tab.
Active Soil Pressure - Toe Side
Enter the active pressure to be used on the toe side of the wall. This active pressure
is used along with the "Soil Height over Toe" value (entered on the Sliding tab) to
calculate a stabilizing soil force on the wall. This front side of the wall is assumed to
be level. The active pressure from soil over the toe counteracts the heel-side active
pressure to reduce net overturning and net sliding force.
Calculation Modules
441
This action is arguable, therefore the default is set to not use this counteracting force.
Passive Pressure
This is the resistance of the soil in front of the wall and footing to being pushed against
to resist sliding. Its value is in psf per foot of depth (pcf). This value is usually obtained
from the geotechnical engineer. Its value usually varies from 100 pcf to about 350 pcf.
When the Rankine or Coulomb Method is selected:

Soil Friction Angle
This value is entered in degrees and is the angle of internal friction of the soil. This
value is usually provided by a geotechnical engineer from soils tests, but can also be
found in reference books or building codes for various typical soil classifications. This
value is used along with Soil Density within the standard Rankine and Coulomb
equations to determine "Ka" and "Kp" multipliers of density to give active and passive
soil pressure values.
Active Soil Pressure
This value will be computed using the Rankine or Coulomb formulas. This represents
the lateral earth pressure acting to slide and overturn the wall toward the toe side. The
result will be presented in units of psf/ft. This pressure acts on the stem for stem
section calculations, and on the total footing+wall+slope height for overturning, sliding,
and soil pressure calculations.
When the retained soil is sloped, a vertical component of the lateral earth pressure
over the heel can be applied vertically downward in the plane of the back of the footing.
You can choose to apply this force for overturning resistance, sliding resistance, and/
or for soil pressure calculations, by checking the boxes on the Options tab.
Passive Soil Pressure
This value will also be computed using the Rankine or Coulomb formulas. This is the
resistance of the soil in front of the wall to being pushed against to resist sliding. Its
value is in psf per foot of depth (pcf). Common values usually vary from 100 pcf to
about 350 pcf.
APPLIED LOADS
442
This tab allows you to enter all the loads that will be applied to your retaining wall in
addition to lateral earth pressure.
Wind Load on exposed stem above soil

This wind force will be applied to that part of the stem projecting above the retained
height defined by the entry "Wall height above retained soil." It is used to calculate
overturning moment and sliding, stem design moment and shear, and soil pressures.
Only positive values of wind load should be specified. This will ensure that the wind
load acts in the direction of the active soil pressure, increasing the overturning
moment, the sliding force, the soil bearing pressure, and shear and moment in the
stem.
Vertical Surcharge (Surcharges will be factored as Earth Load, H for LRFD
Calculation Modules
443
designs.)
Surcharge over Toe
This surcharge is treated as additional soil weight if the surcharge is 240 psf and the
density is 120 pcf, then the module uses two feet of additional soil. Similarly, if 50 psf
is added for the weight of a slab over the footing, this will be equivalent to 0.41 feet of
soil (50 / 120). This surcharge will affect sliding resistance and active toe pressure.
Keep this in mind if modeling a point load toe surcharge.
Use TOE Surcharge to resist sliding & overturning
Checking this box will include the weight of soil overburden on the toe to resist
overturning and add to its weight for frictional resistance.
Surcharge over Heel
This surcharge is considered uniformly applied to the top surface of the soil over the
heel. It may be entered whether or not the ground surface is sloped, but it is unlikely a
surcharge could apply to a sloped backfill. This surcharge is always taken as a vertical
force. This surcharge is divided by the soil density and multiplied by the Active
Pressure to create a uniform lateral load applied to the wall. You can choose to use
this surcharge to resist sliding and overturning by clicking the box on the Options tab.
Typical live load surcharges are 100 psf for light traffic and parking, and 250 psf for
highway traffic.
Use HEEL Surcharge to resist sliding & overturning
Checking this box will include heel surcharge. If the surcharge includes live load, then
using it to resist sliding and overturning could be non-conservative. In this situation, it
might be advisable to deselect this checkbox.
Vertical Load Applied to Top of Stem
These loads are considered uniform load along the length of the wall. They are applied
to the top of the topmost stem section and affect the design of masonry stems only.
The dead and live loads are used to calculate stem design values and factored soil
reaction pressures used for footing design. Only the dead load is used to resist
overturning and sliding of the retaining wall.
If a wall is subjected to a high axial load (say more than 3 kips/ft) it could cause a
reversal of the bending moment in the heel. Under these conditions, it might be
advisable to investigate the design with and without the high axial load, to be sure that
an acceptable design is found for all conditions.
Since slenderness ratios (h/t) for retaining walls are generally small, usually less than
10, and axial stresses are low, slenderness effects are checked but usually have a
small effect.
If a point load is applied to the top of a wall, such as a beam reaction, the point load is
typically assumed to distribute itself laterally at a rate that is based on engineering
judgment for the materials under consideration. As a result of this distribution, the
point load will result in a uniformly distributed load of some relatively low magnitude by
the time it reaches the base of the stem. This module does not have an explicit input
field for point loads, so they must be represented as uniformly distributed loads. To
444
properly account for the lateral distribution that is characteristic of an axial point load
applied to a wall, the magnitude that is entered to represent the point load should
consider this distribution effect. The top of the wall may also need to be checked by
appended calculations for the localized effects of the full magnitude of the
concentrated load.
Axial Load Eccentricity
This is the eccentricity of the axial load with respect to the centerline of the uppermost
stem section. Positive values of eccentricity move the load toward the toe, causing
bending moments that are additive to those caused by the lateral soil pressure over
the heel. Negative eccentricities are not accepted.
Vertical Adjacent Footing Load
This entry gives you the option of placing a footing (line or square) adjacent and
parallel to the back face of the wall, and have its effect on the wall included in both the
vertical and horizontal forces on the wall and footing. Refer to the General Reference
Diagram for locations where input measurements should be taken.
For "Line (Strip) Load" the entry is the total load per ft. parallel to the wall (not psf). If
the adjacent footing is specified as "Square Footing" (not line load), the load entered
should be the adjacent footing load divided by its dimension parallel to the wall, giving
a pounds per lineal foot value, as for a continuous (line) footing.
A Boussinesq analysis is used to calculate the vertical and lateral pressures acting on
the stem and footing. The module uses equation (11-20a) in Bowles Foundation
Analysis and Design, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill, pages 630. When the Boussinesq
analysis is used, the module may require additional computing time, depending upon
the speed of your computer (hundreds of internal calculations are done after each
entry). To avoid this delay (which occurs any time any entry is changed) we suggest
you use a vertical load of zero until your data entry is nearly finalized. Then enter the
actual footing load and modify your final values.
For adjacent truck or highway loading, it may be preferable to use a heel surcharge
(uniform) of 250 psf (or more), instead of treating it as an adjacent footing.
It is generally not necessary to use this feature if the adjacent footing load is farther
from the stem than the retained height, less the depth of the adjacent footing below the
retained height, since at this distance it will not have significant effect on the wall.
Wall to Footing Centerline Distance
This is the horizontal distance from the center of the adjacent footing to the back face
of the stem (measured at the top of retaining wall footing). The nearest edge of the
footing should be at least a foot away from the wall face otherwise it is suggested to
use an equivalent heel surcharge instead.
Note: If the horizontal distance from the center of the adjacent footing to the back face
of the stem is greater than the vertical distance from the top of the retaining wall
footing to the bottom of the adjacent footing, then the effect on the retaining wall will be
insignificant.
Calculation Modules
445
Footing Width
Width of the adjacent footing measured perpendicular to the wall. This is necessary to
create a one-foot long by Width wide area over which the load is applied.
Height of Base Above (+) or Below (-) Retained Height
Use this entry to locate the bottom of the adjacent footing with respect to the Retained
Height. Entering a negative number places the footing below the Retained Height. A
positive entry would typically only be used when the soil is sloped and the adjacent
footing resides uphill. To insert a negative number, first type the number, then press
the "-" (minus) sign.
Note: If the Adjacent Footing is another retaining wall at a higher elevation, the
Boussinesq analysis may be used for the vertical load applied to the soil from the wall,
however the design must also consider the lateral (sliding) loads from that adjacent
wall. This load could be applied as Added Lateral Load, however this is at the
discretion of the designer and is not within the scope of the module. Caution is urged
for this condition. See discussion in the companion book: Basics of Retaining Wall
Design. For questionable soil or site conditions a global stability analysis is advised.
Eccentricity
This entry is provided in case the soil pressure under the adjacent footing is not
uniform. Enter the eccentricity of the resultant force under the adjacent footing from
the centerline of the adjacent footing. Positive eccentricity shifts the load toward the
toe, resulting in greater pressure at the side of the adjacent footing closest to the stem
of the retaining wall. The module will use the vertical load and eccentricity and create a
trapezoidal pressure distribution under the adjacent footing for use with the
Boussinesq analysis of vertical and lateral pressures.
Footing Type
This drop-down list box allows you to enter either an isolated footing using the "Square
Footing" selection, or a continuous footing using the "Line Load" selection.
Poisson's Ratio
Since the resulting pressures are sensitive to Poissons Ratio, there is an entry
allowing you to select a ratio from 0.30 to 0.55. This value should be provided by the
geotechnical engineer. A value of 0.50 is often assumed.
Lateral Load on Stem
This input allows you to specify an additional uniformly distributed lateral load applied
to the stem.
This is for an impact point load, such as due to an impact of a car or similar force.
Enter the load as a one-foot high increment, separating the "Height to Bottom" and
"Height to Top" by one-half foot (or meter).
Note: This load is not factored. To apply a load factor (such as for an impact load),
increase the applied load proportionately (e.g. an impact load of 1000 lbs requiring a
446
load factor of 2.0 would be entered as 2,000 lbs). You may need to do several designs
to check load factor combinations.
Keep in mind that when considering a concentrated lateral load, it may be possible to
reduce the magnitude to account for the fact that the load distributes horizontally at
levels below the point of application.
Height to Top
This dimension defines the upper extent of the added lateral load measured from the
top of the footing. Do not enter a dimension that exceeds "retained height" plus "Wall
height above retained soil".
Height to Bottom
This dimension defines the lower extent (or bottom) of the added lateral load
measured from the top of the footing.
STEM DESIGN TAB
Calculation Modules
447
Material
Use the buttons to select Masonry, Concrete, or Fence. Fence is only allowed on top
of the wall, higher than the Retained Height, and is considered weightless.
Thickness
Use the drop-down list box to input the wall thickness. If masonry is chosen, you will
be given standard masonry thickness (e.g. 6", 8", 12"). If concrete is chosen, you can
increment in one-inch steps. If Fence is chosen, this entry is unavailable since the
fence is assumed to be weightless.
Wall Weight
This displayed value is based upon the wall data entered earlier. For concrete stems,
448
the unit weight of concrete can be specified on the Stem tab. For masonry stems,
140 pcf grout is assumed, and the unit weight of the completed stem is a function of
the specified thickness, CMU Type, and the status of the Solid Grouting checkbox, all
of which are located on the Stem tab. A multiplier is also available on the Options tab
to modify the tabular weights for masonry walls.
The industry standard masonry unit weight values used by this module may be
modified by clicking Databases > Concrete Masonry Unit Data from the main menu
and then clicking the [Change] button.
Design Method
When a masonry stem section is chosen, this allows a choice of ASD or LRFD
methods. When the latter is selected the input notations change (e.g. fs to fy) and all
calculations are based upon LRFD.
Rebar Size
Make your selection from the pull-down menu for bar sizes #3 to #10. Soft Metric
sizes will be displayed in parentheses alongside.
Rebar Position
Chose between Center or Edge. If Center is chosen, the rebar d distance will be 1/2
the actual wall thickness. If Edge is chosen it will be located at the heel side of the
stem.
For masonry design, the module contains a table of the appropriate "d" values to use
for various block sizes and center/edge locations, as shown in the table below.
Rebar Position Depth for Masonry, Default Values.
Nominal Thickness
Rebar Depth (in)

Center
Edge
6"
2.75"
2.75"
8"
3.75"
5.25"
10"
4.75"
7.25"
12"
5.75"
9.0"
14"
6.75"
11.0"
16"
7.75"
13.0"
For concrete, the edge rebar depth is always stem thickness less 1.5" for #5 and
smaller bars (or 2" for #6 or larger), less one-half the bar diameter.
Specify Position Box
Calculation Modules
449
Click this box to change the default "d" value.

Fs
Enter the allowable steel stress, based on working stress design, which should be
used for design of the masonry stem section. The spin button changes this value in
increments, and is not visible when a concrete wall has been specified.
Short Term Increase
This factor is applied to masonry ASD design and allowable soil bearing as permitted
by IBC 2009, section 1806.1, and ACI 530-08, section 2.1.2.3. This is applicable only
when wind and/or seismic is applied.
Solid Grout
This applies to masonry only. If this box is checked, the weight of the wall will be
based upon industry standard solid-grout weight for either lightweight, medium weight,
or normal weight block regardless of the specified spacing of reinforcing. If this box is
not checked, the module will calculate the weight based on the assumption that only
cells containing reinforcing are grouted.
This also affects equivalent solid thickness for stem shear calculations, and area for
axial stress calculations (combined with moment for masonry stems).
Modular "n", Ratio
This is the multiplier used to calculate the modulus of elasticity of masonry. The ACI
530-05 and ACI 530-08 both specify Em = 900*fm which is the default value. The
multiplier can be modified on the Options tab.
Equivalent Solid Thickness
If partially grouted (not solid grout), this value is generated from an internal database
that is accessible by clicking Database > Concrete Masonry Unit Data.
Stem Design Heights
IMPORTANT! The term Stem Design Height used in this module is the height above
the top of the footing (i.e. above the base of the stem). It is the height above the bottom
of the stem where you want the module to compute moments and shears.
You can divide the stem into up to five sections (increments of height). Each section
represents either a different material (concrete, masonry, or fence), a change in
thickness, or a change in reinforcing size or spacing.
For most walls, only two or three changes in stem sections are used. For example, it
would be logical to create a change of section at the top of the dowels projecting into
the stem from the footing and perhaps another change in section further up the wall
where a more economical design is desired.
Bottom
You must start the stem design here, at the base (height above footing = 0.00), where
the stem moment and shear are maximum. As you manipulate the bar sizes, spacing,
and position (you first, of course, will have selected a wall material and trial thickness)
until the Summary box shows you an acceptable stress ratio (the higher and closer to
450
1.0, the more efficient).

To check the wall at a higher Design Height, such as at least the LAP REQD IF
ABOVE distance, where reinforcing or thickness can be reduced, click the [Insert
Stem] button and enter the next higher section. Advance the spin button to the desired
height above the top of the footing or enter it by typing. This will move (and dim) the
Bottom Section and you can now design this new section.
Continue this way, clicking [Insert Stem] button after each stem section design is
completed, up to a maximum of five heights. A new Design Height should only be
entered when you want to change the material, thickness, or reinforcing, and should
never be less than about two foot intervals.
Calculation Modules
FOOTING TAB
451
452
Toe Width
This is the width of the Toe of the footing, and is measured from the front edge of the
footing to the front face of the stem. Can be set to 0.00 for a property line condition. All
overturning and resisting moments are taken about the bottom-front edge of the toe.
Heel Width
Distance from front face of stem to back of heel projection. If a dimension is entered
that is less than the stem width at the base, the module will automatically reset the
heel dimension to at least the stem width. For a property line at the rear face of the
stem, this dimension would be the stem width.
Calculation Modules
453
Total Width
The calculated width of the footing, Toe Width + Heel Width.
Thickness
Total footing thickness, NOT including the key depth (if used). For bending and shear
design of the footing, the rebar depth "d" is taken as Footing Depth - Rebar Cover - "
(to account for the rebar radius). If footing thickness is inadequate for shear capacity a
red warning indicator will appear.
The footing thickness must be sufficient to allow for rebar development (for hooked
dowels) plus rebar cover (adjacent to the soil). If you enter a dimension less than
required for stem bar development, a red message will appear at the top of the
screen. If the thickness is inadequate, increase the footing thickness, or change the
stem dowels, until this message disappears.
f'c
Enter concrete compressive stress for footing.
Fy
Allowable rebar yield stress to be used for design of footing bending reinforcement.
Footing Density
This option is necessary since, if there is any buoyancy effect, it will reduce the
effective weight of the footing concrete.
Min "As" Ratio
Enter the absolute minimum steel percentage to be used to calculate rebar spacing
requirements (commonly 0.0018 Ag for Fy=60,000 psi, but code applicability for
footings is arguable). If the % steel required by stress analysis is less that 200/Fy, the
minimum of (200/Fy or 1.333 * bending percentage required) is calculated and
compared with the Minimum As% entered here, and the greater of the two is used to
calculate rebar spacing requirements.
Key Depth
Depth of the key below the bottom of footing. The bottom of the key is used as the
lower horizontal plane for determining the size of the passive pressure block from the
soil in front of the footing. Adjust this depth so the sliding safety factor is acceptable
(typically a value of 1.5 is used).
Key Width
Width of the key, measured along the same direction as the footing width. This is
usually 12"-14", but generally not less than one-half the key depth so flexural stress in
the key is usually minimal.
Key Location
Enter the distance from the front edge of the toe to the beginning of the key. Do not
enter a distance greater than the footing width minus key width.
454
Sliding Resistance Method

Enter whether sliding resistance will be by friction and passive pressure or by
cohesion and passive pressure.
Soil over toe to neglect
Since the soil over the toe of the footing may be loose and uncompacted, it may have
little or no passive resistance. This entry gives you the option of neglecting any or all of
the Height of Soil Over Toe that you entered in the Criteria tab. You can neglect the
soil over toe plus the footing thickness, if desired.
Ftg/Soil Friction Ratio
Enter the friction factor here. It is generally provided by the geotechnical engineer and
usually varies from 0.25 to 0.45.
% FRICTION Usable for Sliding Resistance
This may be a stated restriction in the geotechnical report. Enter a value from zero to
100%.
% PASSIVE Usable for Sliding Resistance
This may be a stated restriction in the geotechnical report. Enter a value from zero to
100%
Lateral Forces at Base of Footing
This is the total lateral force against the stem and footing which causes the wall to
slide and which must be resisted. It is the total active pressure on the heel side less
the active pressure on the toe side.
less Passive Pressure Force
This uses the allowable passive pressure in pcf times the available depth (footing
thickness plus soil above toe minus height to neglect) and multiplied by the percent
usable that you indicated, to compute the total passive resistance. Weight due to toe
surcharge, if applicable, will also be added. If a key is used, the available passive
pressure depth will be to the bottom of the key.
less Friction Force
This is the total vertical reaction multiplied by the friction factor and multiplied by the
percent usable that you indicated.
Added resisting force required
If this is 0.0 lbs., the forces balance, but there may be no safety factor. Watch the
Sliding Factor of Safety for an adequate value (usually 1.5). Consider adding a key or
revising the footing dimensions if required.
Additional force required for a 1.5 Factor of Safety
This is the additional resisting force that would be required in order to achieve a 1.5
safety factor. If this value indicates zero, then the sliding factor of safety is already
greater than or equal to 1.5.
Calculation Modules
455
Rebar Cover in Heel & Toe

These input fields allow you to specify the clear cover that will be used at the heel and
at the toe. When specifying these values, keep in mind that the toe rebar is placed
closest to the bottom of the footing, and the heel rebar is placed closest to the top of
the footing. When calculating the "d" dimension for bending and shear strength
calculations, this module will consider the footing thickness and then deduct the
specified clear cover and an additional 1/2" to account for the radius of the rebar.
Toe Reinforcing Options
This list gives you choices for reinforcing sizes and spacing for the bottom toe bars.
Typically the toe bars are extensions of the stem dowels, which are bent out toward
the toe. Therefore, it may be most efficient to simply verify that the bar size and
spacing used for the stem dowels is within the range of the selections offered for toe
reinforcing options.
NOTE: If No reinf reqd message appears, it means the flexural capacity of the
footing (modulus of rupture times the section modulus, with 2 deducted from the
thickness for crack allowance per code) is adequate to resist the applied moment.
However, the designer in some cases may consider it prudent to add reinforcing
regardless of the theoretical flexural capacity. For plain concrete per ACI 22.5.1, Fr =
phi(5)(fc)1/2, where phi = 0.55.
Heel Reinforcing Options
This list gives you choices for acceptable sizes and spacing of top heel bars. It is
desirable to select a spacing that is modular with the stem dowel bars for ease of
construction. Note: The module does not calculate the heel bar development length
inward from the back face of the stem (where the moment is maximum).
NOTE: If No reinf reqd message appears, it means the flexural capacity of the
footing (modulus of rupture times the section modulus, with 2 deducted from the
thickness for crack allowance per code) is adequate to resist the applied moment.
However, the designer in some cases may consider it prudent to add reinforcing
regardless of the theoretical flexural capacity.
ALSO NOTE: The heel design moment may be influenced by the setting used for the
item labeled "Neglect Upward Pressure at Heel for Ftg M & V" on the Options tab. See
the section on the Options tab for additional information.
Key Reinforcing Options
If flexural tension is insufficient to resist bending in key, a message will appear
indicating reinforcing required. You can vary the width of the key until the message
disappears. If reinforcing is required options will be shown on the Footing tab.
OPTIONS TAB
456
Toe Active Pressure Used

This drop-down list box provides the option to specify whether the module should or
should not apply the toe side horizontal active pressure to reduce the overturning
moment and sliding force to be resisted. Typically this is NEVER used. It was added
to assist in cases where the footing was buried very deeply in soil.
Slab is Present to Resist all Sliding Forces
Check this box when a slab is in front of the wall to resist lateral sliding. When this box
is checked, sliding is not a design issue passive and friction resistance are ignored
-- but the lateral sliding force is displayed for checking the resistance offered by the
slab.
The slab is assumed to be at the top of the footing not higher, so selecting this
checkbox will not reduce the design shear or moment in the stem.
Neglect Upward Pressure at Heel for Ftg M & V

When the user DESELECTS the option to Neglect Upward Pressure at Heel for
Footing Moment and Shear:
The program is considering the upward pressure at heel.
457
Calculation Modules
The upward pressure tends to reduce the moment caused by the weight of the soil
and the self-weight of the heel itself.
The program is reporting the actual net moment found to exist in the heel.
When the user SELECTS the option to Neglect Upward Pressure at Heel for Footing
Moment and Shear:
The program is NOT considering the upward pressure at heel.
The program determines the heel moment caused by the weight of the soil and the
self-weight of the heel itself.
The program then applies the following logic:
- The calculated heel moment is conservative when the upward pressure at
heel is neglected.
- The calculated heel moment would act in the same direction as the toe
moment.
- The sum of the heel moment and the toe moment cant be any greater than
the stem design moment, which is delivering the moment to that joint in the first place.
- So the program conservatively assumes that the heel design moment is the
calculated heel moment but not to exceed the stem design moment.
Use 2010 CBC Section 1807.2.1

Section 1807.2.1 of 2010 CBC and IBC 2009 requires the designer to consider in the
sliding analysis the effects of the active pressure extending all the way to the bottom of
a keyway when one is used. Selecting this option will ensure that the analysis
properly considers the full extent of the active pressure on a keyway.
Choices for Use of Vertical Component of Active Pressure

The vertical component of the lateral pressure is applied at a vertical plane at the back
of the heel. You can choose whether or not to use this force to resist overturning, to
resist sliding, and to reduce soil bearing pressure.
If you choose the option to use this force to resist overturning, then for a level backfill,
the module will back-solve the EFP method to find the equivalent internal friction angle,
and then apply this vertical component equal to tan. If either the Rankine or Coulomb
method had been chosen, this vertical component would be tangent of
If you choose the option to use this force to resist sliding, then the sliding calculation
will incorporate the additional frictional force that can be generated as a result of the
additional vertical force.
If you choose the option named "Soil Bearing Pressure", then the the effect of this
vertical component at the back of the heel will be considered in the calculation of the
soil bearing pressures.
458
Factor Applied to Masonry f'm for Calculation of Em

The modulus of elasticity for masonry is 900 times f'm per ACI 530-05. This field
allows you to enter a multiplier of other than 900 if necessary.
Multiplier Applied to CMU Weight from Tables
This entry allows you to increase or decrease the internal default values of CMU
weights, as displayed on the Stem tab.
Load Factors
For each type of load (DL, LL, etc) the default factor will be displayed. You can change
them and set new defaults, but remember to review them for a new design since they
may have been changed.
RESULTS TAB
Calculation Modules
459
Stability Ratios
These are displayed for both overturning and sliding.
Soil Pressure @ Toe and Heel
This is the resulting unfactored soil pressure for both the toe and heel. If the
eccentricity is outside the middle third, the heel pressure will show 0.00. (Note: when
the resultant is outside the middle-third, the module calculates the toe pressure
assuming no tension at heel).
Allowable Soil Pressure
460
This is for your reference as input on the Criteria tab.

Total Bearing Load
This is the sum of all vertical forces.
Resultant Eccentricity
Distance from center of footing to resultant soil pressure.
Eccentricity Within/Outside Middle Third
The resultant is outside the middle third of the footing width if the eccentricity is greater
than one-sixth the footing width. (If outside the middle third, the module computes the
toe soil pressure assuming no tension at heel.)
ACI Factored Soil Pressure @ Toe and Heel
Load factors are applied to all dead and live loads to determine total vertical load for
soil pressure used in calculating footing moments and shears. This load is then
applied at the same eccentricity calculated for service load soil pressures to yield the
actual factored soil pressures for footing design using ultimate strength design
principles. Note that since only factored vertical loads are applied at the non-factored
resultant eccentricity, a true 1.6 load factor applied to lateral earth pressure is not
used for footing design. If resultant vertical load eccentricity were to be calculated
using factored loads, the distance would not truly represent a correct state of stress in
the soil. ACI load factors are intended to give conservative results for stress.
Calculation of a factored load eccentricity would give soil pressure diagrams that
would not always represent the actual soil pressure distribution under the footing, and
yield unreasonable results. Factored lateral earth pressure, however, is always used
for concrete stem design.
Mu Design @ Toe/Heel
These are the factored (by 1.2) moments at face of stem for toe and heel moments.
Since neither can be greater than the stem base moment (factored if concrete stem),
the latter may govern. These moments will be reduced if you choose to neglect the
upward soil pressure on the Options tab.
A message will indicate which controls.
Shear @ Toe and Heel
The actual shear is calculated from the one-way action in the footing at a distance
"d" (footing thickness - rebar cover) from the toe side of the bottom stem section, and
at the face of the stem on the heel side. If "d" is greater than the projecting toe or heel
length, then the one-way shear is zero.
Allowable Footing Shear
The allowable unit shear equals (0.75 * 2 * f'c ).
RSM - RESISTING MOMENTS TAB
Calculation Modules
461
This screen presents in tabular form each component contributing to resisting

moment, giving weights and lever arms from the front edge of the toe to the centroid of
the weight.
For calculating the vertical component, if checked on the OPTIONS screen, and if the
EFP method was chosen, the module will back-solve using the Rankine formula to
obtain an equivalent internal friction angle.
The force and moment displayed at the bottom accounts for deduction of effect of
vertical component, if box on Options tab has been checked.
462
OTM - OVERTURNING MOMENTS TAB
This screen presents in tabular form each component acting horizontally to overturn
the wall/footing system. The centroid of each force is multiplied by its distance up from
the bottom of the footing. The Heel Active Pressure includes the effect of surcharges
and water table, if applicable, and its Distance is to the centroid of the total lateral
force.
The total overturning moment is displayed, along with the Resisting/Overturning ratio.
Calculation Modules
463
The overturning moment is reduced by the toe side active pressure, if this option is
selected on the Options tab.
SLIDING TAB
STEM TAB
464
SKETCH TAB
Calculation Modules
LOADING TAB
465
466
Calculation Modules
10.7
Foundations
Please select a subtopic.
467
468
10.7.1 General Footing

This module provides analysis of a rectangular footing with applied axial load, overburden,
moment and shear loads. Click here for a video:
General Footing
The module allows you to move the axial load application position off-center of the footing,
and provides automatic calculation of allowable soil bearing pressure increases based on
footing dimensions and/or depth below surface.
The module checks service load soil pressure, overturning stability, sliding stability, flexure
at each of the four pedestal faces, 1-way shear at 'd' from each of the four pedestal faces,
and punching shear along a perimeter located 'd/2' from the pedestal faces.
General
f'c
fy
Ec
Calculation Modules
469
Modulus of elasticity of concrete.

Concrete Density
The density of the concrete is used to calculate the self-weight of the pedestal and
footing when that option is selected.
Phi Values
Enter the capacity reduction values to be applied to Vn and Mn.
Biaxial Analysis
Select Yes or No to indicate if a biaxial analysis is to be performed. If a biaxial analysis
is performed, the solution will consider moments applied simultaneously about the two
orthogonal axes of the footing. If a biaxial analysis is NOT performed, the solution will
consider moments applied about the two orthogonal axes to be acting nonconcurrently.
Percentage of Edge Length for M & V (Only displayed when biaxial analysis is
selected)
When calculating shear and moment for footings where the maximum soil pressure
values occur at the corners, this value specifies the percentage of the footing
dimension from the edge to use when calculating moments and shears due to
variable soil pressure in that region. A smaller value for this variable will produce a
more conservative design, because it will focus on a narrower strip which is
experiencing the highest soil bearing pressure.
Click to Calculate (Button is only visible when biaxial analysis is selected)
Due to the iterative nature of the calculations that are required for a biaxial analysis, it
would be undesirable to rerun the entire analysis and design every time an input
parameter changes. So for reasons of efficiency, the program automatically goes into
manual recalculation mode when biaxial analysis is selected. Click this button any
time you wish to recalculate with the current input parameters.
Consider footing weight when determining soil bearing pressure
Select this option to have the module calculate the self-weight of the footing and apply
it as a downward load when determining soil bearing pressures. The self-weight will
be multiplied by the dead load factor in each load combination.
Consider footing weight when determining sliding, overturning and uplift
Select this option to have the module calculate the self-weight of the footing and apply
it as a downward load when determining sliding, overturning and uplift factors of
safety. The self-weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in each load
combination.
Ignore Checks for Sliding
Select this option if sliding is not a design consideration for any particular reason.
Min Steel Ratio - Temperature/Shrinkage
Enter the minimum ratio for temperature/shrinkage steel, calculated using the full
footing thickness. This will trigger a warning message if the section is under1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC
470
reinforced.
Note: This check is performed assuming that only one mat of the defined rebar will be
provided. If the design has net uplift, such that a top mat is warranted, or if a top mat
will be provided anyway, then be aware that the program will still only consider the
contribution of one mat toward meeting the Temperature & Shrinkage requirement. In
this case, it may be more convenient to set the T&S ratio to a value that represents
one-half of the total, knowing that the two mats will be sufficient to provide the full
amount required.
Minimum overturning safety factor
Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting moment to overturning moment. If the
actual ratio is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that
overturning stability is not satisfied.
Minimum sliding safety factor
Enter the minimum allowable ratio of resisting force to sliding force. If the actual ratio
is less than the specified minimum ratio, it will trigger a message that sliding stability
is not satisfied.
Consider ACI 10.5.1 & 10.5.3 as minimum reinforcing
Select this checkbox if you wish to have the module consider ACI 318 Sections 10.5.1
and 10.5.3 in the determination of minimum reinforcing.
Soil Allowable Values

Allowable Soil Bearing
Enter the allowable soil bearing pressure that the soil can resist. This is a service load
resistance and will be compared to calculated service load soil pressures (loads not
factored as in strength design).
Increase bearing by footing weight
Click [Yes] to tell the module to calculate the weight of one square foot (plan view) of
footing weight and add it to the allowable soil bearing value. This has the effect of not
penalizing the soil for the self weight of the footing, and is useful for situations where
Calculation Modules
471
the geotechnical engineering report provides allowable net bearing pressures.

Soil passive sliding resistance
Enter the value of passive soil pressure resistance to sliding. This value will be used
to determine a component of sliding resistance that is generated by the passive
pressure of the soil. The sliding resistance due to passive pressure is then added to
the sliding resistance due to friction to determine the total resistance to sliding for
Coefficient of Soil/Concrete Friction
Enter the coefficient of friction between soil and footing to use in sliding resistance
calculations.
Soil Bearing Increase
This section allows you to specify some dimensions that, when exceeded, will
automatically increase the allowable soil bearing pressure.
Footing base depth below soil surface: The distance from the bottom of the footing
to the top of the soil. This value is used to determine allowable soil bearing pressure
increases and soil passive sliding resistance, but it is not used in any other
calculations in this module.
Increases based on footing depth: Provides a method to automatically apply
increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing depth below
some reference depth. Collects the following parameters:
Allowable pressure increase per foot: Specifies the amount that the basic
allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of depth below
some reference depth.
When base of footing is below: Specifies the required depth in order to start
realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil bearing pressure on the basis
of footing depth.
Example: Assume the following: Basic Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 3 ksf.
Footing base is 6'-0" below soil surface. The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15
ksf increase in bearing pressure is allowed for each foot of depth when the base is
deeper than 4' below top of soil. Since you've indicated that the footing is 6' below the
soil surface, the module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable soil bearing
pressure to be 3 ksf + (6' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 3.30 ksf.
Increases based on footing plan dimension: Provides a method to automatically
apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing
dimensions greater than some reference dimension. Collects the following
parameters:
allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of length or width
greater than some reference dimension.
472
When maximum length or width is greater than: Specifies the required

dimension in order to start realizing incremental increases in the allowable soil
bearing pressure on the basis of footing dimension.
Footing measures 12'-0" x 6'-0". The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf
increase in soil bearing pressure is allowed for each foot when the largest plan
dimension of the footing is greater than 4'. The module will automatically calculate the
adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (12' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 4.2 ksf.
Note: Increases based on footing depth and plan dimensions are cumulative.
Footing Dimensions
This tab is where you enter the footing and pedestal dimensions.
Width, Length & Thickness: defines the overall dimensions of the footing
Load Location: defines the offset from the center of the footing where the axial load is
applied. If a biaxial analysis is NOT being used, then only one direction can be used.
Pedestal dimensions: If a concrete pedestal bears on the footing, its dimensions can
be specified here. The px and pz dimensions are used to define the locations on all
four sides where one-way shear, two-way shear and bending moment are calculated.
If you enter a nonzero height, then you can choose to have the weight of that prism
calculated and added as dead load. Any applied overburden loads will be omitted from
the area defined as the pedestal dimension along the xx and yy axis, regardless of the
specified height of the prism.
Note: If no pedestal is defined, then the center of the footing will be treated as the face
of the pedestal when determining the critical locations to check shear and flexure.
Calculation Modules
473
Consider Pedestal Weight When Determining: This option allows the user to
specify whether or not the self-weight of the pedestal is to be considered when
determining the soil bearing pressure, and separately, whether or not the self-weight
of the pedestal is to be considered when performing the checks for sliding,
overturning, and uplift.
Footing Reinforcing
This tab allows you to specify the reinforcing in each direction of the footing.
Applied VERTICAL Loads

This tab allows you to specify the axial load applied to the pedestal location and an
overburden load applied to the entire plan dimension of the footing (except the area
designated as the pedestal).
Enter loads with a positive sign for downward direction.
Note! This module will not allow a net uplift on the footing. If the result of the factored axial
loads (dead, live, wind, etc) produces a negative load sign, the module will not recalculate
and will notify you of which load combination resulted in net uplift.
474
Applied BENDING Loads

This tab allows you to enter applied moments.
Applied SHEAR Loads

This tab allows you to enter applied shear forces. These loads are applied at the location of
the pedestal. If the pedestal is specified to have a height, the shear will be applied at that
height and will create a moment on the footing equal to Shear Load * (Footing Thickness +
Pedestal Height).
Calculation Modules
475
Load Combinations - Service

This is the typical load combination tab used throughout the Structural Engineering
Library. The Service Combinations tab is used to calculate soil pressures to be compared
to the allowable soil bearing pressure. The "Soil Increase" is a factor that can be specified
individually for each load combination and is applied to the allowable soil bearing pressure.
Load Combinations - Factored

This is the typical load combination tab used throughout the Structural Engineering
Library for strength design. These load combinations are used to calculate moments and
shears in the footing for use in determining stresses and required reinforcing.
Note: The General Footing module is applying the factored loads to the footing and
determining a different eccentricity than was determined using the service loads for the soil
bearing pressure check.
476
Results Tab
This tab provides a summary of all calculated values. The stress ratios, applied &
allowable values and load combination for those governing values are reported.
Soil Pressures Tab

This tab summarizes the calculated service load soil bearing pressure for moments &
shears applied about the specified axis, for each load combination.
Overturning Stability Tab

Calculation Modules
477
This tab provides the calculations for overturning and resisting moment stability of the
footing about each axis and for each load combination. Please note that the load
combinations used here are internally generated and are NOT from the Service Load
Combinations you have entered for the purpose of evaluating soil bearing pressures.
Note that the program is set up to look for overturning and resisting forces individually. For
example, take the situation where the footing is subjected to equal and opposite shears at
a given elevation. Common sense dictates that these forces cancel each other, and the
footing experiences no net applied overturning moment from them. But the program treats
one of the two equal and opposite forces as an overturning force, and the other as a
resisting force. So for these two forces, there IS a net overturning moment reported, but
the resisting moment ALSO considers the effect of the opposing load, so the accounting
used to determine the overturning ratio is proper.
Sliding Stability Tab

This tab provides the calculations for applied and resisting sliding stability of the footing in
each axis direction and for each load combination. Please note the load combinations
used here are internally generated and are NOT from the Service Load Combinations you
have entered for the purpose of evaluating soil bearing pressures.
Footing Bending Tab

This tab provides a summary of the calculated factored load moment at all four edges of
the pedestal perimeter for each load combination. It indicates whether the named load
combination produces tension on the top surface of the footing or the bottom.
478
Note: In cases where tension occurs on the top of the footing, the flexural check will be
based on the assumption that the defined rebar mat is provided on the top surface of the
footing. The user must review the results and determine if any load combinations actually
require a top mat of reinforcing, or if the footing could be reinforced with a bottom mat only.
Footing Shear Tab

This tab provides a summary of the calculated factored load shear at all four edges of the
pedestal perimeter for each load combination. Two-way or punching shear is also
calculated.
Sketch Tab
Calculation Modules
479
480
10.7.2 Combined Footing

This module provides analysis of a rectangular footing with two applied axial, moment and
shear loads. Overburden loads can also be specified, and will apply to the surface area of
the footing (except the areas covered by the two piers). The module allows you to position
the application of the pier loads as necessary, and provides automatic calculation of
allowable soil bearing pressure increases based on footing dimensions and/or depth below
surface.
The module checks service load soil pressure, overturning stability, sliding stability, uplift
stability, flexure left and right of each pedestal, 1-way shear at 'd' from each of the
pedestals, and punching shear along a perimeter located 'd/2' from the pedestal faces.
The module does not evaluate the footing for flexure about the Length axis.
General
f'c
fy
Ec
Calculation Modules
481

Concrete Density
The density of the concrete is used to calculate the self weight of the pedestals and
footing when those options are selected.
Phi Values
Include footing weight as dead load
Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the weight of the footing and apply it as a
downward load. The footing self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in
Include pedestal weight as dead load
Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the weight of the pedestals and apply it as
downward loads. The pedestal self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in
Min Steel Ratio - Temperature/Shrinkage
Enter the minimum ratio for temperature/shrinkage steel, calculated using the footing
thickness. This will trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced.
Minimum Overturning Safety Factor
Minimum Sliding Safety Factor
is not satisfied.
Soil Allowables
Allowable Soil Bearing
482
Enter the allowable soil bearing pressure that the soil can resist. This is a service load
resistance and will be compared to calculated service load soil pressures (loads not
factored as in strength design).
Increase Bearing by Footing Weight
footing and add it to the allowable soil bearing value. This has the effect of not
Soil Passive Sliding Resistance
calculations.
increases and soil passive sliding resistance, but it is not used in any other
of footing depth.
Calculation Modules
483
Increases based on footing plan dimension: Provides a method to automatically

apply increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing
dimensions greater than some reference dimension. Collects the following
parameters:
allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of width or length
greater than some reference dimension.
bearing pressure on the basis of footing dimension.
Footing measures 12'-0" x 6'-0". The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf
increase in soil bearing pressure is allowed for each foot when the largest plan
dimension of the footing is greater than 4'. The module will automatically calculate the
adjusted allowable soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (12' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 4.2 ksf.
Note: Increases based on footing depth and plan dimensions are cumulative.
Footing Size & Reinforcing

Dimensions tab
Projection on Left, Distance Between Columns, Projection on Right: Define the
dimensions of the footing in the Length direction.
Footing Width: Define the dimension of the Width direction.
Footing Thickness: Define the total thickness of the footing.
Pedestal dimensions: If concrete pedestals bear on the footing, their dimensions can
be specified here. Pedestals are assumed to be square, and they are assumed to be
centered on the Width dimension of the footing.
484
Note: Any applied overburden loads will be omitted from the area occupied by the
pedestals.
Reinforcing tab
Reinforcing parallel to the Length dimension can be defined separately for the left and
right projections of the footing and for the area between the columns. Input fields are
provided to define top bars and bottom bars separately.
Note: Bars are assumed to be fully developed at the locations where they are required.
It is the engineer's responsibility to validate that assumption. The program is not
taking rebar development length into consideration.
Applied Loads
The Applied Loads tab provides sub-tabs for Column #1 (the column on the left), Column
#2 (the column on the right), and Overburden. The two column load tabs offer input fields
for vertical loads, moment about the Width axis, and shear in the Length direction. The
Overburden tab provides input fields for a uniform vertical pressure that will be applied to
the entire surface area of the footing with the exception of the areas occupied by the
pedestals.
Calculation Modules
485
Load Combinations
The Load Combinations tab is used to specify the load combinations to be used in the
design. The Service Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to
perform the serviceability checks for Soil Bearing, Overturning, Sliding, and Uplift. The
Factored Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to perform the
strength checks for Flexure, One-Way Shear, and Two-Way Punching Shear.
These tabs allow the user to select from load combination sets that are supplied with the
program or to select from custom load combination sets that have been created and
saved on the user's machine. It is also possible to unlock the selected load combination
set and make edits to the factors directly in this view. The user has control over which
combinations are run and which are ignored. A Soil Increase factor can be applied on a
load combination by load combination basis, as permitted by the geotechnical engineering
report.
Finally, this tab allows the user to specify whether the program should consider the
algebraic sign of the specified load factors on wind loads and seismic loads to be
reversible or not. This can be a convenient way to ensure that these loads are investigated
as acting in both positive and negative directions, if that is the design intent. Note,
however, that if selected, the algebraic sign reversal will be applied to ALL wind loads and/
or ALL seismic loads including horizontally AND vertically applied loads.
486
Calculations
Results tab
This tab summarizes the controlling values (highest utilization ratio) for each design
consideration, from all of the load combinations that have been run. For the controlling
load combination, it presents the Applied load, the Capacity or available resisting load,
the ratio of the Applied to the Capacity, and the governing load combination that
produces this controlling ratio.
Soil Pressures tab

For each service load combination, this tab presents the total vertical load, the
resultant eccentricity, the soil pressures on the left and the right ends of the footing,
the allowable soil pressure, and the ratio of the actual to the allowable soil pressure.
Overturning & Sliding Stability tab

For each service load combination, this tab presents the overturning moment, the
resisting moment and the ratio of the resisting to overturning moment about the left
and right edges of the footing. It also reports the sliding force, the resisting force, and
the ratio of the resisting to sliding force.
Note that the program is set up to look for overturning and resisting forces individually.
For example, take the situation where the footing is subjected to equal and opposite
shears at a given elevation. Common sense dictates that these forces cancel each
other, and the footing experiences no net applied overturning moment from them. But
Calculation Modules
487
the program treats one of the two equal and opposite forces as an overturning force,
and the other as a resisting force. So for these two forces, there IS a net overturning
moment reported, but the resisting moment ALSO considers the effect of the
opposing load, so the accounting used to determine the overturning ratio is proper.
Footing Bending tab

This tab reports the results of the flexural design on a load combination by load
combination basis, at small increments along the length of the footing.
Footing Shear tab

This tab reports the results of the one-way and two-way shear design on a load
combination by load combination basis.
488
Sketch tab
This tab provides a plan view and a longitudinal section view of the footing with rebar
callouts and overall dimensions.
Calculation Modules
489
10.7.3 Wall Footing

This module provides analysis of a unit strip of a continuous wall footing with applied axial,
moment and shear loads. Overburden loads can also be specified, and will apply to the
surface area of the footing (except the area covered by the wall). The module also
provides automatic calculation of allowable soil bearing pressure increases based on
footing width and/or depth below surface.
The module checks service load soil pressure, overturning stability, sliding stability, uplift
stability, footing flexure and one-way footing shear.
General
This tab collects material property values, strength reduction factors, and other settings
that influence the design.
f'c
fy
Ec
490

Concrete Density
The density of the concrete is used to calculate the self weight of the footing when the
option is selected.
Phi Values
Include footing weight as dead load
Click [Yes] to have the module calculate the weight of the footing and apply it as a
downward load. The footing self weight will be multiplied by the dead load factor in
Min Steel Ratio - Temperature/Shrinkage Reinf.
Enter the minimum ratio for temperature/shrinkage steel, calculated using the footing
thickness. This will trigger a warning message if the section is under-reinforced.
Minimum Overturning Safety Factor
Minimum Sliding Safety Factor
is not satisfied.
Soil Allowables
Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure
Enter the allowable soil bearing pressure. This is a service load resistance and will be
compared to calculated service load soil pressures (loads not factored as in strength
design).
Increase Bearing by Footing Weight
Calculation Modules
491
footing and add it to the allowable soil bearing value. This has the effect of not
Soil Passive Sliding Resistance
calculations.
increases and soil passive sliding resistance, but it is NOT used in any other
of footing depth.
Increases based on footing width: Provides a method to automatically apply
increases to the basic allowable soil bearing pressure based on footing width greater
than some reference dimension. Collects the following parameters:
492
allowable soil bearing pressure can be increased for each foot of width greater
than some reference dimension.
bearing pressure on the basis of footing width.
Footing measures 6'-0" wide. The Geotechnical report specifies that a 0.15 ksf
increase in soil bearing pressure is allowed for each foot when the width of the footing
is greater than 4'-0". The module will automatically calculate the adjusted allowable
soil bearing pressure to be 3 ksf + (6' - 4') * 0.15 ksf = 3.3 ksf.
Note: Increases based on footing depth and width are cumulative.
Footing Size & Reinforcing

Dimensions tab
Footing Width: Define the width of the footing.
Wall Width: Define the width of the supported wall.
Wall center offset from footing centerline: Define the dimension between the
centerline of the wall and the centerline of the footing. Positive offsets shift the wall
toward the right edge of the footing.
Footing Thickness: Define the thickness of the footing.
Auto Calculate Footing Size & Thickness: Provides an automated routine to
increase footing dimensions until soil pressures are satisfied and one-way shear is
acceptable.
Note: Any applied overburden loads will be omitted from the area occupied by the wall.
Calculation Modules
493
Reinforcing tab
Reinforcing Bar Size: Indicate the rebar size to consider for the bars that run
parallel to the footing width.
Rebar Spacing: Provides an option to either specify an explicit value for the rebar
spacing, or to specify the number of bars in a 12-inch length.
Rebar Center to Concrete Edge @ Bottom: Specify the clear cover plus 1/2 the
diameter of the rebar.
Applied Loads
Vertical Loads tab
Provides input fields for vertical loads and overburden pressures. Vertical loads are
specified in units of kips per foot, and they are considered to act at the center of the
width of the wall. Overburden loads are specified in units of kips per square foot, and
they are considered to act on the top surface area of the footing, excluding the area
occupied by the wall.
494
Moments & Shears tab

Provides input fields for moments and shears. Moments are specified in units of foot
kips per foot. Shears are specified in units of kips per foot, and they are considered to
act at the height specified in the field named Shear application above top of
footing. Shears will produce a moment equal to the shear force times the distance
from the bottom of the footing to the location of application of the shear force.
Load Combinations
The Load Combinations tab is used to specify the load combinations to be used in the
design. The Service Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to
perform the serviceability checks for Soil Bearing, Overturning, Sliding, and Uplift. The
Factored Combinations tab controls the load combinations that are used to perform the
strength checks for Flexure and One-Way Shear.
These tabs allow the user to select from load combination sets that are supplied with the
program or to select from custom load combination sets that have been created and
saved on the user's machine. It is also possible to unlock the selected load combination
set and make edits to the factors directly in this view.
The user has control over which combinations are run and which are ignored. A Soil
Increase factor can be applied on a load combination by load combination basis, as
Calculation Modules
495
permitted by the geotechnical engineering report. Finally, this tab allows the user to
specify whether the program should consider the algebraic sign of the specified load
factors on wind loads and seismic loads to be reversible or not. This can be a convenient
way to ensure that these loads are investigated as acting in both positive and negative
directions, if that is the design intent. Note, however, that if selected, the algebraic sign
reversal will be applied to ALL wind loads and/or ALL seismic loads including horizontally
AND vertically applied loads.
Calculations
Results tab
This tab summarizes the controlling values (highest utilization ratio) for each design
consideration, from all of the load combinations that have been run. For the controlling
load combination, it presents the Applied load, the Capacity or available resisting load,
the ratio of the Applied to the Capacity, and the governing load combination that
produces this controlling ratio.
Soil Pressures tab

For each service load combination, this tab presents the total vertical load, the
resultant eccentricity, the soil pressures on the left and the right ends of the footing,
the allowable soil pressure, and the ratio of the actual to the allowable soil pressure.
496
Overturning & Sliding Stability tab

For each service load combination, this tab presents the overturning moment, the
resisting moment and the ratio of the resisting to overturning moment about the left
and right edges of the footing.
It also reports the sliding force, the resisting force, and the ratio of the resisting to
sliding force.
Footing Bending tab

This tab reports the results of the flexural design on a load combination by load
combination basis.
Calculation Modules
Footing Shear tab

This tab reports the results of the shear design on a load combination by load
combination basis.
Sketch tab
This tab presents plan and section views of the footing:
497
498
10.7.4 Pile Group

This module considers a concentrated load applied to a rigid pile cap and distributes it to a
group of piles. Force distribution is performed assuming a rigid pile cap and that all piles
have equal vertical load resistance.
Distribution of loads to each pile due to the effect of load eccentricity is determined using a
skew bending analysis. This considers simultaneous action about both X and Y axes.
The module is also an efficient method for determining loads on a pile group in the asdriven arrangement.
General Tab
Calculation Modules
499
NOTE! Establish an X & Y Coordinate system prior to entering pile and load
locations. Module requires a 2-dimensional pile group to be defined. It will not
report results for a collinear group, i.e. a single line of piles.
Total Applied Axial Load
Enter the total vertical load to be distributed to the piles in the pile group using the
coordinate system you have defined.
Note: Only vertical loads are allowed; no lateral shears.
X & Y Distance to Load
Enter the distance from the X & Y datum (0,0) to the location of the applied vertical
load.
Number of Piles
This entry defines the number of piles in the group. As you change the number of
piles, the number of data entry locations will match the specified number of piles.
Pile Locations: distance from Datum to the pile
Enter the distance from the X & Y datum (0,0) to the center of each pile location.
Load Combination to use
This selection will switch the load combinations shown on the Load Combinations tab
between Service and Factored design combinations.
This tab allows you to specify the load combinations to be considered.
500
Results Tab
This tab summarizes the overall calculated values for the pile group and lists the
maximum factored load for each pile and the load combination that produced the
maximum load.
Detailed Results Tab

This tab gives the detailed calculations for each pile for each load combination. It
indicates the Direct force as well as the component of axial load that is due to the net
moment applied to the entire group. This latter effect will be observed for any pile that
is located at a distance from the center of gravity of the pile group.
Calculation Modules
Sketch Tab
501
502
10.7.5 Pole Footing Embedded in Soil

This module determines actual soil pressures and required depths for pole footings
primarily supporting lateral loads. Such footings are commonly called "flagpole footings".
Pole Footing Embedded in Soil
Since applied top moment generates lateral soil pressures that usually govern the design,
these footings typically have a depth/width ratio of 2:1 and greater.
Cases with and without lateral restraint at the ground surface are allowed. Evaluation of
actual and allowable pressures is in accordance with the IBC Section entitled "Embedded
posts and poles".
General Data Tab
Calculation Modules
503
Pole Footing Shape

Use this section to specify whether the pole is round or rectangular (assumed
square).
Footing Width/Diameter
Enter the width or diameter of the pole footing. Width is measured perpendicular to
force direction. If the pole is specified as rectangular, the module will multiply the value
entered for footing width 1.41 to determine an equivalent width dimension for
calculations.
Restraint at Ground Surface
Specify whether the footing is free at the ground surface or restrained and cannot
translate. A restrained footing indicates that a concrete slab or other rigid element
prevents translation of the pole footing at the ground surface, but does not prevent
rotation. When specifying a restrained footing, you must assure yourself that the final
force required to provide the restraint can actually be developed by the restraining
construction.
When ground surface restraint is present, the lateral pressure value at the bottom of
the pole will govern the design.
Operation Mode
This setting provides an option to select from two different modes of operation as
follows:
Calculate Minimum Depth: In this mode, the module will iterate to determine the
minimum embedment depth required to make the actual lateral soil pressure lower
than the allowable soil pressure.
Find Lateral Pressure for Given Depth: In this mode, the module will calculate the
lateral earth pressures caused by the specified pole size, embedment depth and
applied loads. When this option is selected, a Pole Footing Embedment Depth input
field will appear as shown below:
504
Allowable Pressure Limit

Two options are provided as indicated below:
Limit only by "Max. Passive": Solves for a design that allows the passive pressure
to approach the value specified in the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure field below
(limited to the value specified in the Maximum Lateral Pressure Limit field).
Example: Assume allowable lateral passive pressure is 200 psf/ft with an upper limit
of 3000 psf.
When the Limit only by "Max. Passive" option is selected, the solution will progress
as follows:
The program will start with a shallow assumed depth and calculate the 1/3
embedment depth.
Then it will calculate an allowable lateral passive pressure for that 1/3 embedment
depth.
Next, the program will compare this calculated allowable lateral passive pressure
value to the specified upper limit on the allowable passive pressure and select the
smaller of the two.
The IBC formula is then used to determine the actual pressure for the assumed
embedment depth.
If the actual pressure is higher than the allowable pressure, the program increments
the length and repeats the above process.
For illustration, assume that the iterations have progressed to the point where the
embedment depth is now 42 feet.
The program will calculate the 1/3 embedment depth as (42 feet / 3) = 14 feet.
Then it will calculate an allowable lateral passive pressure of (200 psf/ft * 14 ft) =
2800 psf.
value to the specified upper limit on the allowable passive pressure and determine
that 2800 psf < 3000 psf, therefore it will use 2800 psf as the Allowable Lateral
Calculation Modules
505
Passive Pressure.
When the program finds an embedment depth for which the actual pressure is
lower than the allowable pressure, it rounds the embedment depth up slightly and
reports that value.
Use limit of 12 ft (per IBC): Solves for a design that achieves a passive pressure
that does not exceed the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure, where the Allowable
Lateral Passive Pressure is calculated based on 1/3 of the embedment depth but not
to exceed 12 feet (and limited to the value specified in the Maximum Lateral Pressure
Limit field).
Example: Assume allowable lateral passive pressure is 200 psf/ft with an upper limit
of 3000 psf.
When the Use limit of 12 ft (per IBC) option is selected, the solution will progress as
follows:
The program will start with a shallow assumed depth and calculate the 1/3
embedment depth.
Next, it will compare the 1/3 embedment depth to 12 feet and base the allowable
lateral passive pressure calculation on the smaller of the two.
value to the specified upper limit on the allowable passive pressure and select the
smaller of the two.
The IBC formula is then used to determine the actual pressure for the assumed
embedment depth.
If the actual pressure is higher than the allowable pressure, the program increments
the length and repeats the above process.
For illustration, assume that the iterations have progressed to the point where the
embedment depth is now 42 feet.
The program will calculate the 1/3 embedment depth as (42 feet / 3) = 14 feet.
Next, it will compare the 1/3 embedment depth to 12 feet and determine that 14 feet
> 12 feet, therefore it will base the allowable lateral passive pressure calculation on
12 feet.
Then it will calculate an allowable lateral passive pressure of (200 psf/ft * 12 ft) =
2400 psf.
value to the specified upper limit on the allowable passive pressure and determine
that 2400 psf < 3000 psf, therefore it will use 2400 psf as the Allowable Lateral
Passive Pressure.
When the program finds an embedment depth for which the actual pressure is
lower than the allowable pressure, it rounds the embedment depth up slightly and
reports that value.
Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure
The allowable lateral passive pressure that the soil can withstand. This value is
entered as pounds per square foot per foot of embedment depth.
506
Maximum Lateral Pressure Limit

This value is used to specify an upper limit on the Allowable Lateral Passive Pressure,
so that it does not increase in an uncontrolled manner as the embedment depth
increases. This value is entered as pounds per square foot.
Applied Loads Tab
This module allows many types of loads to be applied to a pole footing embedded in
soil.
Lateral Concentrated Loads
Module allows one concentrated load with various load types to be applied at a
specified distance above the surface of the soil.
Lateral Distributed Loads
You can apply a uniform lateral load to the pole by specifying the magnitude of the load
and the starting and ending locations.
Applied Moments
You can apply a concentrated moment. No "height" entry is required, because it is
purely a rotational force.
Vertical Load
You can also apply a vertical load so that the module can calculate the vertical bearing
load on the footing for each load combination.

Use this tab to specify the load combinations you want the module to analyze.
Calculation Modules
507
Results Tab
The results tab provides a summary of the calculations.
The table reports the resulting forces, moments and required depth for each load
combination.
The Controlling Values area provides information for the most severe load combination.
Sketch Tab
508
Calculation Modules
10.7.6 Beam on Elastic Foundation

See Beam on Elastic Foundation
296
in the Beams section.
509
510
10.8
2-D Frame Analysis

This module provides force & deflection analysis, steel member stress analysis and wood
stress analysis for two dimensional frames. Click here for the first in a series of videos:
2-D Frame Analysis Intro
The frame you create can be general in nature...the module is not limited to trusses or
frames with rigid connections. You have the ability to specify the connection between all
members in terms of axial, shear and bending restraints or releases.
Here are the highlights of this module:
Use the Frame Wizard to automatically create common trusses and frames.
Generic joint & member method of specifying the geometry of the frame.
Completely flexible way to specify how the X, Y & Z degrees of freedom for joints are
connected to the earth and how the members are connected to the joints (three degrees
of freedom are available at each end of each member).
Apply forces and moments directly to joints. You can also specify joint start
temperatures.
All loads can have dead, live, roof live, snow, wind, seismic and earth types.
Apply concentrated and distributed loads to beams. These loads can be Global or local
in direction and can be applied as forces, moments or temperature changes.
Members are easily linked to section properties. For stress analysis you can set
unbraced length, slenderness factors, Cb & Cm for members.
Loads and members can be deactivated for quick modeling of alternatives.
Complete AISC and NDS section databases are available.
Specify material properties used by sections.
Specify an extensive set of load combinations.
Complete graphics of frame with deflected shapes.
Complete stress & deflection diagrams of members individually.
Extensive reporting capability and control.
Module uses beam elements and a very fast matrix solver. With each change of the
input data, the frame can be completely recalculated in an instant. (For convenience with
large models or when running many load combinations, this module has been enhanced
with the ability to turn the Automatic Recalculation feature off, and to trigger manual
recalculations only when desired.)
Note: This module is intended to be a simple alternative to complex frame programs. The
intent is to provide a simple and fast tool to perform simple indeterminate analysis &
member design. No P-Delta effects, exotic elements, or non-linear analysis will ever be
added to this module.
Calculation Modules
Program Limitations
Maximum Number of Allowed:
511
512
Calculation Modules
513
514
Calculation Modules
515
10.8.1 Frame Wizard

Overview
The Frame Wizard can create complete 2D Frame models for many typical framing
configurations and truss layouts with just a few simple inputs.
The Frame Wizard is also especially helpful when you are just beginning to use this
module and want to learn about how to specify joint end restraints and member end
releases.
Types of Models the Frame Wizard Can Generate
Pratt Truss
Warren Truss
Vierendeel Truss
Howe Truss
Inverted Warren Truss
Single Bay 3-Member Frame
Continuous Member
516
Multi-Bay One Story Frame
Multi-Story Single Bay Frame
Multi-Story Frame
Please send additional requests to support@enercalc.com.
Example: Using the Frame Wizard to create a Pratt Truss

Creating a truss with the Frame Wizard is extremely simple. Just start by selecting
[Pratt] and clicking [Next].
Calculation Modules
517
The screen you see below will be displayed.
Simply enter the overall length and height of the truss and the number of panels the
truss will have. The sample image shown has 6 panels.
The next entries allow you to easily specify a member size for the three main
members that are typically the same on a truss like this (Verticals, Horizontals, and
Diagonals).
The button to the right of each data entry area provides access to the built-in section
database in the Structural Engineering Library.
518
If you DO specify a database section, all of the associated section properties will be
brought into the frame model for you.
If you DO NOT specify a database section, then the members will be assigned a
name of "Vertical", "Diagonal" or "Chord" as a section group. Then all you need to do
is enter property values for those three sections.
To finish just click [Finish]. The model will be instantly created.
Example: Using the Frame Wizard to create a Continuous Beam
The Frame Wizard is an extremely efficient way to model a continuous beam. Just
start by selecting [Continuous Member] and then click [Next].
The screen you see below will be displayed:
Calculation Modules
519
Note: This wizard allows just one beam to be entered BUT you can easily change that
beam specification for each span after the model is built.
Enter the Number of Spans first.
The next entry allows you to easily specify a member section name. The button to the
right of each data entry area provides access to the built-in section database in the
If you DO specify a database section, all of the associated section properties will be
brought into the continuous beam model for you.
If you DO NOT specify a database section then the members will be assigned a
name of "Beam" as a section group. Then all you need to do is enter property values
for that section.
For specification of span lengths you can either use [Equal Spacing]:
-or- [Specify Spacing] which allows you to enter the span lengths for each span.
Then just click [Finish], and the model will be instantly created.
520
10.8.2 Joints & Joint Loads

Joints are the points in space where members are interconnected. Members can ONLY
connect to another member or the boundary by first connecting to a joint.
IMPORTANT: See JOINT RESTRAINTS below.
Joints & Loads Tab
This tab contains two sub-tabs that allow you to specify joints and loads applied to the
joints.
Note: The data entered into this module is linked by a database system. The effects of this
linking can be seen in the screen capture seen below. Notice that the table in the upper
half of the view lists available joints for which Joint Data can be viewed. As a result of the
data linking, selecting Joint #1 in the upper table automatically causes the lower table to
display a list of members connected to Joint #1.
Automatic Joint Generation

You can use the [Generate] button to have joints automatically generated. The joint
Calculation Modules
521
generation popup is self explanatory....just select from the mode of generation, specify a
label increment, the number of joints to generate, and the x and y distance increments to
use. The "Grid Irregular X & Y" can generate some very complex joint layouts.
Another powerful tool is the Also Generate Members option, which will generate members
to interconnect between the joints for the generation grid or arc/circle you have specified.
JOINT RESTRAINTS
These interconnections are extremely important, and when set incorrectly, they lead to the
majority of the instabilities and other unexpected results when using this 2-D Frame
Analysis module. The connections between members and the connections to "ground"
have a significant effect on structural behavior, and as such, they warrant a thorough
discussion and complete understanding. Always keep in mind the following concepts
related to joint boundary restraints and the end releases of the member(s) connecting to
the joint:
Joints have Degrees of Freedom (DOF) associated with them.
In the 2-D Frame Analysis program, each joint has two translational and one rotational
DOF.
An individual DOF may be restrained or released.
DOF can be defined as Boundary Restraints or as Member End Releases.
When the degrees of freedom are defined as Boundary Restraints, they are defined with
respect to the global coordinate axis system.
When the degrees of freedom are defined as Member End Releases, they are defined
with respect to the member local coordinate axis system.
The term Degrees of Freedom refers to the capability of a joint to move in the X and Y
522
direction and to rotate about the Z axis.

An X Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global X direction.
A Y Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global Y direction.
A Z Restraint prevents a joint from rotating about the Global Z axis.
Please see the diagram below for a brief primer on joint restraints and member releases.
The dark black items define the joint restraints. Joint restraints attach the joint to the
boundary. The boundary is an infinitely stiff support and is most commonly called earth.
When a joint is restrained against translation in the X and Y directions and against rotation
about the Z axis, it is held firmly in place. Any forces or moments applied to it will result in
a reaction which is the boundary applying a force to the joint to keep it from moving in a
particular direction.
THE MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: Each joint must be prevented from
moving in/rotating about each of its three degrees of freedom, either by a joint restraint or
by a positive connection to member. If a joint can translate or rotate in an unrestrained
manner, then it is unstable.
NEXT MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: When a joint restraint is
specified, then any connected members that are not released in that particular direction
will not deflect in that direction. If a joint has an "X" restraint and a member framing into that
joint does not have an "X" release, then the member is actually rigidly connected to the
boundary through the joint.
ALSO IMPORTANT: When you are modeling a frame, nearly all joints will be free from the
boundary. This means that those joints will need to have their X, Y & Z degrees of freedom
restrained by a connection to one or more members. Because members can only attach
to each other through a joint, this is usually handled by virtue of the member having all
three degrees of freedom "fixed" at its ends. BUT FOR TRUSS CONNECTIONS, THIS
CAN CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH THE "Z" rotational degree of freedom. For truss models
(where moments are not applied to nodes), it may be easier to achieve stability for all joints
by declaring all joints as "fixed" against rotation about the Z-axis, and then "pinning" both
ends of all members to prevent the transfer of moment from one member to another.
Calculation Modules
523
10.8.2.1 Joint Data
Joint Data Tab

This tab is where you add and edit the joints that define the member interconnections for
the frame.
524
Joint Label
The label for a joint can be up to 25 characters long. They are CASE INSENSITIVE
meaning the module internally converts all joint names to all lower case for internal
usage.
Location
This is the X and Y location of the joint in a Cartesian coordinate system.
Boundary Restraints
These specify how the joint is connected to the boundary. The boundary is an infinitely
rigid item and is typically earth. See the Joints & Joint Loads 520 topic for more
information.
When you click on these items (or use [Tab] to move between them) the entry turns
into a drop-down list box with the available selections.
Temperature
Calculation Modules
525
This specifies the base temperature for the joint. It is only used when you are defining
temperature loads for the members.
[+Add Joint]
Prompts you for the label to assign to the newly added joint. Joint labels can be up to
25 characters long.
[- Delete Joint]
Deletes the highlighted joint after your confirmation. Keep in mind that members
depend upon joints for connectivity. So if there are any members connected to a joint,
the members will be deleted if the joint is deleted. Any joint loads that were assigned to
a joint will also be deleted if the joint is deleted.
Generate
See bottom of this section.
Joint Sketch/Full Frame Sketch
The Joint Sketch displays a graphic representation of the individual joint that is
currently selected in the list of joints. The Full Frame Sketch displays a graphic
representation of the entire model with the currently selected joint highlighted for easy
recognition.
Editing Joint Information
Click on any data item when the joint list first appears, and the list will switch into an editing
mode. See the image below where we have clicked on the "X Loc" for joint 1.
526
You can type in a numeric value or use the "spin" buttons to change the value by a fixed
decimal amount.
To finish the entry either press [Tab], [Enter] or click on another data item in the list.
When your entry is completed the entire frame will be recalculated if the Auto
Calculate option is selected.
Automatic Joint Generation
You can use the [Generate] button to initiate the automatic generation of joints. Just select
from the mode of generation, and you can specify the label and the x and y distance
increments to use. The "Grid Irregular X & Y" can generate some very complex joint
layouts.
Another powerful tool is the Also Generate Members option, which will generate members
to interconnect the joints for the generation grid or arc/circle you have specified.
Calculation Modules
527
10.8.2.2 Joint Loads & Results
Joint Loads & Results Tab

This tab provides the input locations for all loads applied to the joints in the frame EXCEPT
member self weights.
This tab is divided into three sections:
Select Joint: list is where you select the joint for which you wish to modify loads. This
selection controls what is visible in the other two lists.
Applied Loads for Joint: is where you build and edit the loads applied to that joint
Calculated Results for Joint: displays the calculated displacements and reactions for
the joint selected in the Select Joint list.
The only list that can be edited is the Applied Loads for Joint list.
528
Adding & Deleting Loads

To add a joint load just click the [Add Load] button and a new load entry line will be added
at the bottom of the list for the currently selected joint.
To delete a load just click on the load line you wish to delete and click the [Delete Load]
button.
Editing Joint Load Information
Click on any data item in the joint load list, and it will switch into an editing mode. See the
image below where we have clicked on the Dead load column in the first line in the list of
loads associated with joint 1.
decimal amount.
Calculation Modules
529
To finish the entry either press [Tab], [Enter] or click on another data item in the list.
When your entry is completed the entire frame will be recalculated if the Auto
Calculate option is selected.
Note: If a load is applied in the same direction that a Joint Restraint is specified, that load will
immediately be "absorbed" by the joint restraint, so it will not have any effect on the frame.
530
10.8.3 Members & Member Loads

"Member" is the generic term that describes the beams, columns, struts, braces,
diagonals, hangers, and other structural entities that make up the frame. This module uses
a general stiffness matrix approach to solve for forces and deflections. Members are
modeled by one-dimensional (length-only) entities that offer resistance to axial loads,
bending moment about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the frame, and shear forces
acting in the plane of the frame.
Members & Loads Tab
Member End Releases

These interconnections lead to the greatest potential for instabilities and other unexpected
effects from the use of the 2-D module. The connections between members and the
connections to "ground" have a significant effect on structural behavior, and as such, they
warrant a thorough discussion and complete understanding. Always keep in mind the
following concepts related to joint boundary restraints and the end releases of the
member(s) connecting to the joint:
Joints have Degrees of Freedom (DOF) associated with them.
In the 2-D Frame Analysis program, each joint has two translational and one rotational
DOF.
Calculation Modules
531
An individual DOF may be restrained or released.

DOF can be defined as Boundary Restraints or as Member End Releases.
When the degrees of freedom are defined as Boundary Restraints, they are defined with
respect to the global coordinate axis system.
When the degrees of freedom are defined as Member End Releases, they are defined
with respect to the member local coordinate axis system.
The term Degrees of Freedom refers to the capability of a joint to move in the X and Y
direction and to rotate about the Z axis.
An X Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global X direction.
A Y Restraint prevents a joint from moving in the Global Y direction.
A Z Restraint prevents a joint from rotating about the Global Z axis.
Please see the diagram below for a brief primer on joint restraints and member releases.
The dark black items define the joint restraints. Joint restraints attach the joint to the
boundary. The boundary is an infinitely stiff support and is most commonly called earth.
When a joint is restrained against translation in the X and Y directions and against rotation
about the Z axis, it is held firmly in place. Any forces or moments applied to it will result in
a reaction which is the boundary applying a force to the joint to keep it from moving in a
particular direction.
THE MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: Each joint must be prevented from
moving in/rotating about each of its three degrees of freedom, either by a joint restraint or
by a positive connection to member. If a joint can translate or rotate in an unrestrained
manner, then it is unstable.
NEXT MOST IMPORTANT PIECE OF INFORMATION: When a joint restraint is
specified, then any connected members that are not released in that particular direction
will not deflect in that direction. If a joint has an "X" restraint and a member framing into that
joint does not have an "X" release, then the member is actually rigidly connected to the
boundary through the joint.
ALSO IMPORTANT: When you are modeling a frame, nearly all joints will be free from the
boundary. This means that those joints will need to have their X, Y & Z degrees of freedom
restrained by a connection to one or more members. Because members can only attach
to each other through a joint, this is usually handled by virtue of the member having all
three degrees of freedom "fixed" at its ends. BUT FOR TRUSS CONNECTIONS, THIS
CAN CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH THE "Z" rotational degree of freedom. For truss models
(where moments are not applied to nodes), it may be easier to achieve stability for all joints
by declaring all joints as "fixed" against rotation about the Z-axis, and then "pinning" both
ends of all members to prevent the transfer of moment from one member to another.
532
10.8.3.1 Member Data
Member Data Tab

Members always span between two joints. The Member End Conditions tell the module
how each of the three degrees of freedom at each end of the member are attached to the
Calculation Modules
533
joint. To connect two members rigidly together you must specify the two connecting ends
as "fixed" conditions for all three degrees of freedom. That locks each beam end to the
joint.
For each member you can specify the section to use for its properties, and values to be
used when stress analysis is performed (unbraced length, slenderness factor, Cm and
Cb).
You can also set the member to be inactive to test force distributions and stresses for
alternate framing conditions.
Editing Member Information
Click on any data item when the member list first appears, and the list will switch into an
editing mode. See the image below where we have clicked on the "X" degree of freedom
for the I: end of member 1-2.
decimal amount.
To finish the entry, either press [Tab], [Enter] or click on another data item in the list.
534
Note: Each column in the Member Data table can have its own type of editing mode. The
Active column turns into a checkbox for yes/no selections. The Section Name column
turns into a button so you can select or add a section from the Section list. See
descriptions for each item below.
Adding & Deleting Members
To add a member click the [Add Member] button. You will be prompted for three pieces of
information:
1) A label for the member.
2) The member's "I" joint number.
3) The member's "J" joint number.
In the screen capture below you will notice a button to the right of the joint label entries.
Just click in the "I" or "J" joint entry and click the [Lookup Joints] button
.
This will display a window where you can scroll through the list of created joints and select
one. Simply click on one of the listed joints and then click [Select].
To delete a member, select the member and click [Delete Member]. After you approve
Calculation Modules
535
the deletion, that member and all loads applied to that member will be deleted.
Generating Members
You can use the [Generate] button to initiate the automatic generation of members. This
is a simple process that automates member creation by generating members between
existing nodes in the specified order.
Note: This tool will generate new members, but it will not generate new nodes.
Detailed Item Descriptions (see 2 screen captures below)

Member Label
This label can be any combination of letters and numbers. It is common to use
numbers for joints and letters for members, but a very convenient member labeling
convention is to use the I and J joint numbers separated by a dash. So the member
between joint 5 and 12 would be labeled "5-12".
The member label can ONLY be specified when Adding the member. After that point,
the name can't be changed unless the member is deleted and added again.
Active
This item is a yes/no selection. When you click on it or [Tab] to it, the entry changes to
a checkbox. When the box is checked, the member will be considered active,
meaning that it will contribute stiffness to the model. When the box is not checked, the
member will be considered inactive, meaning that it will be ignored in the analysis and
will not contribute stiffness to the model.
536
Section Name
This establishes what section is to be used for that member. When you click on it or
[Tab] to it, the entry changes to a button labeled Lookup.
When you click the [Lookup] button, a selection window appears as shown below:
On this window you can scroll through the sections you have already added to the
Calculation Modules
537
section list.
Note that the sections are listed with both Section labels and Group labels. A Group
label is used when you want to have more than one member have the same section
properties. In the screen capture above, notice that there are groups named "Chord",
"Diagonal", and "Vertical", all of which have the same section assigned to them. This
offers two convenient benefits:
First, it provides a handy way to manage multiple sets of members, some of which
may have the same section.
Second, by assigning a group name to the appropriate members in the model, it is
possible to change the AISC or NDS section assigned to all members of that group
by simply assigning a new section to the group, rather than having to assign the new
section to many individual members.
The [+Add Section] button provides access to the built-in section property databases.
It displays the screen below, which allows you to either type in a typical section name
or click a button and display the database to select the desired section from the
database.
Joints
These two columns let you specify and change the i and j end joints of a member.
When you click on these columns, the entry will change to a [Lookup] button as
shown below:
Clicking that button displays a window where you can scroll through the joint list and
click to identify the desired joint.
538
I & J End Conditions

These six columns allow you to specify how the ends of the member are attached to
the joints. When you click on or [Tab] to one of these columns, the entry will change to
a drop-down list box offering appropriate fixity options:
In order to most efficiently describe the I & J End Conditions, it helps to introduce the
concept of the member local axis system. Each member can be thought of as having
its own x, y, and z coordinate axes that are mutually perpendicular and follow the righthand rule. The orientation of the member local axes can be determined as follows:
Calculation Modules
539
1. The local x axis is always parallel to a vector from the "I" node to the "J" node.
(This axis is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the member.)
2. The local z axis is always parallel to the Global Z axis and points out of the plane
of the screen.
3. The local y axis can be found by taking the vector cross product of local z cross
local x. (Envision using the right hand to rotate the local z axis into the local x axis,
and the right thumb will automatically indicate the positive direction of the local y
axis.)
Note: It is important to understand that I & J End Conditions are defined with respect to
the member local axes, not the Global axis system.
A "Fixed" status for a particular end of a member, for a particular degree of freedom
(X, Y or Z) means that end of the member is locked to the joint for that degree of
freedom. A "Free" or "Pinned" status means that end of the member is disconnected
from the joint for that degree of freedom. Here are some examples:
X, Y, Z Setting
Fixed, Fixed, Fixed
Fixed, Fixed, Pinned
Fixed, Free, Fixed
How it will work

The member is locked to the joint. If this joint was
completely restrained to the boundary, then this end
of the member would have an X and Y force reaction
and a Z moment reaction.
The member is locked to the joint in its local X and Y
directions, meaning that this end of the member
cannot translate with respect to the joint, however,
this end of the member is free to rotate independently
of the joint about the member's local Z axis (which is
always parallel to the Global Z axis).
The member is locked to the joint with respect to
translation in the local X axis direction. It is
disconnected from the joint with respect to
translation in the local Y axis direction. It is locked to
the joint with respect to rotation about the member's
local Z axis.
If this member is oriented horizontally, then this
combination of end conditions could be thought of as
a vertical roller. When a member is in the horizontal
orientation, its member local axes are parallel to the
corresponding Global axes. Therefore, the fixed
condition in the local X axis direction means that this
end of this horizontal member cannot move left or
right in the Global X direction. The free condition in
the local Y direction means that this end of this
horizontal member is free to move up and down in
the Global Y direction. Finally, the fixed condition
about the local Z axis means that this end of the
member is fixed against rotation about the local Z
axis, which is parallel to the Global Z axis.
540
Along the bottom of the list is a set of buttons that allows you to quickly set the Z-axis
rotation end conditions. Clicking one of these buttons will set the end releases for both
ends of the member that is currently selected in the list.
NOTE! A truss connection is unique. You must look at the joint where the truss
members intersect. If they are all free to rotate, you will set the "X" and "Y" conditions
of all member ends at that joint to "Fixed". And for all "Z" conditions you will set them to
"Pinned" so they can rotate freely. For that joint you will set its "X" and "Y" restraint to
"Free" (assuming it is not a support location) and set its "Z" restraint to "Fixed", so that
the joint will be stable.
Length
This value is automatically calculated for you from the distance between the I and J
joints.
Unbraced Length
Enter the unbraced compression edge length that should be used for allowable stress
analysis of this member. Entering a "-1" means to use the full length of the member.
Any other number (0.00 or greater) is used as the unbraced length. Note that the
unbraced length can be assigned a value that is greater than the node-to-node length
of a member.
Lu-y is used as the unbraced compression edge length for flexural design. It is also
used in K-y * Lu-y to define the unbraced length for column buckling in the y direction
(buckling about the z axis of the member).
Lu-z is used in Kz * Lu-z to define the unbraced length for column buckling in the z
direction (buckling about the y axis of the member).
Slenderness
This entry is a simple multiplier to be applied to the Unbraced Length you have
entered.
Cm & Cb
You can specify these values for use in allowable stress calculations.
Calculation Modules
541
Default Member Orientation

Based on the concept of the member local axis system introduced above, it is now
meaningful to describe the default orientation of the various sections that can be
assigned to a member in a 2-D Frame Analysis model. Of most interest is the default
orientation of steel sections. When a steel section is assigned to a member, it will be
assumed to be oriented as shown in the following diagram, which references the
member local Z axis, the axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the model by default:
10.8.3.2 Member Loads
Member Loads Tab

This tab provides the input locations for all loads applied to the frame EXCEPT joint loads
and member self weights. This module can automatically generate member self weight
loads using Member Self Wt item in the load combination lists.
This tab contains three lists and one graphic area.
Select Member: lists all members in the model. This is where you click to select a
member for which to add/delete/modify loads. This selection controls what is visible on the
other two lists and in the graphic image at the bottom. The column labeled # Lds indicates
the number and type of loads that have been applied to each member. "P" represents a
point load, and "D" is for distributed loads. "1-P, 2-D" means that the member has one
point load and two distributed loads applied to it.
Point Loads for Member X: shows the point loads that are applied to the selected
member.
Distributed Loads for Member X: shows the distributed loads that are applied to the
selected member.
At the bottom is a sketch showing the member and applied loads for reference.
542
When you click on any item in the two load entry lists, that location in the list will change
into a data entry item. The columns in the list have their own specific entry types that will
be described below.
Point Loads Entry List
Active
This is a Yes/No checkbox that allows you to turn the load on and off. This is useful
when you want to quickly see the effect of removing the load without actually having to
delete the load and then potentially have to redefine the load at a later time.
Direction
This specifies the direction of application of the load. Here is a description of each
direction:
Calculation Modules
543
Global X: This point load acts in a direction parallel to the Global X Axis. Entering a
positive value will apply the load to the right (in the positive X direction).
Global Y: This point load acts in a direction parallel to the Global Y Axis. The algebraic
sign on the magnitude will affect the direction of application based on the Applied
Global Y Load Sign Convention setting on the General tab as follows:
When the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention is set to "Global +Y Loads act
towards +Y (Upward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a positive
algebraic sign act upward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction with a
negative algebraic sign act downward.
towards -Y (Downward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a
positive algebraic sign act downward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction
with a negative algebraic sign act upward.
In order to most efficiently describe the direction of application of the "Local" load
types, it helps to refer to the member local axis system. Each member can be thought
of as having its own x, y, and z coordinate axes that are mutually perpendicular and
follow the right-hand rule. The orientation of the member local axes can be determined
as follows:
2. The local z axis is always parallel to the Global Z axis.
local x. (Envision using the right hand to rotate the local z axis into the local x
axis, and the right thumb will automatically indicate the positive direction of the
local y axis.)
Local x: This point load acts parallel to the member's local x axis. If this load is
specified with a positive magnitude, the load will act in the positive direction of the local
x axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the
negative direction of the local x axis.
Local y: This point load acts parallel to the member's local y axis. If this load is
y axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the
negative direction of the local y axis.
It should now be obvious that it is VERY important to have a thorough understanding of
member orientation when using "Local" load types.
Moment: This specifies that the load is a concentrated moment. Positive moments
follow the right-hand rule and apply a counter-clockwise rotational force to the member
(when viewing the model from the positive Z direction).
544
Temperature: This is used to specify temperatures at particular locations along the

length of a member. The module then uses these spot temperatures, in conjunction
with the joint temperatures specified in the Joint Data list, to establish temperature
gradients along the member(s). The module will calculate the effects of the specified
temperature gradient from the end joint to the location along the member at which the
temperature was specified. If you apply more temperature loads, the gradients are
developed between each adjacent point of temperature load.
Location
This specifies the distance from the "I" joint where the point load is located.
Load Type & Magnitude
You can enter seven different types of loads on the frame and combine them using the
factors on the Load Combinations tab.
Distributed Load Entry List
Active
This is a Yes/No checkbox that allows you to turn the load on and off. This is useful
when you want to quickly see the effect of removing the load.
Direction
This specifies the direction of application of the load.
Calculation Modules
545
Here is a description of the different directions:

Global X: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global X Axis and is distributed
along the full length of the member. If the member is sloped, the load will be applied for
the full length of the member. So if a member has a 10-foot rise and a 10-foot run, the
length of the load will equal 14.14 feet. Entering a positive value will apply the load to
the right (in the positive X direction).
Global Y: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global Y Axis and is distributed
along the full length of the member. If the member is sloped, the load will be applied for
the full length of the member. So if a member has a 10-foot rise and a 10-foot run, the
length of the load will equal 14.14 feet. The algebraic sign on the magnitude will affect
the direction of application based on the Applied Global Y Load Sign Convention
setting on the General tab as follows:
towards +Y (Upward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a positive
algebraic sign act upward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction with a
negative algebraic sign act downward.
towards -Y (Downward)", then loads applied in the Global Y direction with a
positive algebraic sign act downward, and loads applied in the Global Y direction
with a negative algebraic sign act upward.
Projected X: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global X Axis, but it is applied
only to the length of the member projected onto the Global Y Axis. So if a member has
a 10-foot rise and a 20-foot run, the length of the load will equal 10.00 feet (the rise of
the member).
Projected Y: This load acts in a direction parallel to the Global Y Axis, but it is applied
only to the length of the member projected onto the Global X axis. So if a member has
a 10-foot rise and a 20-foot run, the length of the load will equal 20.00 feet (the run of
the member).
In order to most efficiently describe the direction of application of the "Local" load
types, it helps to refer to the member local axis system. Each member can be thought
546
of as having its own x, y, and z coordinate axes that are mutually perpendicular and
follow the right-hand rule. The orientation of the member local axes can be determined
as follows:
2. The local z axis is always parallel to the Global Z axis.
local x. (Envision using the right hand to rotate the local z axis into the local x
axis, and the right thumb will automatically indicate the positive direction of the
local y axis.)
Local x: This distributed load acts parallel to the member's local x axis. If this load is
x axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the
negative direction of the local x axis.
Local y: This distributed load acts parallel to the member's local y axis. If this load is
y axis. If this load is specified with a negative magnitude, the load will act in the
negative direction of the local y axis.
It should now be obvious that it is VERY important to have a thorough understanding of
member orientation when using "Local" load types.
Temperature: This is used to specify temperatures at particular locations along the
length of a member. The module then uses these spot temperatures, in conjunction
with the joint temperatures specified in the Joint Data list, to establish temperature
gradients along the member(s). The module will calculate the effects of the specified
temperature gradient from the end joint to the location along the member at which the
temperature was specified. If you apply more temperature loads, the gradients are
developed between each adjacent point of temperature load.
Location - Start, End
This specifies the distance from the "I" joint to the beginning and end of the load.
Leaving BOTH values as zero (0.0) will cause the load to be applied to the full length
of the member.
Load Type & Magnitude
You can enter seven different types of loads on the frame and combine them using the
values on the Load Combinations tab.
10.8.3.3 Member Forces
This tab allows you to review the final calculated forces for a member.
Calculation Modules
547
To review member forces, first click the member of interest in the Select Member list.
Next, click on a load combination in the Select Load Comb. list. The member end forces
will be displayed for the chosen load combination, and a table of member forces at
increments along the length of the member will be shown.
This tab provides a more simplified view of member forces than the large tables displayed
on the Results tab.
548
10.8.4 Sections & Materials

The two tabs under Sections & Materials provide the ability to define the section properties
and material properties for the members used in the frame.
10.8.4.1 Section Data
The SECTION DATA tab allows you to specify sections to be used for the frame.
Section Label vs. Group Label
These two ways of labeling a section are very helpful and should be understood.
The Section Label is the actual name of the section, whether it is an AISC section name
like W14x22 or a wood section like 4x10. The Section Label always represents something
that can be retrieved from the internal databases.
It can also be the name of a section that you create by entering a name and some
properties.
The Group Label lets you associate a section name with a label that is meaningful to you
and that can be used on multiple members. This makes it so you can easily revise the
Calculation Modules
549
section that is assigned to a set of members without the need to change the section name
individually for all the members where it is used.
For example, say that members 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15 and 17 will all use the same section.
You don't know which AISC section will be selected, but you DO know it will be the same
section. You can assign a preliminary section name of HSS 3x3x1/4 and a group label of
"diagonal_1". If the frame analysis shows that the HSS section fails, you can simply
change it to a different section (with new properties). Because that section is linked to
those members with the group label, it simplifies the section assignment and modification
for the entire group.
Adding and Deleting Sections
When you click the [Add Section] button, the following window appears:
To select a section from the built-in AISC or NDS databases, just click the appropriate tab
and either type in the section name or click the [Lookup] button.
If you want to add your own section name and type in the properties, click the Undefined
tab, type in the desired section name, and click [OK].
[Delete Section] will delete the section you've highlighted in the list. Any members using
that section will be changed to reference the Default section.
550
Editing the List Columns

Section label
When you click on the entries in this column the entry position will change to a button
labeled [Lookup]. This button provides access to the built-in section databases.
Group Label
When you click on the entries in this column the entry position changes to a text
editing box.
Material
When you click on the entries in this column the entry position changes to a [Lookup]
button. This button provides access to a list of the material properties that you have
already defined on the Materials tab.
Section property values

These entry columns change to numeric entries when selected to allow entry of the
values.
10.8.4.2 Material Data
This screen provides the ability to define the material values used by the sections you
define.
Clicking [Add General Material] displays the following input box for you to enter the
material name:
Calculation Modules
551
To add a new material, enter the name of the material and then click [OK]. The new
material will appear in the Materials list on the Material Data tab.
Clicking [Add Wood Material] displays the Wood Reference Design Values database
where you can select a wood species and grade combination:
To select a wood material to use in the current calculation, click on the desired material in
the Wood Reference Design Values database and then click [Select]. The new wood
material will appear in the Materials list on the Material Data tab as shown below:
552
Clicking on the Elastic Modulus, Density, Yield Stress and Thermal Coefficient entry items
will change them into numeric entry boxes where you can type in a value and press [Tab]
or click off of the value to complete the data entry.
Elastic Modulus
The elastic modulus defines how the members will react to forces by defining the
relationship between stress and strain.
Density
The density entry is used only when the module calculates and applies member self
weights using the Member Self Weight entry column on the Load Combination tab.
Yield Stress
The use of this column and additional allowable stress information will be enhanced
as the module matures. For steel members this property is used to perform the AISC
member allowable stress evaluation. When wood stress evaluation is added, the
module will store other pertinent values from the built-in database.
Thermal Coefficient
This defines the rate of thermal expansion per degree of temperature change. This
value is only used when temperature loads are defined for a member.
Wood-Specific Values
The Wood-Specific Values are only populated when the selected material comes from
the Wood Reference Design Values database.
Calculation Modules
553
10.8.5 Load Combinations

This data table controls how all of the loads are applied to the frame and also enables you
to have member self weight loads automatically considered in specified directions.
The current list of load combinations comes from ASCE 7-05. It represents most of the
commonly used load combinations suggested for both Allowable Stress Design and
Strength Design. This table will be enhanced to provide more controlled specification of
load combinations including templates for serviceability checks.
Auto-Minimize Combinations to Run
This checkbox instructs the module to eliminate load combinations that have a
duplicate set of factored loads or specific combinations that include wind, seismic,
earth, and snow load types when none of those load types is present in the model.
The purpose is simply to suppress duplicate result sets.
Add
This button adds a load combination line to the list. You can then edit the factors.
Delete
This button deletes the currently selected load combination from the list.
(Load a new load combination set)

This button allow you to retrieve load combination sets from the built-in load
combination database and place them in the list. Clicking it will display a popup menu
listing the load combination sets currently included in the database.
Description of Items in List

Load Combination Name
This is the name of the load combination. It consists of abbreviations for each included
load type along with the associated numeric values that represent the respective load
factors. You cannot edit this name. It is constructed automatically based on the entries
554
you make in the following columns.

Note in the following image how the Load Combination Name is constructed from the
specified values:
Run LC
Clicking on this entry changes it to a checkbox, which controls whether that load
combination is used or ignored.
This button allows you to change the Run setting for all the load combinations at once
using several options.
Group Multiplier
This value acts as a multiplier on the entire load combination.
Lets say your values describe a combination of 1.0D + 0.7L + 0.3E and you want to
reduce that entire combined loading by 50%. You would enter a value of 0.5 for the
Group Multiplier. The resulting load combination would be 0.50 * (1.0D + 0.7L + 0.3E).
Individual Load Factors
Enter the numeric value to be applied to each type of load.
Member Self Weight
When either of these two values is non-zero, the module will calculate the weight of
each member (as cross sectional area * density * length) and consider that weight
during the analysis.
A "-1" value for "Global Y" will apply the member self weight downward (in the -Y
direction). A value of "1" for "Global X" will have the member self weight applied to the
right (the +X direction).
Calculation Modules
555
556
10.8.6 Wood Design

The 2D Frame module now incorporates wood stress checking according based on ASD
or LRFD methods according to NDS methods.
Adjustment Factors for Sawn Lumber
The module only collects CD or Lambda from the user.
The module assumes a value of 1.0 for CM, Ct , Cf u, Ci, Cr and CT.
The module calculates values for CL, CF , and CP.
The bearing area factor Cb never comes into play in the functions performed within
this module.
Adjustment Factors for Glued Laminated Timber

The module only collects CD or Lambda from the user.
The module assumes a value of 1.0 for CM, Ct , Cf u, Cc , CI , and Cv r.
The module calculates values for CL, CV, and CP.
The bearing area factor Cb never comes into play in the functions performed within
this module.
Calculation Modules
557
10.8.7 Results
The RESULTS tab provides extensive lists of detailed and summarized results from the
frame analysis.
10.8.7.1 Extreme Values
Joint Displacements & Reactions

This list summarizes the extreme joint displacements and support reactions. For each
joint there is a four-line result display. The first line shows the joint label and the maximum
values for each displacement and reaction direction. The second line indicates the load
combinations that create the maximum values. The third line indicates the minimum (most
negative) values for each displacement and reaction direction. The fourth line indicates the
load combinations that create the minimum values.
558
Member Forces
This table summarizes the extreme forces that occur anywhere along the length of each
member. (The detailed forces ALONG the length of the member are given in another list
within this Results section.)
For each member there is a four-line result display. The first line shows the member label
and the maximum member force values that occur anywhere along the length of the
member. The second line indicates the load combinations that create the maximum
values. The third line indicates the minimum (most negative) member force values that
occur anywhere along the length of the member. The fourth line indicates the load
combinations that create the minimum values.
Calculation Modules
559
Stress Checks
The Stress Checks tab is only displayed when the Member Stress Check Status item on
the General tab has been set to ASD or LRFD stress checks.
For each member this list shows the following information:
member label
section or group label
material
governing load combination that results in the maximum Axial plus Bending stress ratio
maximum stress ratio for the Axial plus Bending check
pass/fail status for the Axial plus Bending check
location along the member length where the critical Axial plus Bending result was found
to occur
governing load combination that results in the maximum Shear stress ratio
maximum stress ratio for the Shear check
pass/fail status for the Shear check
location along the member length where the critical Shear result was found to occur.
The image below shows the results for the steel members used in this frame:
560
10.8.7.2 Joint Displacements & Reactions
This list summarizes the joint displacements resulting from each load combination.
Joint displacements are reported with respect to the global coordinate system.
Clicking on the [+] icon to the left of each combination will expand the sub-list to show the
detailed values.
Calculation Modules
561
10.8.7.3 Member End Forces
This list summarizes the member end forces resulting from each load combination.
Clicking on the [+] icon to the left of each combination will expand the sub-list to show the
detailed values.
562
10.8.7.4 Member Details
This list gives a very detailed presentation of the member forces and member deflections
at small increments along the member length.
Note that the Member Deflections provided in this list are reported relative to the
straight-line chord drawn between the deflected position of the two end nodes of
the member. In other words, these Member Deflections will ALWAYS report a
value of zero at both ends of all members.
The list is a tree with two sub-levels:
The main level allows a choice of the load combination.
The next level down offers the choice of which member to observe.
Click on the [+] icons to expand the list to show more details. Click on the [-] icon will
compress the level.
Calculation Modules
563
10.8.7.5 Member Check Results
The Member Check Results tab is only shown when the Member Stress Check Status
item on the General tab has been set to ASD or LRFD stress checks.
Stress Check Results
For each member this list shows the following information:
member label
section or group label
material
governing load combination that results in the maximum stress ratios
maximum stress ratio for the Axial plus Bending check
pass/fail status for the Axial plus Bending check
location along the member length where the critical Axial plus Bending result was found
to occur
maximum stress ratio for the Shear check
pass/fail status for the Shear check
location along the member length where the critical Shear result was found to occur.
The image below shows the results for the steel members used in this frame:
564
Steel Details
This list pertains only to the stress checks for steel members, and it provides detailed
information about the stress checks at small increments along the length of each member.
Calculation Modules
565
10.8.7.6 Sign Convention
Coordinate Axis Convention

The right-hand rule states that if you take the vector cross product of X cross Y, the result is
in the Z direction. This is what is used to establish the positive Z direction if you know the
positive X and Y directions. It applies to the Global Coordinate Axis system and the member
local coordinate axis system in the 2-D Frame Analysis module, in the 2-D Frame Analysis
module.
The Global Coordinate Axis system is oriented such that X points to the right, Y points
upward, and Z is perpendicular to the screen in the 2-D Frame Analysis module.
The member local coordinate axis system is established as follows. A vector from the I node
to the J node establishes the member local x axis. The vector cross product of local x cross
Global Y produces the member local z direction. This works for all member orientations
except for vertically oriented members, because it is not possible to take the vector cross
product of two parallel vectors. So in those cases the module adopts the convention that the
member local z axis will be parallel to the Global Z axis. These are just mathematical rules
that establish that member local z will be perpendicular to the screen (unless you have
specified that the member is working in weak axis bending). The local z axis is
perpendicular to the web of a wide flange section. It typically represents the strong axis of a
member. Finally, we need to establish the orientation of the local y axis. Vector cross
product rules for a right-hand coordinate system also state that local z cross local x
produces local y. So this pins down the orientation of the local y axis. The local y axis of a
wide flange member lies in the plane of the web and is mutually perpendicular to the local x
and local z axes. For a horizontally oriented beam member, the local y axis points straight
566
up, parallel to the Global Y axis.
Result Sign Convention

Now for the sign conventions of the various results that are available.
Joint Displacements
Joint Displacements are reported with respect to the Global Coordinate Axis system. A
positive displacement indicates a displacement in the direction of the positive corresponding
axis. A positive rotation indicates a positive rotation about the Global Z axis. (Using the
thumb of the right hand, point the thumb in the direction of the positive Global Z axis, and the
natural curl of the right fingers will indicate the direction of a positive rotation.)
Reactions
Reactions are also reported with respect to the Global Coordinate Axis system. A positive
force reaction indicates a force in the direction of the positive corresponding axis. A positive
moment reaction indicates a positive moment about the Global Z axis. (Using the thumb of
the right hand, point the thumb in the direction of the positive Global Z axis, and the natural
curl of the right fingers will indicate the direction of a positive moment.)
Member End Forces

Member End Forces are reported with respect to the member local coordinate axis system.
A positive value of axial load at the I end of the member means that the force acts in the
member local x direction, so it is pushing into the starting end of the member, so it
represents a compressive force. Likewise, a negative value of axial load at the J end of the
member means that the force acts in the member local -x direction, so it is pushing into the
ending end of the member, so again this represents a compressive force.
Shears are also reported with respect to the member local coordinate axis system. A
positive value of shear at the I end of the member means that the force acts in the member
local y direction. Likewise, a negative value of shear at the J end of the member means that
the force acts in the member local -y direction.
A positive value of moment at either end of the member means that the moment acts in the
member local z direction. (Using the thumb of the right hand, point the thumb in the direction
of the positive Global Z axis, and the natural curl of the right fingers will indicate the direction
of a positive moment.)
Member Forces at Sections

The physical sense of the member forces at sections can best be established by relating to
the physical sense of the member end forces at the starting end of the member as described
above.
Calculation Modules
567
Deflections (Relative to member ends)

The deflections relative to member ends are measured parallel to the member local y axis
and are referenced from the straight-line chord connecting the undeflected end node
locations. Positive values represent deflections in the positive local y axis direction from that
straight-line chord.
568
10.8.8 Frame Sketch

This tab provides a graphical display of the frame. You can use various check boxes,
displacement magnification and load combination selection items to control the display.
You can quickly display a sketch of the frame when in another tab by hovering the cursor
over the double rectangle icon in the upper right corner of the window. See small image
below:
Calculation Modules
569
10.8.9 Member Diagrams

This tab allows you to display axial load, moment, shear and deflection diagrams for each
individual member in the frame.
You have two selection areas to use...
Select Load Combination
This box lists all of the load combinations that are being run. Click on any of the
available load combinations in the list to view diagrams based on that load
combination.
Select Member to Chart
This box lists all of the members in the frame. Click on any of the members in the list
to view diagrams for that member.
Tabs All, A, V, M, D
These tabs let you explore the force details for the selected member and load
combination in different ways.
When the All tab is selected, the extreme values of axial load, moment, shear, and
deflection are presented for the currently selected member.
The other tabs provide detailed list of the values for the currently selected which are
570
used to create the respective diagrams.
Calculation Modules
571
10.8.10 Reports
This tab lets you select what data to print from the frame analysis.
Under Output Data you have the choice of compressing the output to an Envelope Only
status. If Envelope Only is not checked the full details will be printed which can results in
many pages of output. It is advisable to look at a print preview to see what it generates.
Using Envelope Only will examine each table and print only the extreme values for each
load combination.
572
10.8.11 Printout
Here is a sample printout for the current frame:
Calculation Modules
573
574
Calculation Modules
575
576
Calculation Modules
577
578
10.9
Miscellaneous Calculation Modules
Calculation Modules
579
10.9.1 Torsional Analysis of Rigid Diphragm

This module provides horizontal force distribution analysis for a rigid diaphragm laterally
supported by up to 160 resisting elements (walls, columns or generic resisting elements).
Torsional Analysis of Rigid Diaphragm
The lateral shear force is applied to the rigid diaphragm, and that force is distributed to all
elements after the rotational stiffness analysis has been completed.
All lateral forces are distributed to each element on the basis of relative rigidities and
resisting element locations. Lateral shear forces, induced torsional forces, and minimum
eccentricity are considered after determining the location of the center of rigidity.
The module provides analysis for one level only. For structures where elements are
symmetrically placed on many levels, a calculation may be performed for each level and
results added to determine shears and overturning moments for each element. When
determining center of mass (where the lateral force is applied) on successively lower
levels when elements are NOT all aligned vertically, a new center of mass position should
be calculated based upon element forces acting from the diaphragm from the level above
and combined with the force at that level.
A very unique capability of this module is to have the applied lateral load applied at angular
increments for a full 360 degree rotation. The prior version of this module in our Version 5.8
software only applied the lateral load at 90 degree increments. Because seismic or wind
loads can occur at any angle, we provide the ability for the user to define the angles at
which the lateral load is applied to the rigid diaphragm for distribution to the resisting
elements.
When the lateral force is rotated around the specified number of angular increments, the
user has two options for specifying the magnitude of the force to consider at each angular
orientation. One option is to specify the magnitude of the applied lateral force and an
optional orthogonal force magnitude that will be considered to act concurrently. When this
option is selected, the program uses the same magnitude for the resultant lateral force at
all angular increments, and that magnitude is calculated as the SRSS of the applied lateral
force and the orthogonal force. The second option is to specify the magnitude of the
applied lateral force in the X direction and the magnitude of the applied lateral force in the Y
direction. When this option is selected, the program considers the lateral force to vary in
an elliptical manner as the angular orientation of the force changes. When the force is
considered to act at the zero-degree orientation, the magnitude will be exactly equal to the
specified lateral force in the X direction. As the angular orientation changes, the lateral
force will vary in that elliptical manner. When the force is considered to act at the 90degree orientation, the lateral force will be exactly equal to the specified force in the Y
direction, and so on.
Another feature is the handling of the minimum force eccentricity. The code specifies that
a minimum eccentricity must be used to increase the torsional effect created by the
580
moment arm between the point of load application and the center of rigidity. The minimum
eccentricity is typically specified as 5% of the building dimension measured perpendicular
to the direction of load application. To thoroughly address the eccentricity requirements,
this module creates an ellipse measuring 5% (or the specified value) of the building
dimension on each axis, around which the lateral load is applied.
So to recap.....the applied lateral load is applied at the angular increments you specify for a
full 360 degrees, and this is performed for the number of angular locations you specify
around the minimum eccentricity ellipse. This means if you use 15 degree angular
increments for load direction and 15 degree increments for accidental eccentricity, then
the lateral load is actually applied in (360/15+1) * (360/15+1) = 625 locations. This can
provide a very accurate calculation of applied torsions and direct shears to all resisting
elements connected to a rigid diaphragm.
Basic Usage
The most important step for successful use of this module is to properly enter the X
and Y location of the center of rigidity of each resisting element and its angle in
degrees counterclockwise from a normal Cartesian "0" degree orientation.
Calculation Modules
581
For each resisting element, its center of rigidity will be at the centroid of the wall or
column section.
The angle is measured with respect to the centerline of the length measurement (long
dimension). 0 degrees and 180 degrees defines a wall's angle as parallel to the Xaxis. 90 degrees and 270 degrees defines a wall as being parallel to the Y-axis. The
angle increases positively in a counterclockwise direction.
Lateral shears are typically the force at the diaphragm level due to wind or seismic
forces at that level. Distance to Center of Mass specifies the X-Y coordinates of the
center of the load ellipse where the lateral shears act. If lateral forces must be added
to the diaphragm from the level above or below, you must combine all forces to
calculate an adjusted mass application point. Maximum Dimensions are used to
calculate the minimum additional eccentricity that will be added to and subtracted
from the inherent eccentricity to calculate governing forces for each resisting
element.
When defining walls as resisting elements, the thickness, length, and height are
required for each wall providing lateral support to the diaphragm. These values are
used with the elastic modulus to establish the relative stiffness of each wall. For other
resisting elements you can enter the section information or just enter the resisting
element deflection under the same load for all elements.
The Elastic Modulus does not have to be an exact value if all of the elements are of
identical construction. In this situation, it may be simpler to just use a value of 1.
X & Y Distances for each resisting element define the location of the center of
stiffness of each element in plan view. This location will be used when combining all
stiffnesses and calculating the overall center of rigidity for all elements acting as a
system.
When using walls or columns as resisting elements, an inclination angle can be
entered for each element. For walls, this angle describes the orientation of the long
axis of the wall, measured in degrees counterclockwise from a normal Cartesian "0"
degree orientation. For columns, this angle describes the orientation of the X axis of
the column, measured in degrees counterclockwise from a normal Cartesian "0"
degree orientation. Enter all angles as positive.
Enter the fixity condition that best describes the element's top and bottom restraint
against rotation about the longitudinal and transverse axes. Fix-Pin would be
appropriate for an inverted pendulum condition (where walls or columns cantilever up
from a fixed base condition, but are free to rotate at their tops). Fix-Pin would also be
appropriate for a moment frame structure with pinned column bases (a structure that
behaves like a table). Fix-Fix would be appropriate for conditions where both the tops
and the bottoms of the columns and/or walls are fixed against rotation about their
longitudinal and transverse axes. This setting results in double curvature in the
vertical lateral force resisting elements.
582
Unique Features
This module uses a numerical approach to determine center of rigidity location and to
distribute lateral forces to each resisting element. Because resisting elements may be
located at any angle, a rigorous stiffness analysis is performed, calculating each element's
stiffness about both axes and combining the stiffnesses of all the elements to determine a
center of rigidity location.
Because this program performs a very complex stiffness matrix analysis for all resisting
elements, the traditional method of listing separate components of direct and torsional
shears is not applicable. Also, the module internally adds and subtracts the additional
accidental eccentricity (based on both maximum dimensions) about each axis to calculate
the maximum force for each element. This results in one final force value being displayed
for each wall.
Coordinate System
Please note that a strict X-Y coordinate system should be used to ensure that the analysis
is properly carried out. When setting up an X-Y coordinate axis, please follow the standard
Cartesian model with the diaphragm located such that X increases to the right and Y
increases up the screen. Unless another method is necessary, this will perform very well
(but the module can handle variations).
General Input Tab
Loading
Specify Primary & Orthogonal Force
Applied Lateral Force
Calculation Modules
583
This is the main force applied to the rigid diaphragm. The location of
application is defined by the load ellipse, the center of which is specified in
the input item labeled Location of Shear Application.
Additional Orthogonal Force
This is an optional force that is applied at a 90-degree angle to the main
force. Some codes specify that this force must be applied concurrently
with the main force.
Maximum Load Used for Analysis
This is the resultant force applied to the diaphragm, calculated as
sqrt(Main2 + Orthogonal2).
Specify Nonconcurrent X & Y Forces
Applied Lateral Force X Direction
This is the magnitude of the lateral force applied to the rigid diaphragm
when the load is oriented at exactly zero or 180 degrees.
Applied Lateral Force Y Direction
This is the magnitude of the lateral force applied to the rigid diaphragm
when the load is oriented at exactly 90 or 270 degrees.
When the load orientation is anywhere between the cardinal directions, the
magnitude of the applied lateral force is determined by assuming that the
lateral force follows a smoothly varying elliptical function.
The location of application is defined by the load ellipse, the center of which
is specified in the input item labeled Location of Shear Application.
Load Angular Increment
This module allows the force to be applied to the rigid diaphragm in almost all
angular directions.
According to the entry for angular increment, the module will apply the load to the
diaphragm at multiple angular increments. For example, if you select "15 deg", the
module will apply the lateral load at 0, 15, 30 degrees, etc. When the Load Angular
Increment is set to smaller values, it will result in slightly longer calculation times, but
it wall also allow the module to "zero in" more accurately on the actual maximum
shear forces in all of the resisting elements.
Note that there is also an option named "Specify". This allows you to very precisely
specify a singular direction for the application of load.
Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment
Most building codes require the consideration of an "accidental eccentricity". This is
a prescribed additional amount of moment arm that must be compounded with the
inherent eccentricity that already exists in the system; i.e. the distance between the
584
center of rigidity and the center of mass for seismic loads or the distance between
the center of rigidity and the center of exposure for wind loads. This additional
eccentricity accounts for the variability of the exact location of the center of rigidity in
normal as-built conditions.
Normally an "X direction" and a "Y direction" accidental eccentricity would be
determined as a function (typically 5%) of the overall building dimension
perpendicular to each direction. Then, the X directed force would be applied at two
locations:
center of mass PLUS "Y direction" eccentricity, and
center of mass MINUS "Y direction" eccentricity.
And the Y directed force would be applied at two locations:
center of mass PLUS "X direction" eccentricity, and
center of mass MINUS "X direction" eccentricity.
However, in this module the "X direction" and "Y direction" eccentricities are used to
specify the dimensions of an ellipse that encircles the center of mass. This ellipse
creates a continuous path that smoothly incorporates the "X direction" and "Y
direction" eccentricities. In this way, it defines all possible locations where the load
should be applied to account for all possible accidental eccentricity locations.
The entry for Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment specifies the angular
increment that will be used to subdivide the ellipse into a number of locations where
the force will be applied to the diaphragm.
Summary of Angular Increment & Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment
The module applies the lateral load at the "Load Angular Increments" at each location
of "Accidental Eccentricity Angular Increment" to generate an extensive set of results
from which the maximum force values for each resisting element may be inspected.
For example, setting both "Load Angular Increment" and "Accidental Eccentricity
Angular Increment" to 15 degrees tells the module to run (360/15 + 1) * (360/15 + 1)
= 625 separate analyses of force distributions to the resisting elements. This is not
the highest degree of detail that the program can provide, but it may offer a good
balance of accuracy versus analysis time.
Location of Shear Application
This specifies the X and Y location of the center of mass. The Accidental
Eccentricity ellipse will be circumscribed around this location.
Accidental Torsion Values
Accidental torsion is defined as a percentage of overall constructed diaphragm
dimension in each of two orthogonal directions. Therefore enter the necessary
eccentricity percentage and both maximum diaphragm dimensions here.
When Stiffness deflections are 0.00, assume completely flexible
Note the option named "When Stiffness deflections are 0.00, assume completely
flexible". This option can be used if your intent is to specify that an element is
completely flexible in a certain direction. In this situation, you would need to specify
Calculation Modules
585
an infinite deflection in that direction. So as a convenience, the system has been

configured such that when this option is selected, it will interpret a deflection value of
0.00 as meaning that the element is completely flexible in that direction (i.e. has no
ability to resist an applied force in that direction).
Resisting Elements Tab
Resisting Element Type

This module allows you to use three types of resisting elements. In past versions of
this module, only walls were allowed. But many users wanted to enter information for
braced frames or cantilevered columns for open buildings. So we've expanded this
module to allow more general types of lateral resisting elements.
WALL: Click the [Use a Wall] button to define a wall as a resisting element. The wall
must be rectangular in plan and must have a non-zero height. The selections for
"Fix" and "Pin" will alter the equation used to calculate deflection in BOTH directions
of the wall (unless the option is selected to "Force all MINOR AXIS Stiffnesses to
ZERO"). Using the entered height, length, thickness, and modulus of elasticity for
bending and shear, the module will calculate the bending and shear stiffness of the
wall and report the deflection for a unit 1 kip applied load.
COLUMN: Click the [Use a Bending Member] button to define a column as a

resisting element. This will be a linear member whose stiffness is specified simply
by its X and Y axis moments of inertia. You must also provide a value for the
modulus of elasticity of the column for bending. Finally, you must make a fixity
selection, which dictates the equation used to calculate deflection in BOTH
directions of the column (unless the option is selected to "Force all MINOR AXIS
Stiffnesses to ZERO"). Using these settings, the module will calculate the bending
stiffness of the column and report the deflection for a unit 1 kip applied load.
586
GENERIC ELEMENT: Click the [Use Generic Resisting Element] button to

specify a generic resisting element whose lateral deflection is known for an applied 1
kip load. This selection is intended for complex resisting elements like braced or
moment frames, where another analysis module has determined the unit deflection.
Add & Delete Buttons

Use the [Add] and [Delete] buttons to add a new resisting element or delete the one
currently highlighted in the list.
Element Data
This area allows you to specify a label and location of the center of resistance for a
resisting element.
Resisting Element List
This is the list that you create to define the resisting element locations that give
lateral force resistance to the rigid diaphragm.
This table serves to give a summary of the deflections, location and major axis angle
for each element. When you click to highlight a line in the table, the information for
that resisting element is brought into the variables on the input area.
Summary Maximum Tab
Please note that a STRICT X-Y coordinate system should be used to ensure that the
analysis is properly carried out. When setting up an X-Y coordinate axis, please follow the
standard Cartesian model with the diaphragm.
Recall that the module calculates the forces to each resisting element by rotating the force
about its point of application. That point of application is in increments around an accidental
eccentricity ellipse.
This Summary Maximums tab provides the maximum forces for each resisting element
along the major and minor axis of the element.
For the wall named "4" in the image below, the module has examined all of the calculated
forces and found that the maximum shear force along the MAJOR axis was 142.060 kips,
resulting from the "Maximum Load Used for Analysis" being applied in a direction of 315
degrees. The location at which that force was applied was along the perimeter of the
accidental eccentricity ellipse and the X,Y coordinates of that location are (94.98, -57.51)
feet from the global datum point.
Similarly for the MINOR axis, the maximum shear force was found to occur when the load
Calculation Modules
587
was applied at 120 degrees.
Force Summary Detail Tab

This tab provides the main table that shows all of the force calculations for each resisting
element. It is tree structured, so clicking the [+] sign to the left of each item name will
expand the result set for that item.
In the image below we see that the data for the wall labeled "4" is expanded. Below "Label :
4" we see many lines labeled "0 deg". These are the results for the load applied at an
orientation of 0 degrees. On each "0 deg" line, observe that the "X Ecc" and "Y Ecc" values
are changing. These values are the locations of the applied load as it moves its way
around the accidental eccentricity ellipse. The note at the top of the table indicates that the
analysis is based on 15-degree "Eccentricity Location" increments. This implies that there
will be (360 degrees/15 degrees) = 24 lines of data based on the "0 deg" force orientation.
Then, if we scrolled down through the table, we would see that the load application angle
has also been set to change in 15-degree increments as well.
Sketch Tab
588
Analysis Procedure
Please see the following description for the procedure used to calculate the system
stiffness matrix and resolve the forces for each resisting element.
Calculation Modules
589
590
Calculation Modules
591
592
Calculation Modules
593
10.9.2 Point Load on Slab

This module calculates the capacity of an unreinforced concrete slab to support isolated
concentrated loads. Typical use is for legs of storage racks not supported by a building
structure, and is not within the scope of the ACI code.
The design method is based on the recent research of Shentu, Jiang and Hsu. For further
information see (1) "Load carrying capacity for concrete slabs on grade" in the the ACE
Journal of Structural Engineering January 1997; (2) Acceptable Design & Analysis methods
for use of slabs-on-grade foundations, City of Los Angeles LAMC91.1806 and (3) Seismic
considerations for steel storage racks, FEMA 460 September 2005.
The work of Shentu and colleagues has shown that load carrying capacity, verified with test
results, can be very closely predicted using the formulas given below.
Rather than historical elastic methods, the method used here is elasto-plastic which is
more applicable to ultimate capacity determination.
Allowable load capacity is given by this equation:
Pn = 1.72 [(ks R1 / Ec ) 10,000 + 3.60] * ft' * d2
Where
ks is the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil, pci
R1 is sqrt(Plate Width * Plate Length) / 2, inches
Ec is the concrete elastic modulus, psi
ft' is the tensile strength of the concrete = 7.5 sqrt(f'c), psi
d is the slab thickness, inches
The above equation assumes that the load acting on the slab is unique and no other nearby
loads are affecting the calculation.
To assist in the evaluation of slabs-on-grade, this module also provides a calculation of the
distance that the closest load may be without affecting the calculated slab capacity. The
calculation given below is based on research of Packard, Pickett & Ray and more recently
by Spears and Panarese. It is also discussed in ACI 360R-92(4).
In this module the distance is calculated as 1.5 * "Radius of Relative Stiffness" given by the
following equation:
b = [ Ec d3 / (12 * (1-u2) * ks )] 0.25
594
Where
b is the radius of relative stiffness
Ec is the concrete elastic modulus, psi
d is the slab thickness, inches
u is Poisson's ratio which is set to 0.15 in this module
ks is the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil, pci
Additionally this module allows the user to enter a Factor of Safety that is used when the
module reports the adequacy of each applied load.
Tabular Entry Screen
This module is designed to allow the user to create a table of loads applied to a particular
concrete slab and supporting soil with one set of material properties.
You can then use the [Add], [Edit] and [Delete] buttons to add a set of applied loads and
base plate dimensions. From this data all load combinations are used to determine the
maximum axial force. For the plate dimension you specify, the maximum load capacity for
the point load application is calculated and compared with your required factor of safety.
The option for ASD or LRFD analysis only changes the load combination set used.
Because this is a non-ACI design process, you need to enter a Factor of Safety to
determine the final design status. Research material suggests a F.S. of 3.0.
Calculation Modules
Load Combinations
595
596
10.9.3 General Section Property Calculator

Overview
This module determines section properties for built-up sections with rectangles, hollow
circles, solid circles, standard AISC steel sections and general multi-sided solid shapes.
General Section Property Calculator
AISC sections can be recalled from the database files and can be included in the built-up
section. All sections from the 13th Edition AISC Steel Construction Manual are available,
and can be reoriented as necessary.
The calculated section property values include: area, moments of inertia, center of gravity
location, extreme fiber distances, section moduli, and radius of gyration.
Basic Usage
Before starting data entry, be sure you have set up an X-Y coordinate system to
consistently reference all component locations.
For each rectangular shape, enter the height, width, and center of area measured from
the datum.
Calculation Modules
597
Hollow circular sections are entered by specifying the outside radius and thickness. Solid
circular sections are entered by specifying the outside radius and setting the thickness to
zero.
For AISC sections, you can use the Xcg and Ycg input fields to locate the section's
centroid position with respect to the datum. The module knows the centroid location of
AISC members with respect to their own extreme fiber locations. However, you need to
enter the location of the member's centroid in relation to the other members in the builtup section. Be careful, as this can be tricky when entering channels, angles, and tee
sections that are rotated.
A unique feature allows the user to specify that AISC sections can be rotated in 90degree increments, and steel angle sections can also be mirrored about their Y axis.

The module operates on a simple calculation procedure:
Calculate the moment of inertia of each shape,
Calculate the neutral axis of the group of shapes, and
Calculate the moment of inertia of the group using I + A*D2 equations.
More complex analysis such as polar moment of inertia, plastic moduli, and buckling
constants are beyond the scope of the module at this time but continuing development will
add these items in future updates.
Rolled Section / Table tab
This tab enables you to specify up to 10 sections from the AISC 13th Edition database to
use in a built-up member.
The square buttons across the top of the tab are used to represent the component
sections that comprise your built-up shape. When a section has been specified for a
particular button, a small green upward facing triangle will be shown under the
corresponding button. Click on any button to add a section or view and modify the section
598
that has already been assigned to that button.

Note: It is important to understand that the numbered buttons on the various tabs DO NOT
represent different built-up shapes. Instead, each instance of this module only creates
ONE built-up shape, and the overall built-up shape consists of a composite of ALL
sections that currently exist on ANY buttons in the Rolled Section / Table tab, the
Rectangular & Circular tab, and the General Shapes tab.
To insert an AISC section you can:
Type in the section name and press [Tab]. The module will search the database and
retrieve the information.
Use the [Browse Steel Sections] button to display the steel database where you can
navigate and select the desired section.
Rotation Angle: Counter-Clockwise
If you need to rotate a section, click one of the four angular rotation buttons.
Rotate Section 180 degrees about its own y-y Axis
This checkbox option will only be displayed for single-angle sections. It offers the
ability to mirror a single-angle section if needed.
Xcg & Ycg
Enter the location of the section's centroidal axis measured from the datum (the origin
of your assumed X-Y Cartesian coordinate system).
Section Properties
These values will be filled in after you make your choice from the AISC database.
HOWEVER you can alter these values yourself. Of particular importance for
unsymmetrical sections is entering the correct "Xbar" and "Ybar" location. This is the
distance from the lower-left edge of the section, measured upwards and to the right, to
the centroidal axis position of the section.
Click the [Browse Steel Sections] button to display the AISC database window:
Calculation Modules
599
Rectangular & Circular tab
This tab allows you to specify simple rectangular and circular shapes.
corresponding button. Click on any button to add a section or view and modify the section
that has already been assigned to that button.
Not Used / Rectangular / Circular
Select the shape you wish to use for this item.
600
Rectangular Data Entry

When a rectangular shape is chosen the data entry consists of height and width.
Circular Data Entry
When a circular shape is selected the data entry consists of Outside Radius and Wall
Thickness (not inside radius). To model a solid circular section, enter the appropriate
Outside Radius and set the Wall Thickness to zero.
Xcg & Ycg

General Shapes tab
This tab allows you to select from a number of common polygonal shapes. With each
selection the reference drawing and data entry prompts will change.
Calculation Modules
601
corresponding button. Click on any button to add a section or view and modify the
section that has already been assigned to that button.
Xcg & Ycg
Rotation Angle: Counter-Clockwise
For these shapes you can rotate the section in one-degree increments. Positive
angles represent counter-clockwise rotation.
Results Tab
Detailed Properties Table

This table summarizes each of the component items you have added to the section. It
reports their individual locations, properties and maximum distance from CG for each
of the four edges.
Note: This table scrolls to the right. Just use the scroll bar along the bottom of the
table.
Total Area
The total area of all defined shapes, including the area of any AISC sections which
have been included in the built-up shape.
Inertia: Ixx & Iyy
The overall moment of inertia of the composite section is determined by applying the
following equation to all the defined shapes:
Ixx = Iox + (A * dy 2) and Iyy = Ioy + (A * dx 2)
where d = Distance from the shape's C.G. to the overall C.G. of the composite
section, measured in the direction indicated by the subscript.
602
Section Modulus: Sxx and Syy

These values are the calculated section moduli of the composite section. The values
are determined by dividing Ixx or Iyy by the extreme fiber distances above, below, right,
and left of the center of gravity of the section.
Radius of Gyration
The radius of gyration of the composite section is determined using the typical
equation: rxx = (Ixx /A) and ryy = (Iyy /A) .
Max Distance from CG
For each of the sections in the built-up shape, these columns report the distance from
the extreme fibers of that section to the C.G. of the composite section.
Sketch
Calculation Modules
603
10.9.4 Rebar Development Table

This module calculates development and splice lengths for deformed steel rebar in
concrete. Since typical development lengths are readily available in tables, this module is
primarily for developing tables of development lengths when unusual conditions affect the
lengths.
The module uses ACI 318-05 sections 12.1, 12.2, 12.3 and 12.5 for straight tension &
compression development and hooked tension development.
Two major categories of development calculation are available; straight development and
hooked development. The module calculates the basic tension development length for
straight and hooked cases, and compression development for straight cases only.
Item Descriptions
Print This Information
Check this box if you want the development calculation on the current tab to appear on
the printout.
This Bar
Enter a description for the current development calc.
604
Bar Details
Enter the basic stress info for this bar. You can also select to perform the calculation
according to ACI 318-91.
Straight Development
This section performs tension & compression bar development according to ACI
section 12.2 and 12.3. Please refer to the ACI code for the proper definitions of these
entries.
Hooked Development
This section performs tension hooked rebar development according to ACI section
12.5. Please refer to the ACI code for the proper definitions of these entries.
Calculation Modules
605
10.9.5 Steel Bolt Group Analysis

This module applies the Elastic Method to determine the force distribution from loads
applied to a group of up to 16 bolts.
The required input data includes vertical and horizontal load magnitudes and their location
with respect to a datum point, along with the coordinates of up to sixteen bolts.
Using these force and bolt coordinates, the module calculates direct shears and torsional
shears on each bolt due to its relative location within the group.
Note:
At least two bolts should be specified.
All bolts are assumed to be of the same deformation characteristics when loads are
distributed.
Vertical and Horizontal forces are divided by the number of fasteners to give direct
shears.
General Tab
Specify the locations up to 16 bolts. Use the Total Number of Bolts entry to indicate bolt
quantity. The correct number of data entry locations will be displayed.
606
Loads Tab
Enter the magnitude of the applied loads, the angle of load application measured CCW
from Cartesian zero degrees and the location of the point of load application relative to the
Datum point. The module now accepts applied moments as well.

Based upon the selection of ASD or LRFD factoring, the appropriate load combinations will
be displayed on the load combinations tab.
Calculation Modules
607
Results Tab
On the left side of this tab are the calculated Center of Bolt Group location, calculated
moment applied to the group from the load combination that creates the extreme moment
and the eccentricity of the load application from the Center of Bolt Group.
In the table on the right are presented the calculated of force for each bolt due to direct and
torsional shears for each axis (after the applied load is reduced to X & Y components).
Detailed Bolt Results

This tab provides the detailed calculations for all load combinations and all bolts.
608
Sketch
Calculation Modules
609
10.9.6 Steel Base Plate

This module designs steel column base plates according to the 13th Edition AISC Steel
Construction Manual and the AISC Design Guide 1, Second Edition. Click here for a video:
Steel Base Plate
This module handles base plate design for the following conditions:
where the resultant eccentricity is zero,
where the resultant eccentricity is within the middle third for full bearing pressure,
where the resultant eccentricity is outside the middle third resulting in a triangular
pressure distribution on part of the base plate, and
extreme eccentricity conditions where anchor bolts are required.
This module does not handle conditions where NET UPLIFT is present. When the
summation of factored axial loads in a load combination is negative, then uplift controls and
the module will not calculate. Under these conditions, a red error message will be
displayed at the bottom of the window to notify you of this condition.
General & Materials Tab
610
The right side of this tab will look slightly different for LRFD:
For Axial Load Cases Only....

This selection controls the upward pressure used to design the plate. A brief
description of each choice is provided below the buttons for each selection.
Full Bearing: Bearing is assumed uniform under plate. If plate area is larger than
needed, the larger "m" and "n" cantilevered dimensions could result in a thicker plate
than would be required if the pressure was calculated by the other option.
Bearing Area = P / Fp: Base plate is considered flexible with bearing concentrated
close to column. Maximum Fp is used to calculate ''design'' minimum plate size.
Determining the bearing pressure by this method might result in thicker plates if
bending stress is high between webs or within pipe or tube walls.
AISC 360-05 Method
Select between ASD or LRFD design methods.
Calculation Modules
611
Steel Base Plate Fy

Specify the yield strength of the base plate material.
ASD: Omega
Enter the capacity reduction factor, Omega, to be used in ASD per AISC 360-05.
LRFD: Phi
Enter the capacity reduction factor, Phi, to be used in LRFD per AISC 360-05.
Concrete Support f'c
28-day compressive strength of concrete used to support the base plate.
Use AISC 360-05 Section J.8 for "Fp" Calculation
Checking this box will tell the module to use AISC 360-05 Section J.8 to calculate the
allowable bearing pressure of the support. When unchecked the screen will change
slightly as shown below to allow entry of the allowable bearing pressure.
ASD: Omega per AISC J.8

AISC 360-05 Section J.8 specifies Omega as 2.5. This entry allows the value to be
modified.
LRFD: Phi per AISC J.8
AISC 360-05 Section J.8 specifies Phi as 0.6. This entry allows the value to be
modified.
Column & Plate Tab
Steel Section Name & Database Button

612
Type the AISC section name in the entry and press [Tab]. The module will look up the
section in the Steel database and, if found, will retrieve the values. The name must be
typed just as it appears in the 13th Edition AISC Steel Construction Manual.
Or click the [Section Database]

and select a section.
button to display the built-in steel database
[Edit Values] Button

Clicking this button will allow you to enter the steel properties.
Plate Information
Enter the length, width and thickness of the base plate. Use the
change the values...the results are instantly recalculated.
buttons to quickly
Concrete Support
Enter the support dimensions that will be used to calculate the allowable bearing
pressure increase, A1 * sqrt(A2/A1).
Applied Loads Tab
Py - Axial Load
This column of entries specifies the axial load applied to the base plate. Note that
positive values represent downward loads.
Vz - Shear
This column of entries specifies the shear applied parallel to the plate and to be
resisted by the anchor bolts.
Mx - Moment
This column of entries specifies the moment that the column applies to the plate.
Calculation Modules
613
Anchor Bolts Tab

Items on this tab specify the strength and location of the anchor bolts that will resist shear
and tension.
Description
Description of the bolt for your reference. Not used by module.
Tension Capacity
Net tension capacity of bolt after all capacity factors are applied.
Shear Capacity
Net shear capacity of bolt after all capacity factors are applied.
Edge Distance
Distance from edge of plate to center of bolt closest to edge.
Number of Bolts in a Row
The "Row" referred to is a row of bolts at the plate edge that will take any tension
force.
Number of Bolt Rows
Number of rows of bolts.
Row Spacing
Spacing of rows when more than one row is used.

This tab displays the load combinations used for either the ASD or LRFD selections.
The screen capture below shows a sample of the load combinations factors:
614
Results Tab - Overall

The Results tab contains a list of load combinations on the left and a summary of all the
calculated values for each load combination on the right. Click one of the load
combinations in the list to view results specifically for that load combination.
The very first item in the list will always say Overall Results. The module will examine the
results for all of the load combinations and determine which gives the extreme condition of
stress and presents it the Overall Results item. This is the governing case for the base
plate.
Note that Maximum Bending Stress is calculated using the plastic section modulus, in
keeping with AISC Design Guide 1, Second Edition.
Results Tab - Axial Load Only

When a load combination results in only an axial load being applied, the summary of
information below is displayed. See the AISC Design Guide #1 starting on page 4 for a
description of the values present here.
Calculation Modules
615
Results Tab - Small Eccentricity

When a load combination results in an axial load and very small moment being applied, the
summary of information below is displayed. This condition is caused when the moment
causes the resultant eccentricity of the axial load to be within the middle 1/3rd of the base
plate. See the AISC Design Guide #1 starting on page 19 for a description of the values
present here.
Results Tab - Large Eccentricity

When a load combination results in an axial load and large moment being applied, the
summary of information below is seen. This condition is caused when the moment causes
the resultant eccentricity of the axial load to be outside the middle 1/3rd of the base plate.
See the AISC Design Guide #1 starting on page 21 for a description of the values present
here.
616
Sketch Tab
Calculation Modules
617
10.10 External Items

The Structural Engineering Library allows you to add non-ENERCALC items into a
Project File, such as:
MS Excel Spreadsheets
MS Word Documents
Adobe Acrobat PDF Files
Scanned Images
The ability to include these types of items allows you to use the ENERCALC Project File
as a central point of document preparation and storage for structural project calculations.
These external items can be interspersed within the ENERCALC calculations. Here is an
image of the Project Manager showing a Division that has been created specifically to
contain the external items we are about to add:
618
10.10.1 EXCEL Spreadsheet

Inserting an EXCEL Spreadsheet
Adding a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to the project requires that you already have
Excel loaded on your computer.
To add an Excel spreadsheet to your Project, click on the Division where you would like to
insert the spreadsheet, click the [Add] button, and then click [MS Excel Spreadsheet]:
The screen will appear like this, ready for you to load the spreadsheet of your choice:
Calculation Modules
619
(1) Use the [Open/Retrieve] button to load the desired Excel spreadsheet.
(2) Use the [Print Document] button to print this item using the Excel printing functionality.
(3) Use the [Clear Document] button to remove the currently loaded Excel spreadsheet
from the Project File.
(4) Use the [SaveAs] button to save the currently loaded Excel spreadsheet to a new
filename.
(5) The Storage Method buttons are used to specify how the Excel spreadsheet will be
stored for use within ENERCALC.
[Embed] saves a copy of the item in the Project File. (Easiest for portability, results in
larger Project File size, changes to original item will not be visible.)
[Link] saves a link to the item in Project File. (Changes to original item will be visible,
keeps Project File size small, not easily portable.)
(6) This area is used to define the name of the Excel spreadsheet when it is stored
externally from the Project File.
(7) Enter a description of this item as needed. It will be displayed in the Descriptions
column of the Project Manager for reference.
(8) This is the area where the Excel spreadsheet is loaded, as shown below:
620
The last step is to click the [Save & Exit] button. The display will return to the Project
Manager, and you will see an indication that the selected spreadsheet has been attached
as shown in the image below:
Calculation Modules
621
622
10.10.2 WORD Document

Inserting a WORD Document
Adding a Microsoft Word document to the Project requires that you already have
Word loaded on your computer.
To add a Word document to your Project, click on the Division where you would like to
insert the document, click the [Add] button, and then click [MS Word Document]:
The screen will appear like this, ready for you to load the document of your choice:
Calculation Modules
623
(1) Use the [Open/Retrieve] button to load the desired Word document.
(2) Use the [Print Document] button to print this item using the Word printing functionality.
(3) Use the [Clear Document] button to delete the currently loaded Word document from
the Project File.
(4) Use the [SaveAs] button to save the currently loaded Word document to a new
filename.
(5) The Storage Method buttons are used to specify how the Word document will be stored
for use within ENERCALC.
[Embed] saves a copy of the item in the Project File. (Easiest for portability, results
in larger Project File size, changes to original item will not be visible.)
(6) This area is used to define the name of the Word document when it is stored externally
from the Project File.
624
(8) This is the area where the Word document is loaded, as shown below:
Manager, and you will see an indication that the selected document has been attached as
shown in the image below:
Calculation Modules
625
626
10.10.3 Adobe Acrobat PDF

Inserting an Adobe Acrobat PDF
Note: When using Adobe Reader X, it is necessary to disable Protected Mode if PDFs are
to be used as External Items in the Structural Engineering Library. To disable Protected
Mode in Adobe Reader X, go to Edit > Preferences > General > Application Startup, and
disable the option named Enable Protected Mode at startup.
To add an Adobe Acrobat PDF file to your Project, click on the Division where you would
like to insert the document, click the [Add] button, and then click [Acrobat PDF]:
The screen will appear like this, ready for you to load the PDF file of your choice:
Calculation Modules
627
(1) Use the [Open/Retrieve] button to load the desired PDF file.
(2) Use the [Print Document] button to print this item using the PDF printing functionality.
(3) Use the [Clear Document] button to delete the currently loaded PDF file from the
Project File.
(4) The Storage Method buttons are used to specify how the PDF file will be stored for use
within ENERCALC.
[Embed] saves a copy of the item in the Project File. (Easiest for portability, results in
larger Project File size, changes to original item will not be visible.)
(5) This area is used to define the name of the PDF file when it is stored externally from
the Project File.
(7) This is the area where the PDF file is loaded, as shown below:
628
Manager, and you will see an indication that the selected PDF file has been attached as
shown in the image below:
Calculation Modules
629
630
10.10.4 Scanned Document

Inserting a Scanned Document
The Structural Engineering Library now offers you the ability to use your scanner to create
items and insert them into your Project File. To scan an item and add it to your Project File,
click on the Division where you would like to insert the scanned item, click the [Add] button,
and then click [Scan a Document]:
When the module is loaded you will see the screen below:
Calculation Modules
631
Here is a description of the various controls in this module:

Scan Page: Using all the settings on the "Scanner Setup" page, perform a high resolution
scan.
Delete & Rescan: Delete the currently visible scan and rescan the image at a different
resolution.
Print this Scan: Print the currently visible image to a printer.
Save scanned image: Save the current scan to a file.
Scanner Setup: Access the scanner setup screen (see image below)
632
Options:
Reset Scanner: Send signals to the scanner to reset itself to its default state.
Preview/Crop/Scan: Perform a fast, low resolution "preview" scan and display it for your
use in defining the final region that will be used for the high resolution scan.
Delete Page: Remove the current scan from this viewer.
Image Manipulation buttons: Allow you to change the way you view the scans in this
document.
Calculation Modules
633
To create a scanned item, place the item on the scanner and click the [Scan Page]
button. If desired, enter text in the Description field. Then, click the [Save & Exit]
button. The display will return to the Project Manager, and you will see an indication that
the scanned item has been attached as shown in the image below:

Enercalc 6.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enercalc 6.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enercalc 6.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Structural Engineering Library

Structural Engineering Library

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

ENERCALC Engineering Software

Post Office Box 188

Vesion 6 User's Reference

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Part II Installation & Activation

Part III Software Updates

Part IV Support & Maintenance

Part V Getting Started

Part VI Program Overview

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Part VII Main Menu

Part VIII Project Manager

Part IX Sample Session

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Part X Calculation Modules

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

with our website at

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

system designed to be as easy as 1-2-3 was introduced.

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Warning & Disclaimer

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

License & Copyright

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

End of Service Policy

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Installation & Activation

Installation & Activation

Important: Anti-Virus software and Firewalls

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

for an application for an Academic License.

Plan Check Mode

for an application for a

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Installation & Activation

Installation for use with a Flex License

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

Installation for use with a Network License

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Installation & Activation

Single Computer Installation

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Structural Engineering Library Version 6

The activation types behave as follows:

1983-2012 ENERCALC, INC

Installation & Activation